Questions and Answers Real

See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.
net/publication/317177098
Questions and Answers on General Knowledge In Art
Book · October 2012
CITATIONS READS
0 11,363
1 author:
Dickson Adom
Kwame Nkrumah University Of Science and Technology
69 PUBLICATIONS 73 CITATIONS
SEE PROFILE
Some of the authors of this publication are also working on these related projects:
Societal Norms tailored for biodiversity conservation View project
Adinkra cultural symbols for environmental sustainability education in Ghana View project
All content following this page was uploaded by Dickson Adom on 27 May 2017.
The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.

ADOM SERIES - GENERAL KNOWLEDGE IN ART MADE EASY
RATIONALE FOR VISUAL ARTS EDUCATION
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. A means of self-expression is known as

(a) Art (b) Law (c) Poetry (d) Science
2. The two main branches of art are

(a) Graphic design and textiles (b)Visual arts and performing arts
(c) Performing arts and creative arts (d) Liberal arts and visual arts
3. All these are visual art forms except

(a) Ceramics (b)music (c) painting (d) leather work
4. Which one among these is a performing art form?

(a) Leather work (b) Dance (c) Basketry (d) Graphic design
5. An artist who makes illustrations in books is referred to as

(a) Book binder (b) Book illustrator (c) Calligrapher (d) Art critic
6. An artist who designs packages for products of firms and industries is called
(a) Letterer (b) Portrait painter (c) Calligrapher (d) Package designer
7. An artist who design cloths and dresses before they are sewn is referred to as a
(a) Sculptor (b) Jewellery (c) Fashion designer (d) Calligrapher
8. Which of these is a reason why visual art should be studied in schools?

(a) It make dull students bright (b) The programme is easy to pass
(c) It fosters creativity (d) Assists in passing subjects
9. Visual art education aid learners in developing their heads, hands and
(a) Foot (b) lungs (c) heart (d) muscles
10. To correct growth deficiencies, art serve as a/an

(a) Pill (b) Therapy (c) Exercise (d) Counsellor
11. Which of these subjects is a composite of the basic knowledge in all visual art
subjects including Art history and appreciation?
(a) Sculpture (b) Graphic design (c) Textiles (d) General Knowledge in Art
Page 1
12. Which of these government agencies ensure the promotion of the arts?
(a) Ministry of Trade (b) Art Councils (c) Culture Centre (d) Market
squares
13. Verbal arts include

(a) Prayers and incantations (b) Drumming and dancing
(c) Body mutilation (d) Materials in the chief’s office
14. The artist communicates ideas through

(a) Observation (b) Copying others (c) Self-expression (d) Experimentation
15. Art is an integral part of

(a) Everyday life (b) Warfare (c) Commerce (d) Education
16. The study of art helps the learner to become

(a) Neat (b) Creative (c) Sober (d) Strict
17. Visual art refers to

(a) Artefacts inspired by vision (b) Arts that are performed
(c) Art forms that can be seen and touched (d) Three- dimensional art
18. Choose from the following sets, the one that belongs purely to the applied arts
(a) Pottery, leatherwork, beadwork, textiles (b) Sculpture, textiles,
photography, graphics (c) Painting, music, goldsmithing, poetry
(d) Architecture, sculpture, textiles, basketry
19. To cope with the strains and stresses in life, the artist must
(a) Understand cultural aesthetics (b) Create works for enjoyment
(c) Visit modern art galleries (d) Produce a lot of artworks
20. The use of tools and materials help to educate the

(a) Brain and bones (b) Hearts and blood (c) Eye and foot (d) hand and head
21. An expert with a discriminating taste in an area of fine art is known as

(a) connoisseur (b) critic (c) curator (d) speculator
22. An artist exercises his civic responsibility when he
Page 2
(a) creates artefacts for the society (b) sharpens tools after pouring libations
(c) has knowledge about tools and materials (d) observes taboos of his society
23. Visual Art Education is useful for

(a) technological advancement (b) aesthetic development (c) political
development (d) agricultural development
24. Which of the following clearly identifies plastic art?

(a) Sculpture and metal work (b) Music and architecture (c) Sculpture and
textiles (d) Textiles and architecture
25. The art which depicts recognizable natural forms is referred to as

(a) abstract (b) calligraphic (c) geometric (d) figurative
26. The subject matter of a work of art is its

(a) caption (b)style (c) theme (d)title
27. Goods are packaged to increase their

a. Cost b. Quality c. Value d. Weight
28. Water and oil are used on

a. Acrylic b. Plasticine c. Putty d. Wax
29. Visual art education fosters creativity by

a. Promoting citizenship qualities in artist b. Creating an awareness of the role
of art c. Helping artists to think and act uniquely d. Encouraging the
appreciation of cultural heritage
30. Abstract art means

a. Portraiture b. Romantic c. Naturalistic art d. Non-representational art
31. Works of art are preserved and displayed in

a. Studio b. Museums c. Art rooms d. Archives
32. A drawing or painting done on a wall is a

a. Monogram b. Mural c. Portrait d. Still life
33. In visual art, the regular repetitions of form is known as

a. Dominance b. Beauty c. Rhythm d. Balance
Page 3
34. Batik literally means to draw with

a. Ink b. Brush c. Wax d. Cloth
35. Which is the most correct statement about the study of art?
a. Art is only learnt in schools b. Only talented people study art
c. Everybody can become an artist d. Art is studied by school children
36. What type of fibre is rayon?

a. Protein b. Filament c. Natural d. Man-made
37. A leather packet containing charms called a

a. Magic wand b. Purse c. Fitter d. Talisman
38. What tool is used in piercing sections of a book for sewing?

a. Nail b. Awl c. Punch d. Wire
39. Which department in the University can assist in locating clay deposits?
a. Department of Ecology b. Department of Geology c. Department of
Agriculture d . Department of Geography
40. The best tool cutting through a ball of clay is a

a. Wire b. Turning tool c. Bodkin d. Scraper
41. The best tool used for scraper board work is a

a. Spatula b. Bone folder c. Stylus d. Bodkin
42. Applied arts refers to the type of artwork that

a. Can be used apart from being admired b. Can be admired c. Is used to attain
pleasure d. Cannot be admired
43. In textiles, the term ‘bleeding’ means

a. Treating fabrics to make them white b. Dye running out of fabric
c. Removing blood stains from fabric d. Adding red dyes to a dye solution
44. Knowledge about cultural heritage is NOT acquired through

a. Art education b. Sorcery and witchcraft c. Drama and dance d. Art exhibition
45. A benefit derived from the visual art program is to

a. Become a museum keeper b. Organise visits to galleries c. Communicate in
languages d. Become analytical
Page 4
46. An activity done in both sculpture and ceramics is

a. Carving b. Throwing c. Thonging d. Casting
47. In drawing, soft pencils are used to give

a. Broad lines b. Fine lines c. Narrow lines d. Bright lines
48. An art patron is someone who

a. Advises an artist b. Sells works of art c. Commissions works of art d. Is
sponsored to produce art
49. The art that corrects physical and emotional growth deficiency is referred to as
Art
a. Criticism b. Education c. History d. Therapy
50. Perspective is the optical illusion suggesting

a. Balance b. Distance c. Symmetry d. Weight
ANSWERS
1. A 6.D 11. D 16. B 21. A 26. C
2. B 7.C 12. B 17. C 22. A 27. C
3. B 8.C 13. A 18. A 23. B 28. C
4. B 9.C 14. C 19. A 24. A 29. C
5. B 10.B 15. A 20. D 25. D 30. D
31. B 32.B 33. C 34. C 35. C 36. D
37. D 38.B 39. B 40. A 41. A 42. A
43. B 44.B 45. D 46. D 47. A 48. C
49. D 50. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. State and explain five (5) desirable qualities a senior secondary school visual
art graduate is expected to have.
2. List and explain five (5) career opportunities in Art.
3. (a) What is Art?
(b) Give five (5) examples of both Visual arts and Performing art forms
4. State the differences between Visual arts and Performing arts.
5. Write short notes on the government’s attitude towards Ghanaian Arts in the
society.
6. Discuss five (5) functions of Art in the community.
7. (a) What are concepts of art?
(b) Discuss five (5) Ghanaian concepts of art.
8. Outline four (4) roles of indigenous arts to the development of the society.
Page 5
9. a. What is art therapy?

b. Discuss five ways by which art can be used as a therapy.
ANSWERS
1. The five desirable qualities a senior secondary school visual art graduate is
expected to have are:
i. Creative
ii. Resourceful
iii. Skilful
iv. Sociable
v. Appreciative
i. CREATIVE
The student is expected to develop the ability of bringing something new into
existence. This can be acquired through organization and exploration of art
materials, tools and techniques in achieving varied effects.
ii. RESOURCEFUL
The student should be able to rely on tools and materials available so as to bring
out new artefacts. He has to accrue ideas from his environment and implement it
in his art works. This will indicate that he understands the need to be self-
sufficient, and the need for economic advancement.
iii. SKILFUL
The student is expected to be skilful and this can be achieved by experimenting
on how to effectively use the tools and materials .He is able to organize
contradictory elements of design and principles into pleasant relationships. These
will aid him in cultivating peaceful relations with other human beings.
iv. SOCIABLE
The student is expected to be friendly with people that he/she interacts with in the
society. This can be developed if the student engages in leisure and recreational
activities like visiting art exhibition, galleries, museums, national parks etc.
Page 6
v. APPRECIATIVE
The student should appreciate the nation’s cultural heritage. This can be done
through acquiring knowledge in art history, appreciation and criticism of artefacts.
These activities will help the student in understanding the meanings and
usefulness of the arts so as to better appreciate them.
2. The five career opportunities in art are:

(a) Package designer
(b) Sculptor
(c) Jeweller
(d) Book illustrator
(e) Architect
(a) Package Designer: He designs packages for products of firms and

industries.
(b) Sculptor: He models figures in either clay or wax and carve out figures
from stone, wood and other materials.
(c) Jeweller: He designs and makes jewelleries in the form of necklaces,
bangles, wristlets etc.
(d) Book illustrator: He makes illustrations in books to explain the printed
text.
(e) Architect: He designs layout of buildings and other construction projects
before the actual projects are executed.
3 (a) Art is defined as a means of expressing one’s ideas through painting,

drawing, sculpting etc. Art is any activity in which a person gives order and
form to organized ideas to bring out a new creation.
(b) The five examples of both visual art and performing art are:
VISUAL ART: PERFORMING ART:

1. Painting 1. Music
2. Sculpture 2. Dance
3. Picture making 3. Drumming
4. Graphic design 4. Poetry
5. Textile 5. Drama
Page 7
4.
VISUAL ART PERFORMING ART
1. These are art that appeals to our 1. These are art forms perceived by our
sense of sight and can also be felt by sense especially the kinesthetic sense.
our sense of touch. 2. Performing art are performed /played.
2. Visual art are made 3. Examples of performing art forms are
3. Examples of visual art forms are music, dance, drama, poetry etc.
painting, sculpture, textiles etc. 4. Performing art cannot be touched
4. Visual art can be seen and felt thus thus making it intangible.
making it tangible. 5. Performing art can be seen in streams
5. Visual art is not limited with time. of time.
5. The government’s attitude towards the Ghanaian art is positive. The

government of Ghana has made several contributions through its various agencies
in the development and promotion of art in the country. The Education Reform
Review Committee made the study of art compulsory at all levels of education.
Other governmental agencies like the ministry of education, the Museum and
Monuments Board, the Arts councils in Ghana and the centres of National Culture
also promote the Ghanaian art through the organization of several exhibitions,
films, publications, radio and television programmes. Other fairs including the
International Trade Fair, the International Tourism Fair etc. also assist greatly in
the preservation, transmission and promotion of the Ghanaian Arts.
Owing to these contributions made by the government in ensuring the progress of
the arts in Ghana, its attitude is positive.
6. The five functions or importance of art in the community are:
1. Religion:
Religious activities of the various religious bodies in the community are
effectively carried out by the help of works of art. For instance, members of the
religious group meet in architectural structures where the religious activities do
take place. Leaders and servants of the church are easily recognized by the textile
cloth, costumes and special apparels that they wear. Deities and holy ones are
either sculpted, painted, carved or modeled in clay and other materials to serve as
mediums of worship. The religious activities make use of various forms of
performing art forms such as music, singing, drumming, miming, incantations,
prayers and sometimes drama in carrying out their teachings and worship of their
Page 8
deities. In some religious denominations, special books which are believed to be

‘holy’ such as the Bible and the Koran are used for teaching and disseminating the
doctrines of the religious bodies.
2. Commerce:
Artworks are traded to earn income. People invest in the collections of works of
art. The field of art also offers various employment avenues for artists. More
importantly is the role art plays in the success of other trades. Art helps in the
marketing of products and services. Locations and other relevant information of
firms and companies as well as the products they produce are nicely depicted on
signboards and billboards. Posters, handbills and flyers assist in the promotion of
sales of products.
3. Agriculture:
Artefacts help in the promotion of agricultural activities such as fishing, farming,
hunting and harvesting. Agricultural tools and implements such as cutlasses, hoes,
wellington boots etc. are artistic products. Farm produce are stored in receptacles
or containers like baskets. In indigenous societies, art forms such as music, dance,
costumes all help in the carrying out of agricultural activities. Deities and gods
believed to control agricultural activities are invoked through incantations, special
songs and dance performances. Nicely designed packages are used in packaging
produce from the various agricultural activities. They help in maximizing the
sales of the products.
4. Politics:
The activities of the various political parties in the country are made possible by
the use of works of art. For instance, the emblems and colours that help us to
distinguish one political party from the other is as a result of art. Moreover, each
of the parties make the general public know of their plans for the nation as well as
their campaigns through the use of posters, banners, signboards signposts, flyers,
handbills and billboards which are all works of art.
In addition, the various T-shirts, caps, and other paraphernalia that party activists
and supporters put on during political rallies and meetings are all products of art.
In fact, without art political activities cannot be carried out.
5. Chieftaincy:
In the traditional system of governance where a chief and his council (body of
elders and other sub-chiefs) exercises authority over his subjects or members of
the society, works of art are greatly at work. The stool that denotes the office of
the chief is an artwork. His entire regalia as well as that of his council are all
works of art. How would someone know that someone sent to him or her is the
Page 9
spokesman of the chief? It is the staff that he holds which makes his identity
known and that staff is an artwork. Festivals, ceremonies and rituals that are done
in the society rely extensively on artefacts. The palanquins, ceremonial swords,
state umbrellas etc. that you see during these occasions are all works of art.
6. Aesthetic:
This is the ability of the art to touch our hearts and minds. An example is looking
at an art work for its own sake rather than for any practical purpose it may serve.
It is also the impact that a work of art has on the senses, intellect and emotions.
Again, it is the extent to which the art stimulates our vision, thoughts and feelings.
An example is admiring art for its beauty alone. Art helps in developing
subjective thinking for human relationship, tolerance and appreciation of other
people way of life.
7. Economic:
This is the trading or selling of works of art for money. The creation of artifacts to
meet religious and secular needs aid in the getting of income for the artist.
8. Art Therapy:
Art is used for the treatment of illnesses and other medical conditions. Art
therapists who are mostly teachers use art to help people with their emotional and
physical problems. They help patients to change their behaviours in a positive
manner. They work in psychiatric hospitals, community centres, drug and alcohol
treatment centres and prisons.
7. a. Concepts are the body of ideas or attitudes that a group of people have
toward something. Ghanaian concept of art refers to the ideas that Ghanaians have
about art. These ideologies that they have greatly influence their attitudes toward
the Ghanaian arts.
b. The five concepts of art are:
i. All crafts are considered as art and all arts are crafts. There is no distinction
between art and craft. They are all viewed as creative activities that require
practical skills and the application of aesthetic knowledge.
ii. Several forms of art can be combined for a common purpose. For example,
sculpture, pottery, textiles, music and dance may be used simultaneously. A man
may wear a mask (sculpture) and a special costume (textile). He dances to tunes
from a drum (music and dance) while he carries a ceremonial pot in his hands.
Page 10
iii. The value of art is in the function or use of the artwork and not necessarily in
its aesthetic qualities.
iv. The arts are a necessity or an integral part of life. It forms an active part of
living. Art is viewed as life.
v. There are taboos associated with the arts. These taboos are followed and a
breach of them is believed to incur the wrath of the gods and ancestors. For
example, a blacksmith is not supposed to strike a person with his bare hands; a
weaver is not supposed to destroy an old loom; a carver should not work when he
is annoyed; trees for carving shouldn’t be cut down if the appropriate rites and
rituals have not been performed etc.
8. The four (4) roles of indigenous arts to the development of the society are:
i. Job creation/employment:
The indigenous arts offer various employment avenues to majority of people
especially the rural folks. This helps them in providing for themselves and their
families thereby reducing the unemployment ratio in the country easing the
government of the burden of unemployment.
ii. Reduction of rural-urban migration:

Most of the indigenous arts of the country are done by rural folks in small villages
and towns. Owing to the fact that they offer jobs for the masses of people there, it
prevents them from moving to the urban centres to seek for greener pastures
placing a lot of pressure on the limited resources and social amenities allocated
for the cities in the urban areas.
iii. Source of revenue for the nation:

The small scale and cottage industries which are in the production of the various
indigenous arts pay tax revenues to the government. The money generated from
these taxes can be used by the government in solving some of the pertinent
problems confronting the nation.
iv. It offers training in the form of apprenticeship:

The indigenous art production centres offer training in the form of apprenticeship
to the young ones in the society. These young ones may not have had the privilege
of formal education and may have ended up being social deviants. Because the
indigenous industries absorbs these young ones, it helps in minimising or
eradicating social vices like stealing, alcoholism and others which are mostly as a
result of unemployment.
Page 11
v. It promotes the tourism industry:

The indigenous industries are viable tourist industries that generate a lot of
income for the nation. The indigenous art works are well patronised by these
tourists who pay substantial amounts in their purchase. Sometimes, some of their
works are exported to other foreign lands to earn income for the artist and the
nation.
vi. It serves as avenues for cultural education:

The indigenous arts are like ‘history books’ of our rich cultural heritage. It helps
the younger generation in knowing much about their rich cultural traditions
handed down to them by their ancestors. These arts do not just inform them of
their material culture but also the rich philosophies, body of beliefs and the way
of life of their forebears.
9. Art therapy is used to describe the use of art forms and artworks which are
used to correct the ailing mind of a mentally deranged individual or to correct
physical, psychological or emotional growth deficiencies.
b. The five ways by which art can be used as a therapy include:
i. Artworks are used to physic the sick to overcome their weaknesses which are
the cause of their ailments. In the Asante community, a barren woman who cannot
give birth is given an Akuaba doll to help her get a child. The doll was in effect
used to psych her in order to build herself confidence that will prepare her
psychologically to enable her conceive.
ii. Artworks are used as tools for motivating the sick. This psychologically
prepares them to respond to the medications that are administered on them.
Flowers, paintings and get-well soon greeting cards psychologically ginger the
sick to respond to treatment. The artworks sent to them make them feel that they
are loved and being cared for. This motivates them and helps them recover soon.
iii. Artworks which the mentally deranged and retarded individuals are asked to
produce as part of their recovery processes assists the art therapist to understand
and predict their behavioral patterns. Colour principles are used by psychologists
to predict the thinking patterns of their patients. In the choice of colours, the high
spirited person would likely choose bright colours while the low esteemed
individual would certainly choose cool or dull colours. This knowledge furnishes
the psychologist with the right information about the mentally retarded person and
assists him in his choice of healing process to use.
Page 12
iv. Artworks produced by the mentally retarded helps them to relieve tension and
stress. Works produced solely by the ailing individuals gives out information
about their inner feelings, fears and anxieties. This can be readily seen in the way
the lines, brush strokes, colour applications etc. are made. This information is
factored in their treatment. Also, the production of the works of art helps in
calming down their minds and temperament.
v. The effective use and selection of colours together with other relevant
principles of design helps in strengthening weaker personality. People who are ill-
spirited, timid or those who have suffered severe rejection would naturally be
inclined to move away from the crowd. The use of bright colours and highly
artistic decorations can help uplift the personalities of such persons.
BASIC DRAWING
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Which of the following is the hardest pencil for drawing?

(a) 2B (b) 6B (c) HB (d) BB
2. Which of these is not a drawing tool?

(a) Palette (b) Pencil (c) Pastel (d) Tjanting
3. The balance of light and shade in a picture is referred to as

(a) Highlight (b) Chiaroscuro (c) Monochrome (d)Muted tones
4. Which of the following pencils give very soft tones?

(a) 6B (b) 3B (c) BB (d) HB
5. The creation of depth and distance on a flat surface is known as

(a) Vanishing Point (b) Perspective (c) Landscape (d) Technique
6. The vanishing point is also called

(a) eye level or horizon (b) Background or sky plane
(c) Middle distance of retreating line (d) boundary line of horizon
7. An outline drawing is the same as

(a) contour drawing (b) mass drawing
Page 13
(c) structural drawing (d) block drawing
8. A picture in solid black showing the outline is known as

(a) Monochrome (b) Polychrome (c) Silhouette (d) Chromatic
9. The method of shading with vertical lines is known as

(a) Etching (b) Toning (c) Designing (d) Hatching
10. Charcoal and pencil drawings cannot be made permanent by spraying them
with
(a) Varnish (b) Turpentine (c) Fixative (d) Milk
11. Which of these techniques of drawing involves the use of light and shade?
(a) Sketch drawing (b) Descriptive drawing
(c) Wavy drawing (d) Tonal drawing
12. Which of these principles is the most essential when making a drawing?
(a) How the drawing tool is held (b) How critically the objects are
observed (c) The nature of the object to be drawn (d) The positive
and negative areas
13. The techniques of shading using lines that crosses each other at an angle is
termed as
(a) Hatching (b) Cross-hatching (c) Pointillism (d) Outline drawing
14. The use of dots in rendering a shade is referred to as

(a) Pointillism (b) Mass shading (c) Hatching (d) Cross-hatching
15. The technique of rubbing a piece of soft cloth on a shaded piece of drawing is
termed as
(a) Smudging (b) Stippling (c) Cross-hatching (d) Hatching
16. The gradual gradation of dark tones into light tones is known as
(a) Silhouette (b) Impasto (c) Sfumato (d) Chiaroscuro
17. The use of scribbles in shading is termed as

(a) Smudging (b) Blending (c) Scribbling (d) Hatching
18. Metal tools are maintained by

(a) Dusting (b) Washing (c) Oiling (d) Wiping
Page 14
19. Which of these tools is the commonest?

(a) Pencil (b) Brush (c) Crayon (d) Knife
20. The creation of depth and distance on a flat surface is known as

(a) Vanishing point (b) Perspective (c) Landscape (d) Techniques
21. The commonest shading technique for portrait and landscape drawings is
(a) Mass shading (b) Cross hatching (c) Stippling (d) Hatching
22. Fixatives are usually sprayed on pictures made in

(a) chalk and gouache (b) graphite and watercolour (c) pastel and charcoal
(d) acrylic and oil colour
23. The area in a picture that seems to have the greatest visual appeal is the
(a) central point (b) focal point (c) colour area (d) shaded area
24. Which of the following techniques in picture making does not involve
sticking of materials on to a surface?
(a) collage and montage (b) applique and montage (c) frottage and marbling
(d) mosaic and collage
25. The subject matter of a work of art is its

(a) caption (b) style (c) theme (d) title
26. By what means is illusion of distance created with colour when drawing
objects and scenes?
(a) tonal gradation (b) converging (c) overlapping (d) isolation
27. When shading a drawing, consideration should be given to the

(a) angle of view of the artist (b) station point of the artist (c) relative size of
objects (d) direction of light
28. Which of the following art forms require the use of odds and ends?
(a) cartoon (b) collage (c) fresco (d) mosaic
29. Tonal drawing is used to define

(a) form (b) rhythm (c) silhouette (d) style
Page 15
30. Rendition in soft tones are easily made with

(a) HH pencil (b) HB pencil (c) BB pencil (d) 6B pencil
31. The term figure drawing applies to

(a) animal form (b) human form (c) both human and animal form
(d) inanimate and animate forms
32. Charcoal, pencil and pastel drawings are usually protected by

(a) drying (b) fixing (c) painting (d) mounting
33. Pointillism gives a similar shading effect as

a. Dabbing b. Hatching c. Rubbing d. Stippling
34. Fine art is valued for its beauty rather than its
a. Decoration b. Styles c. Suitability d. Usefulness
35. In perspective drawing, scale is interpreted as

a. Balance b. Contrast c. Distance d. Nearness
36. The two characteristics of a line are

a. Magnitude and direction b. Direction and straightness c. Thinness and
magnitude d. Quality and size
37. The process of attaching a board cover with glue to the spine of a book is
termed
a. Padding b. Wapping c. Slabbing d. Backing
38. Burin is a tool for

a. Batiking b. Engraving c. Etching d. Printing
39. The most suitable binder for watercolour is

a. Lacquer b. Gum Arabic c. Vinegar d. Carpenter’s glue
40. In an art studio, a donkey is

a. A model for figure drawing b. An animal for landscape painting
c. A combined stool and a drawing board d. A dummy on which a model sits
Page 16
41. Artists create caricatures to depict

a. Beauty and elegance b. Humour and satire c. Confusion and rage d. Peace
and harmony
42. Round hog bristle is to in-laying as flat hog is to

a. Outlining b. Detailing c. Filling-in d. Blocking-out
43. Modelling in picture making is done to achieve

a. Sculptural form b. Form in relief c. Form in the round d. Solidity of form
44. A surface quality that is created by the imagination of the artist is referred to
as
a. Actual texture b. Simulated texture c. Abstract texture d. Invented texture
45. Three point perspective is employed when viewing

a. A flat surface b. into the distance c. from an exaggerated position d. A
leading edge on the horizon
46. The area in a picture that seems to have the greatest visual appeal is the
a. Central point b. Focal point c. Colour area d. Shaded area
47. The main characteristics of a woman’s figure are

a. Broad bust and narrow hips b. Round shoulder and broad hips
c. Square shoulders and broad hips d. Round shoulders and narrow hips
48. Portraiture is the study of

a. Torso b. Head and shoulder c. Plants only d. Animals only
49. Making an object from scrap metals falls under the art of
a. Construction and assemblage b. Joining and melting c. Carving and casting
d. Scotching and riveting
50. When one takes a critical look at a variety of objects the following properties
are noted:
a. Sweetness, bitterness and taste b. Loudness, softness and distance c. Smell,
aroma and colour d. Shapes, colours and textures
Page 17
51. A stipple is a tool used to create

a. Colours b. Dots c. Lines d. Spaces
52. Which of the following is a preliminary drawing?

a. Descriptive drawing b. Tonal drawing c. Illustration drawing d. Sketch
drawing
53. A series of drawings made to explain a process is

a. Continuous drawing b. Illustrative drawing
c. Descriptive drawing d. Range drawing
54. A beautiful picture has

a. A psychological value b. A religious value
c. An intrinsic value d. A material value
55. In drawing the human face, the level of the nose corresponds with the
a. Central position of the pupils b. Corners of the mouth
c. Level of the eye brows d. Lower end of the ear lobe
56. The best tool for cutting through a ball of clay is

a. Wire b. Turning tool c. Bodkin d. Scraper
57. The best tool for scraper board work is

a. Spatula b. Bone folder c. Stylus d. Bodkin
58. To draw cuboids correctly is to apply

a. Aerial perspective b. Angular perspective
c. Functional perspective d. Parallel perspective
59. The surface quality of an object is referred to as

a. Rough b. Smooth c. Tactile d. Texture
60. Which of the following is an artificial line?

a. Animal trails b. Cracks on dried tree back c. Roads d. Vein of leaves
61. The most basic element in drawing is
Page 18
a. Colour b. Line c. Space d. Texture
62. Mirror images are best examples of

a. Asymmetrical balance b. Approximate symmetrical c. Symmetrical balance
d. Radial balance
63. Quick sketches are very important in

a. Capturing events b. Developing interest in drawing c. Drawing bigger objects
d. Understanding the sketches
64. Works of art are displayed and sold in a

a. Gallery b. Mausoleum c. Museum d. Studio
ANSWERS
(1) C (6) A (11) D (16) D (21) A (26) A (31) C
(2) D (7) A (12) B (17) C (22) C (27) D (32) B
(3) B (8) C (13) B (18) C (23) B (28) B (33) D
(4) A (9) D (14) A (19) A (24) C (29) A (34) D
(5) B (10) D (15) A (20) B (25) C (30) D (35) C
(36) A (37) D (38) B (39) B (40) C (41) B (42) D
(43) D (44) C (45) D (46) B (47) B (48) B (49) A
(50) D (51) C (52) D (53) B (54) C (55) D (56) A
(57) A (58) B (59) D (60) C (61) B (62) C (63) A
(64) A
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is drawing?
(b) State and explain three (3) importance of drawing.
2. (a) List five (5) tools and materials suitable for making a drawing.
(b) Outline five (5) ways of caring and maintaining the above listed tools and
materials.
3. By the aid of sketches, explain these shading techniques:
(i) Hatching
(ii) Cross-hatching
(iii) Pointillism
(iv) Smudging
(v) Scribbling
4. a) Define Perspective.
Page 19
b) With the aid of an illustration, explain the one-point perspective.

c) Why is perspective important in drawing?
5. Write short notes on these terms in art.
(i) Chiaroscuro
(ii) Vanishing point
(iii) Fixative
(iv) Silhouette
(v) Positive area
6. Explain the term ‘Foreshortening’.
7. a. What is drawing?
b. Discuss four uses of drawing.
8. a. Define perspective.
b. Identify and explain the two main types of perspective.
c. Explain the following:
i. Colour perspective
ii. Linear perspective
ANSWERS
1. (a) Drawing is an important way of observing and reacting to the world

around us by making marks or images on a surface. OR Drawing is a way of
critically observing and recording what was observed on surfaces such as
paper using appropriate drawing tools or media.
(b) The importance of drawing are:

1. Drawing helps us to record information
2. Drawing serves as a means of communication.
3. Drawing helps one to exhibit his/her creative abilities.
4. Drawing serves as a preliminary study of an idea or object.
5. Drawings are used for illustration.
6. Drawing helps in improving perception.
7. Drawing helps in planning projects.
8. Drawing is used in measuring distance.
9. Drawing is used in indicating direction.
10. Drawing gives character to forms.
Page 20
1. Drawing as a way of recording information-

Drawing assists us in recording information about visual forms and qualities such
as lines, shapes and surface patterns. Information on our past, present and future
can be conveniently recorded by the use of drawings.
2. Drawing as a means of communication-

Communication can be easily carried out to the general public by the use of
drawings. Both the literate and illiterate classes of the public can be readily
informed of ideas, dangers, etc through drawings without using words. For
instance, pictures of a skull placed on crossed bones convey the idea of danger
with ease.
3. Drawing as a tool in exhibiting one’s creative abilities-

Individuals gifted in critical observation of nature and accurate depictions of them
make it visible to all through drawing. Several creative prowesses in depicting
still-life compositions, imaginative compositions, etc is shown using drawing.
4. Drawing serves as a preliminary study of an idea or object-

Drawings are means by which an idea is made visible on paper. It assists
manufacturers in knowing the basic forms of products. These working drawings
help them in producing the products in larger quantities.
5. Drawings are used for illustration-

Drawings are used as a form of illustration in books, magazines and journals. This
illustration helps in explaining the printed text in the book. It also makes the book
colourful and interesting to read. This helps in reducing boredom in readers.
6. Drawing helps in improving perception-

Perception is the ability to really see and study an object.
Through drawing, artists become better at perceiving. Several artists use sketch
books as a tool in depicting what they have critically observed and studied in their
immediate environment.
7. Drawing helps in planning projects-

Drawing is always the first step in the planning of projects. Rough sketches or
studies are always done before works of art are created with the right tools and
materials. Stage designers, graphic designers, and architects show presentation
drawings to clients for approval before the actual projects are carried out.
Page 21
2. (a) The five (5) tools and materials suitable for making drawings are:
TOOLS MATERIALS
1. Pencil Colour
2. Pen Paper
3. Brush Wood
4. Ruler Fabric
5. Eraser Clay
(b) The five ways of caring and maintaining the above listed tools and materials
are:
1. Pencils should be sharpened and kept with their nibs pointing upwards
2. The metals parts of drawing tools should be periodically oiled and wiped
with a clean cloth.
3. Broken parts of tools should be maintained through repair.
4. Palette bowls should be neatly washed after colours are mixed in them.
5. Tools and materials such as brushes, chisels, etc. should be kept in their
tool bags and boxes in their right temperatures.
3. (i) Hatching: This is a shading technique that employs one set of line either
vertical or horizontal lines in rendering the shades on the objects.
(ii) Cross-hatching: This is a shading technique made by the use of lines that
crosses each other at an angle in rendering shades on an object.
(iii) Pointillism: This is a shading technique that employs dots or series of

points in rendering the shades on an object.
(iv) Smudging: This is a shading technique that gradually merges the various
tones by rubbing with a piece of soft cloth.
(v) Scribbling/Squirkling: This is a shading technique that employs the use

of scribbles in rendering shades on an object.
Page 22
(i) (ii) (iii)
Pointillism Hatching Cross-hatching
(iv) (v)
Scribbling Smudging
4. (a) Perspective is a way of drawing objects and scenes so that they appear to
have the illusion of depth and distance.
(b) A one-point perspective is a means of creating depth and distance on a flat

surface by the use of only one vanishing point. Also, in this type of
perspective, all vertical lines remain vertical, while horizontal lines that move
from the viewer into the scene lead to the vanishing point. Objects and spaces
decrease in size away from the viewer toward the vanishing point in a one-
point perspective. A one-point perspective is illustrated below:
VANISHING POINT BACKGROUND

OR SKY PLANE
HORIZON OR
EYE LEVEL/
MID-GROUND
FOREGROUND OR
EARTH PLANE
4) C. 1. Perspective is used in creating the illusion of distance in a drawing.
Page 23
2. It helps to add the appearance of a third dimension to a working

surface.
3. It is used for simulating on a flat, two dimensional surface or in a
shallow space the three dimensional characteristics of volumetric forms
and deep space.
4. Atmospheric or aerial perspective is used to blur outlines, limit details,
and alter hues toward the cool colours and to reduce colour saturation and
value contrast.
5. It is used to grade colour and tone to suggest distance.
5. (i) Chiaroscuro – This is the science of light and shade. It involves the
general distribution of light and shade in a picture. It is achieved by indicating
how the light source falls on the object in knowing the various tones and
shadows.
(ii) Vanishing point – This is the point of a perspective drawing where the
viewer’s eye do not see beyond due to the fact that the image vanishes at that
spot.
(iii) Fixative – This is a kind of thin varnish sprayed on pastel, soft pencil or
charcoal drawings to make them permanent. Liquors such as varnish, lacquer
etc. are sprayed on the surfaces of such works.
(iv) Silhouette – This is a dark image outlined against a lighter background. It

is done by drawing the outlines of the objects and filling the body uniformly
with black. Silhouette drawings are always in the side view.
(v) Positive area – This is the area of the picture plane where the design
covers or occupies. Usually, the positive area of a picture plane is the area of
interest to the viewer.
6. Foreshortening is an artistic technique in drawing figures or objects according

to the rules of perspective so that they appear to recede or advance into three-
dimensional space. It is a method of portraying forms on two dimensional space
so that they appear to project or recede from the picture plane. The sizes of
objects represented as farthest from the viewer are deliberately diminished or
reduced. Specifically, the diminishing of the sizes of parts of an object are
Page 24
rendered as receding away from the viewer at angles oblique to the picture plane,
so that they appear proportionally shorter than parts of the object which are
parallel to the picture plane.
In foreshortening, there is the use of perspective to represent a single object

extending back in space at an angle to the picture plane. Shapes and proportions
of figures are altered and made smaller to the eye. An example is a prone figure or
an arm extended toward the viewer. Foreshortening is the technique or manner
necessary to give the impression, particularly in anatomy, of a limb or figure that
is turned towards the spectator. For example, a hand or arm turned towards a
spectator.
7. a. Drawing is a representation of visual marks or images on a support such as

paper, wall etc. using appropriate tools and materials.
b. (NOTE: The answer is the same as in 1b.)
8. a. Perspective is a way of drawing objects or composing scenes to create an

illusion of distance. It is the science of vision by which the artist can create the
appearance of depth and distance on a two dimensional surface. It is any graphical
system used to create the illusion of three-dimensional images or spatial
relationships on two dimensional surfaces.
b. The two main types of perspective are Linear and colour perspective. Linear
perspective deals with lines and forms of things. It is a method of portraying
objects on a flat surface so that the dimensions or sizes of objects shrink or
reduces in size with distance while Colour perspective also referred to as Aerial or
atmospheric perspective is the creation of depth or distance in a drawing by the
use of colour. Depth or distance is portrayed by reducing the contrast or value in
colours of objects in more distant objects, and by making their colours less
saturated.
Page 25
c. i. Colour perspective: This involves the depiction of distance in a drawing by

the use of colour. Depth or distance is portrayed by reducing the contrast or value
in colours of objects in more distant objects, and by making their colours less
saturated. Colours of objects closer to the viewer or in the foreground are brighter
while colours of objects far from the viewer and above the horizon become pale
or dull in value.
ii. Linear perspective: This type of perspective deals with lines and forms of
things. It is a method of portraying objects on a flat surface so that the dimensions
or sizes of objects shrink or reduces in size with distance. Each set of parallel,
straight edges of any object, whether a building or a table, will follow lines that
eventually converge at a vanishing point. There are three forms of linear
perspective. These are Parallel / one-point perspective, Angular/ two-point
perspective and Oblique/Isometric/three-point perspective.
Parallel/One-point Perspective
In parallel perspective, the plane lies parallel with the picture plane and all
parallel lines moving horizontally away from the viewer converge at a vanishing
point. However, all vertical lines remain vertical while the sizes of the objects
reduce in size as they move towards the vanishing point. It has only one vanishing
point.
Parallel/ One-point perspective
Angular/Two-point Perspective
In this type of perspective, the plane is drawn at an angle to the picture plane.
It usually has two sets of parallel lines which do not meet at the same point but
rather converge at different vanishing points though they share one horizon. The
sizes of objects reduce as they move towards each of the vanishing points. It has
two vanishing points.
Page 26
Angular/Two-Point Perspective
Oblique/Isometric/Three-point Perspective
This type of perspective is characterized by a plane with three equal axes at right
angles. It has three vanishing points and as usual, the objects reduce in size as
they move towards each of the three vanishing points.
Isometric/Oblique/Three-Point Perspective
PREHISTORIC AND ANCIENT ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The period in art history from 30,000BC to 5,000BC is referred to as
(a) Prehistoric art (b) Historic (c) Archaic (d) Medieval
2. Prehistoric art is mainly associated with

(a) Fishing (b) Sympathetic magic (c) Agriculture (d) Fetishism
3. The caveman had to create artefacts in order to

(a) Meet necessities of life (b) Beautify his cave (c) his art skills
Page 27
(d) Frighten his enemies
4. Prehistoric man’s first means of communication is

(a) Sympathetic magic (b) Pouring libation (c) Visual images
(d) Puberty rites
5. Cave art is mainly

(a) Mosaic (b) Fresco (c) Collage (d) Murals
6. Prehistoric art made little influence because they were made

(a) Independently at different times (b) For ritual purpose
(c) With materials from the environment (d) With earth colours and
animal fat
7. The main support for cave painting was

(a) tree bark (b) rock surface (c) magic (d) pleasure
8. The Venus of Willendorf is a

(a) Prehistoric female sculpture (b) Prehistoric painting in the caves
(c) Fertility doll found in the caves (d) The image of the goddess of beauty
9. Prehistoric art has survived till today because

(a) They were made deep inside caves (b) They had magical backing
(c) They were inspired by creativity (d) They had portfolios
10. The prehistoric man used tools made of

(a) bone, wood and stone (b)ivory, iron and wood
(c) stone, shells and iron (d) wood, iron and asbestos
11. Paleolithic art is mostly associated with

(a) Figures found in temples (b) paintings and reliefs in tombs and
graves (c) engravings and paintings in the caves (d) paintings seen in
the tents of Pastoralists
12. The belief that there is a close link between an object and its image is
(a) Animism (b) Toteism (c) Black magic (d) Sympathetic magic
13. The Mesolithic period is also referred to as

(a) ice age (b) middle stone age (c) new stone age (d) old stone age
Page 28
14. The prehistoric painting of a standing bison was discovered in the Altamira
cave in
(a) China (b) France (c) Mozambique (d) Spain
15. The prehistoric men used simple tools such as

(a) gun and cutlass (b) knife and chisel (c) bows and arrows (d) spears
and gouges
16. The strongest contribution by primitive man to the study of art is his
(a) cave painting (b) hunting prowess (c) music (d) stone implements
17. The cave man invented his own colours by the use of
(a) pastels (b) earth colours (c) petrol (d) leaves
(b)
18. Superposition is a prehistoric composition technique which means
(a) done over (b) placed over (c) roll over (d) done at either sides
19. The prehistoric man obtained his white colour from

(a) Acrylic paint (b) Kaolin (c) Emulsion (d) Poster colour
20. What tool did the prehistoric people use to draw on rock surfaces?
(a) Bodkin (b) Saw (c) Flint (d) Chisel
21. The prehistoric period started and ended in

(a) 30,000BC- 5,000BC (b) 80,000BC-5,000BC (c) 40,000BC-
5,000BC (d) 50,000BC- 5,000BC
22. The first prehistoric arts were discovered in which country?

(a) Spain (b) Mozambique (c) United State (d) Britain
23. The oldest prehistoric art works were discovered in all these countries except
(a) Namibia (b) Spain (c) Morocco (d) France
24. The first discoveries of prehistoric art were made by

(a) Canadian tourists (b) French army officers (c) School children
(d) British missionaries
25. The female figures discovered in Western Europe were referred to by scholars
as
(a) Magico dolls (b) Venuses (c) Figurines (d) Mascaras
Page 29
26. What does the prevalence of animals in the prehistoric cave paintings reveal?
(a) The caveman’s ability to draw animal form (b) The caveman’s desire
to domesticate wild animal (c) The caveman’s inability to draw human forms
(d) The importance of animals in those societies
27. Sympathetic magic was prompted by the caveman’s

(a) belief in spirits (b)spiritual power (c) belief in the relationship
between animals and their images (d) insecurity among wild and dangerous
animals
28. Paleolithic art was conventionally schematic and

(a) abstract (b) expressionist (c) realistic (d) monumental
29. The purpose of the cave man’s paintings was to

(a) frighten wild animals (b) meet the necessities of life (c) improve his
skill in painting (d) beautify his dwelling place
30. Prehistoric cave paintings have survived all these years because
(a) the cave men developed methods of preserving them (b) they were
protected from weather conditions (c) the cave men never allowed intruders to
disturb the (d) they used binders that could stand the test of time
31. The caveman’s paintings were mainly to

a. Show his drawing skills b. Facilitate his magic c. Experiment with drawing
media d. Keep records of hunting
32. Paleolithic period is

a. Old stone age b. New stone age c. New bronze age d. Old bronze age
33. The caveman combined

a. Painting and sculpture b. Drawing and painting c. Sculpture and engraving
d. Engraving and painting
34. The technique of placing new painting on either side of the old is
a. Juxtaposition b. Superimposition c. Superposition d. Transposition
35. The caveman used skins of hunted animals to satisfy

a. Spiritual needs b. Magical needs c. Defensive needs d. Domestic needs
Page 30
36. In which of the following periods were all artists anonymous?

a. Paleolithic b. Renaissance c. Classical d. Impressionist
37. Neolithic man

a. Lived on wild fruits and grains b. Was at the mercy of the weather
c. Lived in caves d. Built houses
38. The subject matter for prehistoric painting was mainly

a. Tools and weapons b. Rivers and animals c. Animals and human figures
d. Mountains and human figures
39. The cave man carved figure mainly in

a. Wood and rubber b. Bone and wood c. Stone and bone d. Rubber and stone
40. Archaeologists use art to analyse discoveries by

a. Material b. Function c. Style d. Preservation
41. Materials used by the caveman in creating art include

a. Acrylic b. Charcoal c. Ink d. Oil
42. The largest number of rock engravings and paintings are located in
a. Kilmanjaro b. Kenya c. Tassili d. Uganda
ANSWERS
(1) A (6) A (11) C (16) A (21) B (26) D (31) B
(2) B (7) B (12) D (17) B (22) B (27) C (32) A
(3) A (8) A (13) B (18) B (23) C (28) B (33) D
(4) A (9) A (14) D (19) B (24) B (29) B (34) A
(5) D (10) A (15) C (20) C (25) B (30) B (35) C
(36) A (37) C (38) C (39) C (40) C (41) B (42) C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Write short notes on each of the periods in Prehistoric Art.
2. Describe sympathetic magic and its relevance to the cave man.
3. Discuss how the cave man obtained the following provisions.
a) Shelter b) Clothing c) Food d) Magic and Spiritual needs
4. a) Briefly explain these compositional techniques employed by the cave man:
(i) Superposition
(ii) Superimposition
(iii) Juxtaposition
Page 31
b) Describe how the cave man obtained his tools and materials for his artwork.
5. Explain how the prehistoric man used art to satisfy his needs.
6. Using four examples justify the notion that the prehistoric man was a creative
person.
7. (a) What is the ‘Venus of Willendorf’?
(b) Give reasons why it was called a Venus.
(c) Describe the Venus of Willendorf.
8. State and explain four ways how prehistoric art contributes to the culture of
mankind.
9. Explain why the cave man’s paintings were not only decorative but also
magical.
10. a) Define the term Prehistoric art.
b) Explain the importance of Prehistoric art to the culture of mankind.
ANSWERS
1. The three periods in the prehistoric period are:
(i) Paleolithic period (old stone age) – 30,000BC – 15,000BC

(ii) Mesolithic period (Middle stone age) – 15,000BC – 10,000BC
(iii) Neolithic period (New stone age) – 10,000BC – 5,000BC
(i) Paleolithic period

This is the first period in the Stone Age. It is sometimes referred to as the Old
Stone Age. During this period, the cave man resorted to the use of crude tools
made of wood, bone and stone. It was in this period that he used art to meet his
basic necessities of life through the sympathetic magic. This magic was based on
the belief that there is a strange relationship between a living thing and its image.
The prehistoric man resorted to hunting as a form of occupation while the women
gathered wild crops and honey. The cave man had a strong desire for art. Art in
the form of painting, drawing, sculpture and engraving were made to meet the
basic necessities of life.
(ii) Mesolithic period

This is the second period in the Stone Age. It is sometimes referred to as the
middle stone age. It marks the transition between the old and the new Stone
Age. He still lived in caves and other natural shelters. He engaged in
Page 32
travelling using dugout canoes. His strong desire that moved him to draw was
lost. However, he used crude tools as he did in the Paleolithic period.
(iii) Neolithic period

This is the third and last period in the Stone Age. This period is sometimes
called the New Stone Age. In this period, the cave man substituted the
sympathetic magic with religion. Due to advancement in technology, the cave
man developed polished tools in undertaking his activities like agriculture,
architecture, etc.
2. Sympathetic magic is a kind of practical magic based on the belief that a

strange link exists between a living thing and its image. Owing to this, any
harm or injury done to the image will affect the live animal. The cave artist
depicted this by piercing arrows through the body of the drawn animals to be
hunted. Sometimes, he deliberately omitted the sensitive parts of the drawn
animal to be hunted like the eyes, nose, etc. He believed that doing this would
make the live animal defenceless for hunting to be easier.
Again, the cave man relied on this practical magic because of the simplicity of
the weapons he used in undertaking his hunting. Left to only these tools, hunting
would have been very disastrous for the cave man due to how fierce the animals
they hunted were. This practical magic gave the cave man the mastery and
courage for hunting these dangerous animals. The cave man made new hunting
scene for a fresh hunt. After a successful hunt, the drawings were discarded and
new ones were made for a new day’s hunt.
3. (a) Shelter: The cave man dwelt in caves where they executed the paintings
on the surfaces of the caves. They also lived under heavy rocks that provided
comfortable abode. Others resided in tunnels of big trees.
(b) Clothing: The prehistoric men and women used the skins of the animals
for clothing. The furs of large birds were also used as forms of clothing.
(c) Food: The cave men and women used the flesh of the animals they hunted
for food. They also fed on wild crops and wild honey they gathered.
(d) Magic and spiritual needs: The prehistoric men and women satisfied the
spiritual need by the use of the practical magic known as sympathetic magic. This
Page 33
magic is the belief that a strange relationship exists between a living thing and its
image. Therefore, anything done to the live image would eventually happen to the
real thing. They intentionally wounded the image of the animals they wanted to
hunt. Sometimes, the sensitive parts of the animal such as ears and eyes were
omitted making the live animal incapable of detecting their presence. This magic
gave the cave men the courage to successfully carry out their hunting activities.
(e) Tools: The cave men made simple tools of wood, stone and bone. These
weapons included spears, bows and arrows, etc.
4. (a) The techniques of composition employed by cave man included:

Superimposition, Superposition and Juxtaposition.
(i) Superimposition is a compositional technique that involves the

making of a new painting or engraving on an old one. After a
successful day’s hunt, a new painting is done over the discarded one.
(ii) Superposition is another compositional technique used by the cave

artist. This involves the placing of new painting or engraving on an old
one.
(iii)Juxtaposition is a technique of composition employed by the

prehistoric man. In this technique, new paintings are done at either
sides of the old painting.
(b) The cave man obtained his tools and materials manually by exploring the
natural resources in his environment.
(i) Brushes: He manufactured his brushes by beating the ends of sticks

flat breaking them into fibres and used it in applying his paint.
(ii) Palette: Surfaces for mixing paints were obtained by the use of large
flat bones, stones and wood.
(iii) Drawing Tools: Pointed flint tools were used in creating the outlines
of objects. These outlines were deepened and shaded by the use of
charcoal.
Page 34
(iv) Colours: Colours were obtained from the earth. The colours
obtained from the earth included yellow, red, brown and orange.
Black was obtained from charcoal or manganese oxide while white
was gotten from Kaolin. These ochres from the earth were ground
and mixed with animal fat. They were then applied as paint.
(v) Engraving and Modelling tools: Pointed stones gravers or flints

were used for engraving while he used his hands in modelling most
of his figures.
5. The cave man heavily relied on art to satisfy virtually all his needs.
In carrying out his hunting activities with ease, he resorted to a kind of practical
magic known as sympathetic magic where he drew the animals he wanted to hunt
and rendered them defenceless. This hunting activity assisted greatly in the
provision of his basic needs such as food, clothing, fuel, etc. He fed on the fleshy
parts of the animals he hunted and used their skins and furs as clothing. The fats
accrued from the animals served as fuel in lamps modelled in clay or carved in
stone. The practice of art helped him in developing his creative abilities which
was put in play in solving most of the problems he confronted. The caveman
invented his own lamps from stone and clay. All these needs of the caveman were
successfully met by the use of Art.
6. The prehistoric man was a creative person because he brought several new
things into existence. He was original and he tried to experiment and explore his
environment to create items for addressing his problems and in satisfying his
basic necessities of life. Some of the examples that justify the notion that the
Prehistoric man was a creative person are:
1. The prehistoric man created his own lamps from clay or stone and fuelled it
with the fat obtained from animals. This helped him in obtaining light.
2. The cave man produced light by striking two stones together.
3. He manufactured his own colours by grinding earth colours into powder and
mixing it with animal fat or water.
Page 35
4. The prehistoric man produced brushes for painting his works by the use of
sticks.
5. The cave man used flint tools in making his engravings and used flat large
bones or stones as palettes for the mixing of colours.
7. (a) The ‘Venus of Willendorf’ is an example of the female sculptural figures

discovered in the caves were believed to be fertility goddesses responsible for
childbirth and the fertility of the soil.
(b) The reasons why the female sculpture was called a Venus by the scholars.
The scholars refer to them as ‘Venuses’ because they were viewed as sexual
objects to the prehistoric men. Moreover, in terms of function and form
representation they were similar to Venus, the Roman version of the Greek
goddess Aphrodite who was portrayed as nude. These figures were believed to
charge barren cave women with fertility potent. They were also consulted through
rituals to ensure the fertility of the land when the prehistoric men and women
started agricultural activities in the Neolithic period.
(c) The Venus of Willendorf had these distinctive features. Owing to the fact that
they stress a potent fertility, emphasis was placed on the figure’s reproductive
qualities. Some of these are:
i. Exaggerated or big breasts
ii. Culminated highs
iii. Big hips
iv. Huge stomach
v. Exaggerated buttocks
vi. Tiny arms and legs
vii. Knob-like face with no facial features
8. Prehistoric art has contributed to the culture of mankind in these ways:
1. It reveals aspects of life of the early man- It is the prehistoric art history that
gives us a perfect picture of the life of the early man. It is in this history that we
learn that the early man was a hunter by profession with their wives as gatherers
of wild crops and honey. It tells us how he used art to meet his basic necessities of
life such as shelter, clothing and food.
Page 36
2. It shows the development of creative ability in man and how it was

stimulated by observation of nature- We are thrilled by the great inventions by
the early man that was motivated by his outstanding creativity. For instance, due
to his great skill in observation of nature, he could depict animals in drawing as
accurately as possible. He engaged in memory and imaginative drawing
techniques which are purely creative activities. It is said that he even picked the
shapes and ideal figures of animals from the cracks and contours on the surfaces
of the caves. This demonstrates the undiluted creative prowess of the cave man.
3. It provides information for better understanding of the world- The study of

prehistoric art history gives us better understanding of ourselves and our
environment. Without this information, we would have struggled as their
forebears in satisfying and developing the various aspects of our lives. Indeed, the
information we have as a result of the study of prehistoric art serves as a
foundation for the development of the various spheres of life. It is the thread that
has singlehandedly helped us weave our lives because we perfectly understand the
world.
4. It helps in tracing the beginning of the visual art- What visual art forms
were predominant in the prehistoric times? An answer wouldn’t be difficult if you
have studied the history of prehistoric art. It tells us how painting and sculpture
were mostly used in satisfying the needs of man. This underscores the relevance
of art. If society will progress today, it largely depends on its rich artistic
background.
5. It points out the relationship between art and religion (magic) and
procreation (fertility) - Prehistoric art history tells us that we can’t satisfy our
religious needs without resorting to art. We learn of how the cave man used
paintings and sculpture in carrying out his religious passion or magic. Also,
sculpted fertility figure were used in addressing the fertility woes of the cave men
and women. This gives a sounding call to everyone especially those who are
taking the lead in the development of the nations of the world that the field of art
has always been and still remains the bedrock of the development of mankind.
6. It teaches us the ideal shape of female figure at the period (Venus of

Willendorf)- The physical features or traits of the Venus of Willendorf tells us
the ideals of beauty expected to be seen in a female. These include exaggerations
Page 37
of the reproductive parts like the breast, hips, buttocks and stomach. This ideal
shape and features still remains and have a strong impact in judging a female as
aesthetically pleasing by many today. The ideal shape of the female figure is a
prominent subject for modern sculptors.
7. It unveils the pigments used for painting- The study of prehistoric art
informs us of how the early man obtained his pigments for painting. The ochres
from rocks were ground and mixed with saliva, cave water, egg albumen and yolk
as well as blood of animals to obtain paint. Burnt wood and bone was a source for
black colour while Kaolin (White clay) was the source of their white colour. This
knowledge has being a source of inspiration for the production of modern
pigments, paints and other colouring media for artistic productions such as oil
paints, water soluble paints, dry colourants like crayons, pastels etc.
8. It reveals the techniques and styles of painting, sculpture, and pottery of

the early man- Compositional techniques such as superposition, juxtaposition
and superimposition were used in the cave paintings of the early man. Also,
sculptural techniques such as engraving, pecking, modelling and carving were all
implemented by the cave man. Coiling was the chief technique in the building and
production of pots and other receptacles used by the early humans. These
techniques in painting, sculpture and pottery are enhanced and used today for
artistic productions.
9. It reminds us of the extinction of animals over the years- Several animal

species were painted by the cave man which are extinct today. Some of these
animals humans today wouldn’t have known, heard or seen them if it was not as a
result of prehistoric art history. Early species of deers and reindeers, lions, bisons,
rhinoceros etc. are splendid examples as are evident in the prehistoric paintings
discovered today.
10. It gives records of events of the prehistoric man as well as animal life- The
various events in the life of the cave man and the systematic development of his
life is made known to as a result of prehistoric art history. His life as a hunter
through to his life as an agriculturalist; he polishing his tools as against the crude
tools he used at first; he replacing magic with religion and other forms of
civilisation including his keen interest in learning about his environment giving
birth to the study of mathematics, science, astronomy etc. is an inspiration to us
Page 38
today. Like them, we are not content with early discoveries but want to
experiment further to discover better ways of life. Migrations of animals in
various seasons today are known with ease as a result of prehistoric art.
11. It furnishes us with vital information on the mode of hunting and living of
the cave man- Prehistoric art history tells us how risky hunting was because of
the simple weapons that the cave man used for hunting. However, hunting was
made less risky as a result of the belief in sympathetic magic. The general way of
life of the cave man which was narrowly improved throughout the three stages in
the Stone Age is known to us today because of the study of prehistoric art.
12. It gives us insight of the system of clothing which was mainly through
animal skins- The idea that skins and hides of animals can be used for the
production of clothes was born from prehistoric art. Today, leather crafters have
heavily developed and improved the tanning processes used by the early man to
produce several kinds of leather which are supple and comfortable to wear. Others
are used for the production of seating in homes, offices and in automobiles.
9. It is true that the cave man’s paintings were decorative because the paintings
were used in decorating the interiors and exteriors of the caves. These lavished
paintings were much seen much on the surfaces of the walls, on the floors, on the
ceilings and between the roofing and windows called frieze. However, the
paintings were not just for mere decorations. They had a far more reaching
importance. They served magical purposes for the prehistoric man. The
prehistoric man was face with a heinous challenge to survive and attend to the
basic necessities of life such as food, clothing and shelter. He therefore resorted to
hunting of animals. However, hunting was a very risky task owing to the crude
tools and weapons used by the cave man for the hunting as well as the fierce-
looking animals that they needed to hunt. Just imagine hunting a rhinoceros or an
elephant with a mere hurling of stones or throwing of slender spears and arrows!
The prehistoric man needed a far more powerful weapon and that he remedied by
the use of a form of practical magic called sympathetic magic. Magic as we know
refers to the power of using supernatural forces in making impossible things to
happen. This form of magic called sympathetic magic was however a belief that a
strange link or relationship exists between a living thing and its image. Therefore,
Page 39
anything done to the drawn image would affect the live animal. This resulted in
the creation of several paintings on the wall surfaces with diverse compositional
techniques of animals to be hunted. In the paintings, the cave man pierced arrows
through the body of the drawn animals. Sometimes, he deliberately omitted the
sensitive parts of the drawn animal like the eyes, nose, etc. He believed that doing
this would make the live animal defenceless for hunting to be easier. This
practical magic gave the cave man the mastery and courage for hunting these
dangerous animals. The cave man made new hunting scene for a fresh hunt. After
a successful hunt, the drawings were discarded and new ones were made for a
new day’s hunt. This underscores and explains why the assertion that ‘the cave
man’s paintings were not only decorative but also magical is true. After all, the
cave man achieved the impossible-the killing of fierce animals with simple
weapons by the use of supernatural powers which is the embodiment of magic.
10. a. Prehistoric art refers to the paintings, engravings, sculpture, textiles and
pottery which are the early arts of mankind or the genesis of art in the world. It is
sometimes referred to as cave or rock art because the arts that were executed by
the prehistoric man were done on the interiors and exteriors of the cave and on the
rocky surfaces or cliffs. The arts are referred to as ‘prehistoric art’ because they
were done in the prehistoric era between 30, 000 B.C. and ended somewhere in
5000/4000 B.C. The arts were also done during the oral record times before the
recording of history or written records of mankind. The main theme of the arts
was based on hunting scenes. The arts helped the prehistoric man in obtaining the
basic necessities of life such as food, shelter, clothing, magic and spiritual needs.
b. The answer to this question is the same as what has been answered in 8 (b)
above.
Page 40
EGYPTIAN ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The driving force behind Egyptian Art was their

(a) gods (b) ancestors (c) belief (d) spirit
2. The Egyptians referred to the soul as

(a) Ka (b) Tomb(c) Mastaba (d) Sphinx
3. The popular belief among the Egyptians was their belief in

(a) God (b) Life after death (c) Reincarnation (d) Purgatory
4. The large statues erected at the front of the pyramids were called
(a) Dolls (b) Sphinx (c) Tom (d) Pharaohs
5. The system of picture writing invented by the ancient Egyptians were known
as
(a) Cicatrix (b) Hieroglyphics (c) Roman (d) Gothic
6. One of the themes for Egyptian painting was

(a) Dancing (b) Marketing (c) Hunting (d) Outdooring
7. The differences in human sizes in Egyptian painting was as a result of

(a) Racism (b) Class distinctions (c) Favouritism (d) Nationality
8. The paper invented by the ancient Egyptians was made from

(a) Old papers (b)Wood pulp (c) Papyrus reed (d)Rugs
9. The title for Egyptian kings was

(a) Chief (b) Highness (c) Pharaoh (d) Majesty
10. Dead souls in Egypt were known as

(a) Mammy (b) Mummy (c) Maidy (d) Maddiy
11. Bodies of corpses were wrapped in what type of fabric in ancient Egypt?
(a) Cotton (b) Linen (c)Hemp (d) Jute
12. The ordinary Egyptian house was constructed with
Page 41
(a) Cement (b) Stone (c) Sand (d) Brick
13. Which people conquered the Egyptians?

(a) Chinese (b) Indians (c) Americans (d) Greeks
14. The first centre of civilization on the African continent was

(a) Ghana (b) Egypt (c) Nigeria (d) South Africa
15. The standing sculptural figures of the ancient Egyptians were characterized by
(a) Symmetry of form (b) Flexibility of joints (c) Left foot placed in a
forward direction (d) Muscles showing in the upper part of the body
16. The sphinxes served as

(a) Decoration of the tombs (b) Guardian of the tombs (c) Frontal part of
pyramids (d) Representatives of the gods
17. Egypt became the first great centre of civilisation in

(a) 30,000 BC (b) 5,000 BC (c) 80,000 BC (d) 10,000 BC
18. Egyptian civilization influenced all these African states except

(a) Chad (b) Morocco (c) Ghana
19. Egyptian painting was done in

(a) Cool colours (b) Bright colours (c) Neutral colours
(d) Complementary colours.
20. The ancient Egyptians believed that dead souls reside in

(a) Same body (b) Another body (c) Heaven (d) Hell
21. The technique of treating dead bodies and wrapping it in white linen cloth is
termed as
(a) Shredding (b) Embalmment (c) Mastaba (d) Tombing
22. Egyptian paintings were done mostly on

(a) Papyrus paper (b) Walls of the Pyramids (c) Wooden Panels
(d) Upper Chambers
23. Which material was used in the construction of the Egyptian Pyramids?
(a) Marble (b) Stone (c) Cement (d) Bricks
Page 42
24. The contribution of the Egyptians to the field of Agriculture was

(a) The invention of pruning shears (b) The invention of the Shadoof
irrigation system (c) The introduction of fertilizer (d) The introduction of
new seedlings
25. The knowledge of what subjects helped the Egyptians in their architecture?
(a) Science and Mathematics (b) Construction and Physics
(c) Mathematics and Geometry (d) Geometry and Physics
26. The new form of art introduced by the Greeks to the Egyptians was
(a) Carving (b) Collage (c) Mosaic (d) Montage
27. The sphinx is a colossal stature with a human head and the body of a
(a) Leopard (b) jackal (c) camel (d) lion
28. The three Egyptian systems of writing which remained until the Christian era
were
(a) hieroglyphics, hieratic and demotic (b) hieroglyphics, hieratic and Coptic
(c) hieroglyphics, demotic and Coptic (d) hieratic, demotic and Coptic
29. The ancient Egyptians painted beautifully on wooden panels, walls of temples
and
(a) canvas (b) leather (c) marbles (d) papyrus
30. Ancient Egyptians painted women differently from men by making the
women
(a) gorgeous and elegant (b fat and round (c) slim and tall (d) smaller and
lighter
31. Which of the following countries is associated with the Mastaba?

(a) Japan (b) India (c) Egypt (d) China
32. The ancient Egyptians used sarcophagus as a

(a) Support for mummies (b) Store for mummy cases (c) Repository for the
dead king (d) Store for treasures
33. Egyptians produced paper from the

(a) Mulberry tree (b) Black-berry tree (c) Papyrus reed (d) Rubber plant
34. The mastaba of ancient Egypt was made of
Page 43
(a) Brick and iron (b) Wood and clay (c) Sand and stone (d) Stones and
bricks
35. Which of the following is the art form of the Japanese?

a. Sacrificial bronze vessel (b) Silk screen printing (c) Bronze jars (d) Bird-
shaped vessel
36. Which of these ancient civilisations wrote on papyrus?

a. Egyptians (b) Greeks (c) Indians (d) Romans
37. Egyptian inventions included

(a) Hieroglyphics, papyrus reed, glazes (b) Calligraphy, calendar, paper
(c) Pyramid, paper-mulberry, sphinx (d) Calendar, paper, picture-writing
38. Which of the following hindered the development of true Egyptian art and
sculpture?
(a) Men were painted darker than women (b) Artists followed Hellenistic art
styles (c) Art was used to worship gods (d) Glazes were used for tiles
39. The earliest paintings of a civilised people are those of the

(a) Egyptians (b) Greeks (c) Italians (d) Romans
40. The focus of ancient Egyptian art was

a. The life of the ordinary Egyptian b. River transport on the Nile
c. Everlasting life in the hereafter d. Cultural activities in the rural areas.
41. The Coptic writing was composed of a combination of

a. Egyptian and Greek letters b. Roman and English letters c. Islamic and
Egyptian letters d. Egyptian and Roman letters
42. In which of these countries was the human figure painted in profile?
a. China b. Crete c. Egypt d. Ghana
43. Ancient Egyptians made their painting brushes from

a. Feathers b. Furs c. Reeds d. Sisal
44. Identify the material used by the ancient Egyptians to wrap their dead
a. Calico b. Linen c. Papyrus d. Silk
45. Bodies of deceased Pharaohs were embalmed and preserved as

a. Icons b. Mementos c. Mummies d. Relics
Page 44
46. Egyptians art once influenced the art of the

a. Chinese b. Greeks c. Indians d. Romans
47. How was Egyptian art different from Chinese art?

a. Egyptian art mostly had rigid angular forms b. Egyptian art consisted mostly of
swerving curves c. Egyptians painted slaves bigger than their masters
d. Egyptians used bright colours
48. The art of treating a dead body with drugs and chemicals to keep it from
decaying by the ancient Egyptians is termed
a. Burying b. Embalming c. Mummification d. Scarcophagus
49. A mythological being with a lion’s body and a human head is termed
a. Androsphinx b. Criosphinx c. Hierocosphinx d. Sphinx
50. Huge statues that were carved and placed at the front of tombs were known as
a. Catacombs b. Mummy c. Pharaohs d. Sphinx
ANSWERS
1. C 11. B 21. B 31. C
2. A 12. D 22. A 32. A
3. B 13. D 23. B 33. C
4. B 14. B 24. B 34. D
5. B 15. C 25. C 35. B
6. C 16. B 26. C 36. A
7. B 17. B 27. D 37. D
8. C 18. C 28. A 38. B
9. C 19. B 29. D 39. A
10. B 20. A 30. D 40. C
41. A 42. C 43. C 44. B
45. B 46. B 47. A 48. B
49. A 50. D
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Discuss how religious beliefs influenced the arts of the Egyptians.

1. State five (5) achievements of the ancient Egyptians.
2. Outline five (5) characteristics of Egyptian art.
Page 45
3. Write briefly on the purpose and importance of Egyptian art.

4. Explain these terms in relation with Egyptian art.
i) Mummy
ii) Sphinx
iii) Ka
iv) Hieroglyphics
v) Papyrus paper
6. a. What is ‘Art for eternity’?
b. How did a death cult influence Egyptian Art?
c. Why is Egyptian art said to be ‘Art for eternity’?
7. Discuss the foreign influence on Egyptian Art.
8. Compare ancient Egyptian art with prehistoric art using the following
guidelines:
a. Philosophy
b. Art forms
c. Media
d. Techniques
e. Functions
9. a. Explain the art forms of the archaic period with emphasis on sculpture.
b. Examine four characteristics of the archaic period.
ANSWERS
1. The basis for the development of Art in ancient Egypt was their beliefs.
Paramount among these beliefs in the belief in life after death. The Egyptians
believed that when they died, their souls (Ka) would continue to live in
another world but inside the same bodies. Owing to this, they carefully treated
the dead bodies called mummies and embalmed them to protect them from
decaying. Fine linen strips woven were used in wrapping deceased bodies.
Sometimes, the likenesses of missing corpses were carved from imperishable
materials like granite to replace them. After wrapping it with the linen
material, it was painted in bright colours and laid in tombs. These architectural
structures known as pyramids were constructed with heavy stones. This
assisted in prolonging their lifespan for several decades.
The interiors of these pyramids were lavishly decorated with series of
paintings that depicted the journey of the dead to the metaphysical world.
Other themes for the painting included people hunting and feasting. Funerary
texts which were believed to preserve the dead person’s name and petitions
for his wellbeing by the gods were also written in hieroglyphics. This graphic
art recounted the good deeds of the deceased including his titles and honours
Page 46
he gained during his lifetime. The above explained points indicate that the
ancient Egyptian Art was driven by their beliefs especially the belief in life
after death.
2. The five (5) achievements of the ancient Egyptians are:
i) The ancient Egyptians invented the calendar as a tool in determining

dates for events, etc.
ii) They invented a system of picture writing known as hieroglyphics in
about 4000 BC to assist in communication. This opened the door for
the development of varieties of lettering styles.
iii) They also invented paper as a writing surface from the papyrus reed, a
plant found in Egypt. This invention has given rise to the production of
several types of paper like bank paper, chromocoat paper, etc.
iv) The ancient Egyptians invented the Nilometer, an instrument used in
measuring the rise and fall of the river Nile. Several measuring devices
have emerged after the invention of the Nilometer.
v) They invented glazes for their pottery wares to give them a glossy
effect and to prolong their lifespan.
3. The five (5) characteristics of Egyptians Art are:
i) There is an inter relationship between the various art forms like

painting, architecture, pottery and sculpture. They were all produced to
serve the dead.
ii) The designs in Egyptian art are crowded so that there exists less space
or no space in the design. This was due to the rigidity in their religious
and social systems.
iii) In their painting, men were painted bigger and darker than women
while slaves were painted very small. This showed the class distinction
that existed in ancient Egypt.
iv) Perspective was depicted in their painting, by the placing of one body
above another. Bright colours were used largely for their painting.
v) The statues they made both men and women figures wore wigs. The
standing sculptural figures had their left feet placed in a forward
position.
4. The primary purpose of the artistic creation in Egypt was in the promotion of
their belief in life after death. Most of the artefacts were immensely used in
ceremonies directly connected with the dead. Some of these artworks included
Page 47
architectural structures like pyramids that served as the burial places of

deceased souls, caskets for mummies and graphic arts like the hieroglyphic
writing, etc. Statues of missing corpses were carved and embalmed for funeral
rites. Also, colossal figures known as sphinxes were carved in front of the
pyramids as guardians in protecting them.
Moreover, artefacts were greatly used in domestic chores and activities.
Artefacts like decorated mirrors, Silver and glass jars, jewel boxes, walking
sticks, spoons for perfume, dishes and musical instruments for recreation and
entertainment. Textile fabrics made with linen were worn as clothes and for
wrapping dead bodies. Pottery wares were made for storing and preserving
items.
Artworks served decorative purposes. The interiors for pyramids were decorated
with paintings, relief sculptures, hieroglyphics and mosaic.
Also, artefacts were used in religious activities. Deities, spirits, gods and
goddesses were sculpted in wood and modelled in clay. Temples were built as
places of worship.
The importance of Egyptian Art cannot be overemphasized. Some of these

importance are:
i) Egyptian Art has helped in making us know the history and
development of Art in the civilisation of man. This has deepened our
appreciation and usefulness for Art.
ii) The training through apprenticeship which emanated from Egypt has
been an important means in the dispatching of skills from masters of
Art to beginners.
iii) Egyptian Art activities have been the bedrock of knowledge for
students and practitioners of Art in enriching their skills and talents.
iv) Egyptian Art has revealed that problems in the community, and the
nation as a whole can be remedied by the use of Art.
v) The series of inventions by the ancient Egyptians has taught us that if
we develop our creative abilities well, we can make new inventions
and discoveries for our national development.
5. i) Mummy: This refers to dead bodies well treated to prevent decay. After the
body is treated, it is wrapped in linen clothes and laid in tombs.
ii) Sphinx: This refers to the huge or colossal statues carved or modelled in
front of pyramids to serve as its protection.
iii) Ka: This is a term that refers to the soul. This soul is believed to travel to
the metaphysical world.
Page 48
iv) Hieroglyphics: This is a form of picture writing invented by the ancient

Egyptians in 4,000 BC. This was used as the main tool for writing and
communicating in ancient Egypt.
v) Papyrus paper: This is a form of paper invented by the ancient Egyptians.
This paper was obtained from the papyrus plant in Egypt. Reeds of the papyrus
plant was beaten and processed into sheets of paper.
6. a. ‘Art for eternity’ refers to any work of art that is produced with the intention
of lasting a life time without an end. Thus, the artwork was presented in such a
way that some people would believe that they will pass into after death.
b. The death cult that influenced Egyptian art was the belief in life after death.
The Egyptians believed that upon the death of a person, his soul which is
immortal continues to live in the same body. Owing to this, the body was
preserved to serve as an everlasting dwelling place for the soul. The king was
considered as a divine being who held sway over them. Therefore to help the
departed king to lead his normal life, his servants were killed to accompany him.
This savage act was taken over by the introduction of paintings and sculptures.
c. The Egyptian artists worked toward the achievement of producing everlasting

artefacts whether painting, sculpture, architecture, textiles or graphics. Some of
the ways they achieved this are:
1. The pyramids were constructed with heavy stones to serve as the dwelling
place of the deceased king. The interiors provided chambers, galleries and halls
for various burial artefacts that he might need for his journey to the metaphysical
world.
2. The walls served as supports for richly decorated relief sculptures and paintings
that were supposed to preserve the likeness of the king and to be sure that he
continued to exist forever.
3. Sculptors were asked to chisel the king’s head from imperishable granite to be
put in the tomb where no one saw it. The idea was to work its spell and to help his
soul to keep alive through the image.
4. In the burial chamber, spells and incantations were written in hieroglyphics to

help him on his journey to the metaphysical world.
Page 49
5. Figures were treated according to certain rules and showed solemnity and
simplicity. The sculptors were only concerned with essentials. Lesser details were
ignored.
6. There was an evidence of geometrical rigidity to suggest the feeling of

immortality.
Question 7
There are three foreign countries or people that influenced Egyptian art. These are
the Greeks, Romans and the Muslims.
1. In 333 B.C., the Greeks conquered Egypt thereby rendering the pharaohs
powerless.
i. They introduced Hellenistic art.
ii. The Greeks built the city of Alexandria and also constructed banks, cemeteries,
libraries, museums and other public buildings.
iii. They also introduced a new form of art called mosaic to the North Africans.
They used shiny cubes of stones in composing various pictures and scenes in
mosaic on floors, walls and ceilings of architectural houses.
iv. The Greeks introduced their language and gods to the Egyptians and other
North African countries.
2. The Greeks were also conquered by the Romans in 30 B.C.
i. They introduced the Christian religion to the Egyptians.
ii. The Christian theme became a popular subject in painting, sculpture and
architecture in Egypt.
3. The Romans were also conquered by the Muslims in AD 641.
i. They introduced the Islamic religion to Egypt and the rest of North Africa.
ii. They also introduced the Arabic language to Egypt and the whole of North
Africa.
iii. They introduced the use of geometric shapes and signs in art.
8. The arts practiced by the prehistoric men share several similarities with the arts
of the Egyptians in terms of the philosophies behind their artistic creations, kinds
Page 50
of art forms produced, tools and materials used, functions of the arts, beliefs
associated with the work as well as techniques employed for the production of the
works of art. Some of these similarities are discussed below.
1. PHILOSOPHY
Both prehistoric and Egyptian arts were driven or motivated by beliefs thus, belief
in sympathetic magic for the prehistoric art and belief in life after death for
Egyptian art.
2. FUNCTIONS
The arts in both prehistoric and Egyptian arts were created for a certain chief
purpose or need. The prehistoric arts were created to help the prehistoric men and
women to meet their basic necessities of life while Egyptian art was used to serve
the dead and ensure the eternal survival of his soul. Their arts were interdependent
and shared the same purpose. The paintings, engravings, pottery, textiles,
sculpture and architecture of prehistoric art were for one goal thus to achieve the
belief in sympathetic magic for their hunting activities. Similarly, the various
artistic productions of the Egyptians were purposely made to serve the dead.
4. MEDIA
The media and tools used by the cave and Egyptian artists bore similar
characteristics. For instance, they all obtained their coloured pigments from
ground earth ochres mixed with binders such as gums, egg yolk etc. The
application of the paints was done with brushes produced from chewed or beaten
sticks etc.
5. TECHNIQUES
The prehistoric men and Egyptians all achieved perspective in drawing and
painting by placing one form or body on top of another. The cave men and the
Egyptians all had a way of preserving their artistic productions for them to last
eternally. For instance, the prehistoric arts discovered were done or hidden in
deep caverns while the Egyptian arts were hidden in tombs or pyramids.
Moreover, the chief element of their compositions was indicated by size relations.
For instance, the main element in prehistoric art compositions was animals which
were drawn relatively big in comparison with the tiny human figures. Similarly
due to the class distinction that existed in ancient Egypt, the chief element in
compositions was prominent people and in terms of gender, men. The size
relation of the men and prominent figures was relatively bigger than women,
children and slaves.
Page 51
9. a. Archaic period is the first stage of ancient Greek Art history which began in
700 BC and ended in 480 BC. The term ‘archaic’ is a Greek term which means
‘early’. It is used to describe the many developments in art which occurred in the
early stages of Greek culture. The Greeks engaged in the production of several art
forms such as sculpture, painting, architecture, pottery, graphics and textiles.
The chief material for the production of their sculpture was marble because it was
very abundant in their mountainous land. They also used other materials like gold,
ivory and bronze. The postures for their sculptural figures included standing,
kneeling and sitting. They produced three dimensional forms (sculpture-in-the-
round) and relief carvings. They sculpted figures mainly of gods and goddesses in
the likeness of men, women and children. These statues were placed at vantage
points in the country in remembrance of important events and the victors at the
Olympic Games. Others were placed over graves to remember the departed souls
and for decorating public buildings.
The archaic period’s architecture was produced from wood, mud-brick and
marble. They used some as shelter in which they lived. Others were built to house
their gods, serving as temples though the worship of the gods was carried out
outside the temple. The Greeks also built stadiums for athletic contests and
theatres for theatrical performances.
The Greeks made fresco paintings on their walls and other movable panels. They
introduced foreshortening at the latter part of the archaic period. The theme for
their paintings was based on stories of gods and heroes. Under pottery, the Greeks
made various vases and jars. These were used for the storing of water, oil, honey
and corn.
b. These are distinct characteristics of the art forms in the archaic period of Greek
art history:
1. Their statues were characterized by symmetry and stiffness of form. Important

features of the human figure were emphasized.
2. The male sculpted figures which were known as ‘Kouros’ (youth) were in
nudity or naked because the Greeks athletes performed naked in public during the
Olympic Games.
3. Their statues had their left foot placed in a forward position.
Page 52
4. The female sculpted figures called ‘Kore’ (maiden) were fully clothed.
5. The lips of the sculptural figures in the archaic period were curved and drawn
into an expression commonly referred to by art historians as ‘archaic smile’.
6. Figures on vases and pottery wares in the archaic period were painted in black
silhouette with clay slip. The wares were then fired, smoothened and painted in
either geometric patterns, figures of animals, human beings, gods or plants. The
colours used included black, red, orange and cream.
7. The style used for the construction of the temples was the DORIC style named
after the Doric tribe to which the Spartans (Residents of Sparta, An ancient Greek
city famed for military prowess) belonged.
INTRODUCTION TO BASIC DESIGN
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. All these are elements of design except

(a) Dot (b) Balance (c) Shape (d) Line
2. The various units for the creation of art are called

(a) Principles of design (b) Elements of design (c) Basics of design
(d) Foundation of art
3. Which of these is not a principle of design

(a) Texture (b) Variety (c) Dominance (d) Unity
4. Which of these is an example of dot in nature?

(a) Chairs (b) Trees (c) Pebbles (d) Grass
5. A mark left by a moving point is a

(a) Dot (b) Texture (c) Shape (d) Line
6. The surface nature of an object is termed as

(a) Texture (b) Space (c) Line (d) Form
7. Shape is defined as a/an

(a) Boundless area (b) Enclosed area (c) Cut-out point (d) Endless space
Page 53
8. A small point or spot best describes a

(a) Line (b) Dot (c) Space (d) Shape
9. The principles that govern the production of artworks is termed as

(a) Principles of Composition (b) Principles of Organisation
(c) Principles of drawing (d) Principles of design
10. The regular repetition of an element of design is known as

(a) Repetition (b) Balance (c) Dominance (d) Unity
11. A plan of work to be executed is referred to as

(a) Composition (b) Arrangement (c) Design (d) Sketch
12. The two types of texture are

(a) Visual and tactile (b) Visual and rough (c) Smooth and tactile (d) Visual
and smooth
13. Which of these options below is an organic shape?

(a) Human head (b) Plaster bust (c) Cone (d) Sphere
14. Which line suggests stability?

(a) Diagonal (b) Horizontal (c) Vertical (d) Spiral
15. Which line suggests something falling?

(a) Diagonal (b) Vertical (c) Spiral (d) Horizontal
16. Which of these refers to volume and weight?

(a) Rhythm (b) Form (c) Line (d) Colour
17. The sensation created on the eye by rays of decomposed light is

(a) Form (b) Texture (c) Design (d) Colour
18. The scientist who discovered colour is called

(a) Pythagoras (b) Isaac Newton (c) Isaac Remington (d) Charles Darwin
19. Colour was discovered in the

(a) 14th century (b) 15th century (c) 16th century (d) 17th century
20. How many colours were discovered in white light?

(a) 5 (b) 6 (c) 7 (d) 8
Page 54
21. Which of these is not one of the rainbow colours?

(a) Red (b) Yellow (c) Blue (d) Pink
22. The basic colours that cannot be obtained by mixing other colours are known
as
(a) Primary colour (b) Secondary colour (c) Tertiary colour
(d) Intermediate colour
23. Which of these is not a primary colour?

(a) Orange (b) Red (c) Yellow (d) Blue
24. The mixture of two primary colours in their uniform consistency will result in
a
(a) Tertiary colour (b) Complementary colour (c) Secondary colour
(d) Analogous colour
25. The basic identity of a colour is termed as

(a) Hue (b) Chrome (c) Value (d) Intensity
26. Citron is a tertiary colour obtained by which of these colour mixtures?

(a) Orange and violet (b) Violet and olive (c) Green and orange
(d) Orange and olive
27. Colours that lie directly opposite to each other are said to be
(a) Analogous colours (b) Intermediate colours (c) Complementary
colours (d) Chromatic colours
28. Colours that contain greater proportion of blue are said to be

(a) Warm colours (b) Cool colours (c) Bright colours (d) Blues
29. Colours that contain greater proportion of red and yellow are said to be
(a) Cool colours (b) Warm colours (c) Chromatic colours
(d) Analogous colours
30. The relative lightness or darkness of a colour is called

(a) Intensity (b) Value (c) Hue (d) Triad
31. A painting done in one colour is said to be a

(a) Monochrome (b) Polychrome (c) Dichrome (d) Tetrachrome
Page 55
32. A painting in two colours is called a

(a) Monochrome (b) Dichrome (c) Polychrome (d) Tetrachrome
33. A painting in many colours is called

(a) Polychrome (b) Dichrome (c) Tetrachrome (d) Trichrome
34. Warm colours are said to

(a) Retreat (b) Recede (c) Advance (d) Shine
35. The complementary colour for red is

(a) Yellow (b) Violet (c) Green (d) Orange
36. Cool colours are said to

(a) Advance (b) Recede (c) Radiate (d) Slow down
37. A mixture of one primary colour with one secondary colour in equal measure
will result in
(a) Tertiary colour (b) Intermediate colour (c) Primary colour
(d) Secondary colour
38. The primary colours of pigment are

(a) Red, Yellow and blue (b) Blue, red and green (c) Red, yellow and
orange (d) Blue, green and white
39. Contrasting colours are the same as

(a) Analogous colours (b) Prismatic colours (c) Intermediate colours
(d)Complementary colours
40. A tint is obtained by

(a) Adding black to a colour (b) Adding white to a colour (c) Mixing two
colour (d) Mixing two cool colours
41. Which of the following colour combinations could be used to express

happiness and vitality?
(a) Red and White (b) Yellow and Blue (C) Green and White (d) Black and
Yellow
42. How are elements of design identified in nature?

(a) Dots, shapes, weight and lines (b) Unity, form, harmony and shapes
Page 56
(c) Colours, hues, polychrome and monochrome (d) Pebbles, trees, rivers and
fruits
43. A value that is darker than the hue is referred to as

(a) tone (b) tint (c) reflection (d) shade
44. Which of the following sets is essential in a composition?

(a) Line, shape and colour (b) Perspective, tone and pattern (c) Tone,
balance and depth (d) Shape, motif and perspective
45. Impasto could best be described as

(a) a large mural painting (b) the thick application of colours in a format
(c) a watercolour painting based on everyday activities (d) the painting of a
freshly plastered wall
46. Priming and glazing are associated with

(a) oil painting (b) watercolour works (c) ceramics (d) leatherworks
47. Prismatic colour in the following is

(a) White (b) Black (c) Brown (d) Indigo
48. The main characteristic of gouache colour is its

(a) opacity (b) transparency (c) coarseness (d) translucency
49. A harmonious arrangement of elements of art is referred to as

(a) composition (b) painting (c) architecture (d) graphics
50. Red is to green as red-violet is to

(a) blue-violet (b) yellow-orange (c) yellow-green (d) blue-orange
51. All the following are complementary colours except

(a) red and green (b) blue and red (c) orange and blue (d) red-orange and
blue-green
52. Joyfulness and upliftment are evoked by the use of
Page 57
a. Warm colours b. Cool colours c. Dark, sombre colours d. Light, bright

colours
53. Colours that appear to recede in a painting are

a. Bright b. Cool (c) Strong ( d) Warm
54. The oldest printing process is

a. Roller printing b. Frottage printing c. Block printing d. Screen printing
55. Which of the following is based on the principle of repulsion of grease and
water?
a. Lino-cut b. Intaglio c. Wood cut d. Lithography
56. The most suitable plate for etching is

a. Copper b. Gold c. Iron d. Silver
57. Applying a rubber stamp on a support will produce a

a. Low-relief print b. Reverse print c. Direct print d. High relief print
58. The following colours on the 12-point colour wheel are intermediary except
a. Red and violet b. Blue and green c. Blue and yellow d. Yellow and orange
59. Which of the following colours symbolises prosperity?

a. Blue b. Green c. Violet d. Yellow
60. Which hue is common to green and orange?

a. Blue b. Red c. Violet d. Yellow
61. Which of the following is not a physical property of colour?

a. Hue b. Form c. Value d. Intensity
62. Select an element of design from the following:

a. Balance b. Variety c. Harmony d. Shape
63. An object that absorbs all the colours of the spectrum will appear
a. Black b. Brown c. Grey d. White
64. A green shape placed on a red background will create

a. Balance b. Contrast c. Dominance d. Harmony
65. How many intermediate triads are contained in the twelve-point colour wheel?
Page 58
a. One b. Two c. Three d. Four
66. Colours that tend to advance in a painting are

a. Bright b. Cool c. Dull d. Weak
67. Which of the following is a direct print?

a. Frottage b. Wood-cut c. Lino-cut d. Screen
68. An egg yolk is used as a binder for

a. Acrylic b. Gouache c. Tempera d. Watercolour
69. The purity of a colour is its

a. Hue b. Intensity c. Opacity d. Value
70. Which colours appear to advance in a painting?

a. Warm colours b. Cool colours c. Secondary colours d. Complementary
colours
71. Rainbow colours are arranged in a similar pattern as rays of light passing
through
a. The sky b. The window c. A glass prism d. Water in a bucket
72. A technique of painting that employs the use of violet and shade is
a. Chairoscuro b. Sfumato c. Tenebrism d. Trompe l’oeil
73. A balance with a central focus is

a. Vertical balance b. Asymmetrical c. Horizontal balance d. Radial
74. An optical illusion which suggest distance is

a. Horizon b. Perspective c. Background d. Sky
75. A hue created by mixing green and orange is

a. Complementary b. Primary c. Secondary d. Tertiary
76. What emotion is evoked by the use of Sombre colours?

a. Depression b. Dignity c. Excitement d. Serenity
77. An outstanding characteristic that distinguishes one colour from the other is
a. Chroma b. Shade c. Tint d. Value
78. The surface quality of an object is referred to as
Page 59
a. Form b. Shape c. Texture d. Tone
79. A skeleton or framework upon which sculpture may be modelled is the

a. Stiffener b. Statue c. Armature d. Structure
80. The art of cutting shapes or cloth and sewing them on to a large piece of a
fabric is called
a. Patterning b. Appliqué c. Knitting d. Attachment
81. Which of these is the most appropriate definition of colour?

a. The composition of white light b. A pigment used in painting
c. The relative purity of a line d. A mixture of primary and secondary hues
82. Which of the following combinations below gives a suitable contrast?

a. Red on pink background b. White on black background
c. White on yellow background d. Green on blue background
83. Which of the following will produce the shade of a colour?

a. Black b. Grey c. Tint d. White
84. The part that seems to be of greatest visual appeal in a work of art is the
a. Balanced area b. Foreground c. Background d. Focal area
85. Linseed oil and turpentine are used in mixing

a. Acrylic paint b. Emulsion c. Oil colour d. Gouache
86. Green is warm as it approaches

a. Blue b. Red c. Violet d. Yellow
87. Which of the following colours is good for impasto?

a. Water colour b. Oil colour c. Acrylic colour d. Poster colour
88. What feeling does blue convey?

a. Bravery b. Freshness c. Quietness d. Warmth
89. An artist accidentally mixes red and green to produce a

a. Complementary colour b. Tertiary colour c. Neutral colour d. Harmonious
colour
90. Isaac Newton demonstrated that light was colour by passing it through a
a. Block of glass b. Glass of water c. Glass of prism d. Magnify glass
Page 60
91. In the Ghanaian notion of colours, very little distinction is made between pure
colour and their
a. Coolness b. Gradation c. Reflection d. Warmth
92. Identify the principle by which art elements are arranged to produce visual
equilibrium?
a. Harmony b. Opposition c. Rhythm d. Dominance
93. The complementary of blue is formed by mixing

a. Red and blue b. Red and green c. Yellow and red d. Yellow and blue
94. A beam of light passes through a glass prism to produce

a. Chiaroscuro b. Secondary colour c. Spectrum d. Achromatic colour
95. Which o the following grounds will enhance the value of colour?
a. Brown b. Grey c. Yellow d. White
96. A colour that is low in value is that which

a. has been priced cheaply b. has some amount of white added to it
c. contains more black d. does not match any colour
97. The main material for producing colour is

a. Pigment b. Binder c. Resin d. Egg yolk
98. A mixture of yellow and violet in equal proportions will produce

a. Brown b. Orange c. Grey d. Purple
99. Which types of colours are needed to create recession in painting?

a. Analogous colours b. Cool colours c. Primary colours d. Warm colours
100. The value of a colour that is produced after mixing the colour with white is a
a. Hatching b. Primary c. Shade d. Tint
ANSWERS
1. B 11. C 21. D 31. A 41. C
2. B 12. A 22. A 32. B 42. D
3. A 13. A 23. A 33. A 43. D
4. C 14. C 24. C 34. C 44. C
5. D 15. A 25. A 35. C 45. B
Page 61
6. A 16. B 26. C 36. B 46. A

7. B 17. D 27. C 37. B 47. D
8. B 18. B 28. B 38. A 48. A
9. D 19. D 29. B 39. D 49. A
10. A 20. C 30. B 40. B 50. C
51. B 54. C 57. A 60. B 63. A
52. A 55. D 58. C 61. B 64. D
53. B 56. A 59. D 62. D 65. B
66. A 67. A 68. C 69. B 70. A
71. C 72. C 73. D 74. B 75. D
76. A 77. D 78. C 79. C 80. B
81. A 82. B 83. A 84. D 85. C
86. D 87. B 88. C 89. A 90. C
91. B 92. A 93. C 94. C 95. D
96. C 97. A 98. A 99. B 100. D
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) Define elements of design
(b) Identify five (5) elements of design, describing their characteristics and
uses.
2. (a) What are principles of design?
(b) List five (5) principles that assist in the composition of a design.
(c) With the aid of an illustration, describe three of these principles of design
3. (a) Define colour
(b) Identify three (3) sources of colour
(c) Draw and label the twelve-point colour wheel.
4. Explain these colour terminologies:

(i) Hue
(ii) Warm
(iii)Cool
(iv) Value
(v) Monochrome
(vi) Polychrome
(vii) Complementary colours
(viii) Tint
(ix) Shade
(x) Split complementary
5. (a) Write briefly on each of the classes of colour.
Page 62
(a) Complete this table by indicating the symbolism of the colours listed.
COLOURS SYMBOLISM
RED
YELLOW
BLUE
WHITE
BLACK
GREEN
6. (a) What is Sketching?

(b) List and explain the two types of Sketching.
7. Mention and explain three types of drawing.
8. a. Explain the term ‘composition’ and ‘layout’.
b. Outline and discuss FOUR factors to be considered when composing a
picture.
9. a) What is colour harmony?
b) Explain the following colour harmonies:
i) monochromatic harmony ii) analogous harmony iii) Complementary
harmony iv) Triad harmony
10. (a) What is pigment?
(b) List and explain the three (3) types of coloured pigments.
11. (a) What is colour Psychology?
(b) Explain the generally accepted psychological effects of warm and cool
colours.
12. a. Define colour in terms of pigment.

b. Draw the twelve point colour wheel and indicate the following:
i. Primary colours
ii. Secondary colours
iii. Intermediate colours
iv. Warm and cool colours
ANSWERS
1. (a) Define elements of design
Elements of design are the basic visual symbols used to create a work of art.
They are the design units that assist us in the creation of works of art.
Page 63
(b) Identify five (5) elements of design, describing their characteristics and
uses.
(i) Line:
The mark left by a moving point or tool such as pencil, pen, crayon, etc.
Lines are basically used for drawing, shading and designing purposes. Examples
of line include vertical, horizontal, spiral diagonal lines etc.
Vertical Diagonal Horizontal
Spiral
(ii) Dot: This is a small point or spot. It is usually created from the nibs of writing
tools such as pencil, pen, crayon, etc. Dots are used in rendering shades on drawn
objects, creating textures and identifying a given area.
(iii) Shape: This is described as an enclosed area. Examples of shapes include

circles, triangles, squares, ovals, rectangles, etc. Shapes are used in composing
designs and arranging patterns.
Rectangle Triangle
Oval Circle Square
(iv) Space: This refers to an open area with no boundary at least in one direction.
There are two main types of space. They are positive and negative spaces. Spaces
are used in improving the legibility of letters. It makes composition very
interesting.
Page 64
Positive area
Negative area
(v) Texture:
This is the nature of a surface which is either rough or smooth. There are
two main types of texture namely: visual (descriptive) texture and tactile (actual)
texture. Textures assist in the easy identification of objects and for decoration.
2. (a) Principles of design are the laws or principles that govern the
arrangement and organisation of the elements of design to achieve a desirable
effect.
(b) The five (5) principles of design are:

(i) Rhythm
(ii) Balance
(iii) Dominance
(iv) Variety
(v) Harmony
(c) (i) Rhythm:

This is a regular repetition of the various elements of design to create a
sense of movement. Thus, a systematic repetition of an interval, unit
measurement, tone of colour is created in a composition to carry the idea of
movement.
Examples of rhythm are seen in the arrangement of tree branches, leaves,
flowers, movement of animals etc. Rhythm is illustrated below:
(The unit design thus the diamond shape is systematically repeated in equal
intervals)
Page 65
(ii) Balance: This refers to the equilibrium in space, shape and weight or a
seemingly equilibrium of corresponding parts of a design. This can be seen in the
placement of an element of design in relation to the space in the picture plane.
There are two main types of balance namely formal and informal balance.
Formal or Symmetrical balances, the corresponding parts of a design are exactly

the same in relation to the spaces in a work. On the other hand, informal
(asymmetrical) balance is where the corresponding parts of a design in relation
with the space appears to be equal but in actual sense, they are not.
Formal Informal
(Symmetrical) (Asymmetrical)
Balance Balance
(iii) Dominance:
This is a design principle that ensures that one element in a composition
domineers over the other elements. In numbers, the dominant element is greater
than the others in the composition. Dominance in a composition is illustrated
below:
Dominance
In the illustration above, the dominant element is the diagonal line which happens
to be the centre of attraction or focus of interest.
Page 66
(iv) Variety:
This refers to the variation in the elements of design in a composition to break
monotony and to increase attraction. Variety ensures unity or oneness in the
various elements used in composing the design. Variety is illustrated below:
Variety of shapes
(v) Harmony:
This is a design principle that involves composing design elements that share
common or similar interest. For instance, rectangle and square are harmonious
because each of the elements is constructed by the use of parallel lines. In colour
work, paints or colours are said to harmonise if they would form a pleasant
combination. Harmony is illustrated below:
Harmony of shapes
3. (a) Colour is the sensation created on the eye by rays of decomposed light.
The basic identity of colour is known as hue.
(b) Colour can be obtained from several sources. Some of these sources are
natural while others are from man-made objects. Examples of natural sources
of colour are plants, animals, etc. Man-made sources of colour include cups,
buckets, wall hanging, etc.
Page 67
(c) The twelve point (12) colour wheel.
RED
REDISH VIOLET
REDDISH
VIOLET
ORANGE
BLUISH VIOLET ORANGE
YELLOWISH ORANGE
BLUE YELLOWISH GREEN
BLUISH
YELLOW
GREEN
GREEN
4. (a) Hue: This is the basic identity of a colour or the name of a colour. Hues are
colours in their basic state that has not been blended, mixed or changed. Examples
are red, yellow, green, violet, etc. Colours such as pink, brown, etc are not hues
because their basic identities have been changed by the addition of black or white.
(b) Warm: These are colours that contain greater proportion of red and yellow.
Warm colours are very bright and radiate a lot of rays. They advance towards the
viewer and are sometimes referred to as advancing colours. Examples are red,
yellow, orange, yellow orange, etc.
(c) Cool: These are colours that contain greater proportion of blue. Cool colours
are calm in nature and seem to recede or retreat to the background when viewed.
For this reason, they are sometimes known as retreating or receding colours.
Examples are blue, violet, bluish green, bluish violet, etc.
Page 68
(d) Value: This is the relative lightness or darkness of a colour. Some hues are
generally lighter in value or tone while others are darker in value or tone.
Examples of lighter values include yellow, orange, etc. Examples of darker values
are blue, violet, etc. Hues with darker values can easily cover their counterparts in
lighter values while lighter values is the vice versa.
(e) Monochrome: This refers to a painting executed in only one colour. Tints and
shades of the colour are still in monochromatic states.
(f) Polychrome: This refers to a painting done in many colours.
(g) Complementary colours: These are colours that lie directly opposite to each
other on the colour wheel. They are sometimes referred to as contrasting colours.
Thus, on the colour wheel, red is directly opposite to green, while yellow is
directly opposite to violet.
(h) Tint: This is adding white to a colour. For instance, pink is a tint of red
because the red colour has been mixed with white.
(i) Shade: This is adding black to a colour. For instance, brown is a shade of red
because the red colour has been mixed with black.
(j) Split complementary: Split complementary refers to a colour which is nearly

opposite to an intermediary colour of its original complementary. For instance,
Violet is complementary to yellow but when violet is paired with an intermediary
of yellow such as yellow-orange or yellow-green, it is called a split
complementary.
4. (a) There are various classifications of colour. Some of these classes include
Primary colours, Secondary colours, Tertiary colours, intermediate colours,
achromatic colours, Analogous colours etc.
(i) Primary colours: These are colours that cannot be obtained by mixing of
other colours. They are natural colours. They are the basic colours on which
all other colour formations are based. The primary colours are Red, Yellow
and Blue.
Page 69
(ii) Secondary colours: These are colours obtained by mixing two primary
colours in their equal proportions or ratios. Examples of secondary colours
include Orange, Green and Violet. Secondary colour formations are outlined
below:
* Orange Red + Yellow
* Violet Red + Blue
* Green Yellow + Blue
(iii) Tertiary colours: These are colours obtained by mixing two secondary
colours in their equal proportions or ratios. Examples of tertiary colours include
Olive, Russet and Citron. Tertiary colour formations are outlined below:
* Citron Green + Orange

* Olive Violet + Green
* Russet Orange + Violet
(iv) Intermediate colours: This is also known as Intermediary colours. They

are obtained by mixing one primary colour with its neighbouring secondary
colour in their uniform consistencies. Intermediate colour formations are outlined
below:
* Red + Violet Red - Violet/Reddish Violet

*Yellow + Orange Yellow-Orange/Yellowish Orange
* Yellow + Green Yellow - Green/Yellowish Green
* Blue + Green Blue – Green/Bluish Green
*Blue + Violet Blue – violet/ Bluish violet
* Red + Orange Red - Orange/ Reddish Orange
(v) Achromatic colours: These are neutral colours. They include black, white
and grey (ash). The black and white neutrals are used in tinting and shading other
colours.
COLOUR SYMBOLISM
Danger, Anger, Violence,
RED Aggression, Calamity, Riot, Blood
Relations
Page 70
Warmth, Royalty, Ripe, Richness,

YELLOW
prosperity
Calmness, Coolness, Serene, Love,
BLUE
Female tenderness, Depression
Happiness, Victory, Joy, Cleanness,
WHITE
Purity, Holiness
Bad, omen, Evil, Death, Sadness,
BLACK
Grief, strength, hope
Vegetation, Newness, Vitality,
GREEN
Growth
6. (a) Sketching is a kind of drawing that puts forward the instant thoughts of an
artist. Thus, it is a rough freehand and loose drawing which is not considered to
be a finished piece of work. It is a technique for quickly putting thoughts on paper
providing the essential features without much detail. Sketching, usually, results
out of visualizing and immediately capturing them onto paper.
(b) The two types of Sketching are Free-hand sketching and Mechanical
sketching.
i. Free-hand sketching: a free-hand sketch is made without the aid of any

electronic drawing equipment. The designer uses his/her hand freely to draw
lines, shapes etc. to create intended images for further development into paintings,
posters, ceramic wares, printed/woven fabrics, bags, beads, baskets, busts,
bridges, machines, buildings etc.
ii. Mechanical sketching: these are sketches developed through the use of
electronic drawing instruments and equipment like the computer, drafting
machines, compasses etc. Mechanical sketches are more often than not final
sketches and are normally preceded by free-hand sketches.
7. The three types of drawing are sketch drawing, descriptive drawing and tonal
drawing.
1. Sketch Drawing:
This is the creation of simple line drawings to show different line qualities. It is
also referred to as line drawing. It refers to any drawing that consists of distinct
straight and curved lines placed against a usually plain background, without
Page 71
gradations in shade or colour to represent two-dimensional or three-dimensional

objects. Line or sketch drawings can use lines of different colors, although it is
usually monochromatic. Sketch or line drawings emphasize form and outline over
color, shading, and texture. However, areas of solid pigment and dots can also be
used in addition to lines. The lines in a piece of sketch drawing may be all of a
constant width or of freely varying widths. Sketch drawings may tend towards
realism or it may be a caricature, cartoon, ideograph, or glyph.
2. Descriptive drawing:
This is a drawing that depicts recognizable detailed natural or realistic forms.
As its name implies, it gives a lot of details of a work that makes it easier for the
drawn object to be easily recognized. It gives them a more realistic look.
3. Tonal drawing:
This technique of drawing employs light and shade (tonal values) rendering to
define forms. Owing to the varying tones assigned to parts of the drawn object in
relation to the reflection of light, tonal drawings are solid and have a three
dimensional feel.
8. a. The term ‘composition’ and ‘layout’ are two terms that are used
interchangeably in art. They describe the arrangement or organization of the
elements of art, e.g. lines, shapes, colours, textures, text, images etc. on a page or
in a space according to approved guidelines or principles to create a desirable
artwork or an art piece. It is the act of organizing the formal or plastic elements in
a work of art to achieve a unified whole. Composition in a picture is the putting
together, organizing and arrangement of the different parts of a picture.
b. The four factors to consider when composing a picture are:

1. The picture plane
2. The selection of the subject matter
3. Selection of format
4. Drawing
1. The picture plane- The picture plane or picture area refers to the surface where
the various elements and principles of the design will be organized into a unit.
This should be carefully thought of so as to create a good composition.
2. Selection of the subject matter- The artist should select a suitable and
interesting matter for the composition. Examples of subject matter include
geometric shapes, still life, plants, landscape, seascape etc.
Page 72
3. Selection of format- There are two main formats for composition. They are
landscape and portrait. The choice of format should be based on the subject matter
for the composition as well as the nature of elements in the composition.
4. Drawing- The artist should endeavour to use the various drawing tools at his
disposal to bring out the various visual elements in the picture together to give a
balanced and coherent effect.
9. a) Colour harmony is the organisation and arrangement of various colours in

an orderly or pleasant manner so that they portray unity and oneness. Colours
used for a composition must ‘agree’ or meet the principles of aesthetics. The artist
must carefully and skilfully choose his colour scheme or colour combinations.
This is because a wrong pairing of colours can disturb the design and general
outlook of a composition.
b) i. Monochromatic Harmony
The term ‘monochrome’ means one colour. Therefore, monochromatic harmony
deals with the use of varying tones of the same colour in painting a design. This
may be the tints and shades of the same colour. For example, red, brown, pink are
all obtained from one root colour which is red. Therefore when these colours are
used side by side in a composition, they can create a pleasant colour harmony.
ii. Analogous Harmony

Analogous colours are colours that are adjacent to each other or close in
proximity to each other on the colour wheel. When these colours are used side by
side in a composition they form pleasant harmonies. Examples of such colours
include yellow, yellow-orange and orange or blue, blue-green and green.
iii. Complementary Harmony

Complementary colours are colours that lie directly opposite to each other on the
colour wheel. These colours when combined in a colour scheme also create
pleasant harmonies. Examples include yellow and violet, red and green, blue and
orange.
iv. Triad Harmony

A triad refers to three equi-distant colours on the colour wheel. These colours
have the same distances between each other on the colour wheel. For instance, if
the distance is one colour step, to locate the other two colours, count one colour
step to your left and right on the colour wheel. Examples of triad harmonies on
the colour wheel include Red, yellow and blue (3-equidistant colour steps); Red-
orange, Yellow-green and Blue-violet.
Page 73
10. (a) Pigment is a highly concentrated loose powder colour. A pigment must
have a high tinting strength relative to the materials it colours. It must be stable in
solid form at close temperatures.
(b) The three (3) types of coloured pigments are water-based colours, oil-based
colours and dry media.
1. Water-based colours: These are pigments with water-soluble gums as binders,
e.g. gouache, tempera, water colour and poster colour.
2. Oil-based colours: These are pigments manufactured with oily-based products,
e.g. enamel paints and oil paints.
3. Dry Media: This constitutes pigments that are used directly without any
diluents or solvent, e.g. coloured pencils, pastel, crayons, charcoal and coloured
chalk
11. (a) Colour Psychology is what an individual thinks or believes about colour
and how this thought affects his/her choice and use of colour. The psychology of
colour is based on the mental and emotional effects colours have on sighted
people in all facets of life.
(b) The generally accepted psychological effects of warm and cool colours is
that Warm colours – such as red, yellow and orange – can spark a variety of
emotions ranging from comfort and warmth to hostility and anger. Warm colours
like yellow or orange creates an environment of stimulation or whet people’s
appetite. These colours are often associated with food and can cause you to be
hungry. That is the reason why most restaurants are painted with these colours.
However, there should be great caution when using these colours. They reflect
more light and excessively stimulate a person’s eyes which can lead to irritation.
Cool colours (green, blue and purple). They are restful colours and they often
spark feelings of calmness. The colour blue is suggested for high-traffic rooms or
rooms that you or other people will spend significant amounts of time. Blue is
typically a calming and serene colour, said to decrease respiration and lower
blood pressure. The bedroom is a great place to use these colours as they should
help you relax.
12. a. Colour in terms of pigment is defined as fine coloured powder which when
combined with various mixtures creates paint. An example is mixing water with a
binding agent to create paint.
b. i- Red, Yellow and Blue

ii. Orange, green and violet
Page 74
iii. Yellow-Orange, Yellow-Green, Blue-green, Blue-violet, Red-orange, Red-

violet
iv. Warm colours- Yellow, Red, Orange, Red-orange, Red-violet, Yellow-
Orange
v. Cool colours- Blue, Green, Violet, Yellow-Green, Blue-green, Blue-violet
The diagram below shows the twelve point colour wheel indicating the primary
colours, secondary colours and intermediate colours. The keys are:
Number ‘1’ on the colour wheel stands for the primary colours on the colour
wheel.
Number ‘2’ on the colour wheel stands for the secondary colours on the colour
wheel.
Number ‘3’ on the colour wheel stands for the intermediate colours on the colour
wheel.
The extreme left hand six colours on the colour wheel are the set of warm colours
while the extreme right hand six colours on the colour wheel are the set of cool
colours.
The Twelve Point Colour Wheel
Page 75
INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN AND TECHNOLOGY
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The design and technology process starts with

(a) Investigation of the problem (b) Definition of the problem
(c) Identification of the problem (d) Working drawing
2. Why is the making of prototypes necessary?

(a) To learn of building skills (b) To sell the product
(c) To correct problems in the product (d) To be efficient
3. For mass production of products, the designer has to execute

(a) Preliminary designs (b) Working drawings
(c) Model (c) Evaluation
4. Idea development helps in

(a) The creation of new designs (b) Copying designs
(c) Adding details (d) Picturing motifs
5. An art piece that has height, length and breadth is said to be

(a) Three-dimensional (b) Two-dimensional
(c) One-dimensional (d) Four-dimensional
6. What is always maintained in a design’s idea development?

(a) Positive area (b) Negative area
(c) Main aspects of the design (d) The decorative parts of original design
7. The pillar for development in affluent nations is credited to

(a) Resources (b) Science and technology (c) Government
(d) Citizens
8. The cost of an article depends on one of these factors

(a) Target group (b) Market (c) Total cost of production
(d) Company’s prestige
9. The planning of hand-made articles is known as

(a) Organisation (b) Arrangement (c) Design (d) Planning
Page 76
10. At what stage of the design process does the designer engage in research and
analysis of the problem?
(a) Problem identification (b) Definition of problem (c) Possible solutions
(d) Investigation of problem
11. The actual production of the article is carried out at what stage of the design
process?
(a) Production (b) Prototype (c) Evaluation (d) Possible solutions
12. The last stage of the design process where the finished article is tested is
known as
(a) Prototype (b) Evaluation (c) Idea development (d) Problem identification
13. The designer considers all these in the investigation of the problem except
(a) Shape of article (b) Tools and materials (c) Country of origin
(d) Cultural elements
14. The exact replica of a produced article is termed as

(a) Sketch (b) Working drawing (c) Master copy (d) Prototype
15. At what stage in the design process is final corrections of the product made?
(a) Idea development (b) Possible solution (c) Prototype (d) Working
drawing
16. Finishing is done to

(a) Increase cost of product (b) Improve workability (c) Improve
appearance of product (d) Copyright products.
17. Prototypes are important because

(a) It helps in the sales of product (b) Correct mistakes in a product
(c) Make designs nice (d) To be efficient
18. The cost of a product is determined by adding what to the total production
cost?
(a) Interest (b) Profit (c) Wholesale price (d) Retail price
19. Training in design and technology is necessary since it

(a) Increase creativity (b) Improves appearance of product
(c) Retains quality (d) Ensures progress
Page 77
20. In designing of articles, the basic visual tools are governed by

(a) Organisational skills (b) Principles of design (c) Arrangement skills
(d) Elements of design
21. The design process begins with the

(a) definition of the problem (b) investigation of the problem
(c) solution to the problem (d) identification of the problem
22. Which of the following is considered last in painting?

a. Drawing b. Evaluation c. Production d. Prototype
ANSWERS
1. C 6. C 11. A 16. C 21. D
2. C 7. B 12. B 17. B 22. B
3. B 8. C 13. C 18. B
4. A 9. C 14. D 19. A
5. A 10. D 15. C 20. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Discuss three (3) main importance of the design and technology process.
2. Briefly explain the various steps in the design and technology process.
3. (a) What is evaluation?
(b) Why is evaluation important to the designer?
4. Discuss the investigation of the problem stage in the design and technology
process
5. List the steps in the design and technology process in an orderly manner.
ANSWERS
1. The design and technology process is very vital in the development and
production of a product. The three (3) importance of the design and
technology process are:
(i) It helps us in creating items to satisfy our needs.
(ii) It helps us in developing useful skills and capabilities to satisfy our
economic needs
(iii)It assists designers in meeting the needs and aspirations of clients.
Page 78
(i) It helps designers in creating items to satisfy our needs

The design and technology process assists amateur and seasoned designers to
produce hand-made articles to satisfy our basic needs. The paramount of these
needs is shelter and then food and clothing. Articles for storing items such as
food, oil, etc. are made. Apparels for personal adornment and other products to
improve our livelihood are made possible through activities in the design and
technology process.
(ii) It helps in developing useful skills and capabilities to satisfy our

economic needs
Creative abilities are developed and enhanced through activities in the design and
technology process. Organisational skills, production skills, thinking abilities are
learnt as the artist goes through the design process. These skills when developed
can be used in producing useful items which when sold can aid in satisfying one’s
economic needs.
(iii) It assists designers in meeting the needs and aspirations of clients

The needs, tastes and aspirations of clients are satisfactorily met when steps in the
design process are meticulously followed. Clients’ priorities and specifications
such as shape, size, colour, etc are satisfied. This helps in improving good
customer relations and mass mobilisation of sales.
2. There are ten (10) steps in the design and technology process. These steps are:
(i) Problem identification

(ii) Definition of the problem
(iii) Investigation of the problem
(iv) Possible solutions
(v) Idea development
(vi) Preliminary designing
(vii) Working drawing
(viii) Prototype
(ix) Production
(x) Evaluation
(i) The problem identification:

This is the first stage of the design process whereby the problem for the
need of the item is outlined.
Page 79
(ii) Definition of the problem:

This is the second stage of the design process where the specific nature of
the problem is pointed out together with the available materials and
financial strength of the client.
(iii) Investigation of the problem:

This is the third and most important stage in the design process whereby
the designer engages in research and analysis to find the exact solution to
the problem. He probes into the shape, size and form of the article; the
tools and materials for the production; the cost of the article; the method
of production; the safety of the article; the cultural elements and the final
appearance of the article.
(iv) Possible solutions:

Reliable remedies in addressing the problem are suggested. Several ideas
are accrued from the environment. Elements and principles of the design
are put to work. The most suitable solution is taken.
(v) Idea development:

The most suitable idea is developed through series of stages by either
adding or subtracting some aspects of the original design. The developed
design is further worked on.
(vi) Preliminary designing/Model making:

Preliminary designs or model of the final design is made using materials.
This makes the work more actual since it’s in three dimensions.
(vii) Working drawing:

At this stage, the various parts of the article are drawn to scale to assist the
designer in the making of the final article.
(viii) Prototype/Model:
This is the stage during which the working drawings are used in the
construction of the article. The prototype is the exact replica of the final
article.
Page 80
(ix) Production:
This is the stage the final article is built using the tools, materials and
production methods.
(x) Evaluation:
This is the last stage of the design process whereby the final product is
tested or evaluated to see whether it can solve the problem. Mistakes are
corrected at this last stage.
3. (a) Evaluation is the process of assessing, and testing a finished product to

verify whether it meets its set goals and purposes.
It is the last of the steps in the design and technology process. Criticisms from
friends, relatives and practitioners in the field assist greatly in the evaluations
of products.
(b) Evaluation is very essential since it helps designers in knowing their

pitfalls and faults in the products produced. This correction could be in the
shape, size, colour, etc. of the finished product. Necessary corrections and
remedies are implemented in curbing these mistakes in the product. This
increase the quality and value of the product. It also helps in optimising the
sales of products due to the fact that customers’ complaints are addressed.
This improves producer and customer relations.
4. The investigation of the problem stage in the design process is the delicate
aspect which when not handled properly will make products lose their
meaning and usefulness. It is this stage that the designer searches for solutions
to the problem. He engages in research to remedy the situation. He
investigates into:
• The shape, size and form of the article
• The kind of tools and materials for the work
• The cost of the article
• The method of production
• The safety of the article to the user
• The cultural elements
• The final outlook of the work.
5. The steps in the design and technology process in an orderly manner are:
(i) The problem identification
Page 81

(v) Idea development
(vi) Preliminary designing/model making
(vii) Working drawing
(viii) Prototype/model
(ix) Production
(x) Evaluation
COMPUTER AS A TOOL IN ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The electronic device that accepts data, process and produce it into an output
data is called
(a) Sounds stereo (b) Digital recorder (c) Computer (d) Sound recorder
2. There are two kinds of input information. These are instructions and
(a) Output (b) Input (c) Data (d) Programs
3. Instructions given to a computer program is known as

(a) Programme (b) Command (c) Data (d) Response
4. Which type of computers has high processing capabilities?

(a) Super computer (b) Minicomputer (c) Micro computer
(d) Mainframe computer
5. The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is found in the

(a) Floppy disk (b) System unit (c) Monitor (d) Keyboard
6. Direct entries are made on a computer by the use of

(a) Keyboard (b) Mouse (c) Modem (d) Speaker
7. All these are input devices except

(a) Keyboard (b) Stylus pen (c) Microphone (d) Monitor
8. Which of these is an output device?

(a) Printer (b) Scanner (c) Keyboard (d) Digital camera
Page 82
9. A displayed data is called

(a) Hard copy (b) Soft copy (c) Input (d) CPU
10. Which of these is not a storage device?

(a) Pen drive (b) Floppy disk (c) Compact disk (d) Scanner
11. The use of the computer to design is termed as

(a) Computer science (b) Computer illiteracy (c) Computer aided work
(d) Computech
12. All these are computer aided programmes except

(a) Microsoft Excel (b) Corel Draw (c) Photoshop (d) Adobe Illustrator
13. Which of these is a 3D computer programme?

(a) Corel Draw (b) Rhino (c) Photoshop (d) PowerPoint
14. The computer as an art tool is better than the traditional hand work because
the
(a) Duration for work is reduced (b) Computer works are larger in dimension
(c) Computer works are coloured (d) Computer assists in advertising products
15. An advantage of using the computer is that

(a) It’s flexible (b) It’s reflective (c) It’s colourful (d) It’s bold
16. The Microsoft word program assists in the designing of

(a) Various pictures (b) Lettering styles (c) Symbols (d) Array of lines
17. Illustrations are easily made by the use of

(a) Adobe Illustrator (b) Microsoft word (c) Corel Draw (d) Photoshop
18. For mass production of designs, the artist should use which of these devices?
(a) Calligraphers (b) Pastels (c) Computer (d) Digital camera
19. One computer peripheral is

(a) Speaker (b) Memory card (c) Hard disk (d) Monitor
20. Pictures can be displayed on computers by the use of

(a) Stylus pen (b) Scanner (c) Plotter (d) IPod
Page 83
ANSWERS
1. C 6. B 11. C 16. B
2. C 7. D 12. A 17. A
3. B 8. A 13. B 18. C
4. A 9. B 14. A 19. A
5. B 10. D 15. A 20. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is a computer?
(b) Draw and label the parts of a computer.
2. Discuss the role that computer play in Art.
3. How can the computer as a tool conveniently
4. List and explain four computer accessories
5. Briefly describe the general importance of computers.
ANSWERS
1. (a) A computer is an electronic device that accepts data through a command,
processes the data and produce an output data.
(b)
MONITOR
SYSTEM
UNIT
MOUSE
KEYBOARD
2. The computer, as a tool, assists artists greatly in undertaking their creative

activities. There are several computer aided software programs that has
Page 84
improved the quality of the arts done today. Some of these programs include
Microsoft word, Corel Draw, Rhinoceros, Adobe Illustrator, etc.
The Microsoft word programme is enriched with several lettering styles
that increase a designer’s scope of selecting the right font for a particular work.
The Corel Draw and Rhinoceros programs together with the Adobe Illustrator
assist artists in developing and selecting pictures to be incorporated in designs.
These computer software programs give artists the freedom in exploring and
trying different ways of representing their designs. Tints and shades of varieties of
hues are on the computer. This aids artists in selecting colours that harmonise
well. Working on the computer affords artist the opportunity of developing their
creative abilities. It has also reduced the burden on artists when using traditional
methods, tools and materials in the production of designs.
Three dimensional products such as packages for industries can be represented on
the computer in a more realistic look using the Rhino software program.
The computer is therefore a reliable tool in assisting artists in creating and
designing to meet the current standards and demands of today.
3. The computer is a salient tool that can help artists in the selection of colour.
Tints and shades of varieties of colour are on the computer. Specific shades of
a colour can be selected for a particular work. Colour specifications of
industries, firms and institutions can be satisfactory met without any
difficulties. Colours can be tried to verify whether they harmonise or not
before the final work is produced. This has made artists more efficient in their
choice of colours.
4. The four computer accessories are:

(i) Printer
(ii) Keyboard
(iii) Hard Disk
(iv) Mouse
(i) Printer
A printer is an output device that prints the result of an operation on paper.
Documents and other information carried out on the computer is made visible on
the paper by the use of a printer.
Page 85
(ii) Keyboard
It is commonest input device that allow users to communicate with the computer
by means of typing. A keyboard consists of five main parts namely; the function
keys, Alpha Numeric keys, Numeric Keypad, Special keys and Arrow keys.
(iii) Hard Disk

The hard disk is a permanent fixture containing one or more circular metallic
disks that are used to store data, files and software programs. It can read and write
data from and to the disk. It is a storage device that stores the largest amount of
data compared to the other storage devices.
(iv) Mouse
This is an input device that is used in addition to the keyboard. It is a pointing
device that helps a user to navigate through a graphical computer interface. It is a
hand held device that controls a pointer on the screen.
5. The computer is generally an important device that assists immensely in the

development of any field of human endeavour. Computer has made television
broad casting easy. Graphic designers produce TV slides and the graphical
display seen on television screen during broadcasting.
Designs for products in industries and firms are made by the use of computers.
In the automotive industries, designs for cars, motor cycles are done using a
computer. The computer is endowed with variety of games which serves as
recreation or entertainment for not only the young but as well as the old.
In hospitals, the computer assists health personnel and surgeons in viewing

body parts that are not visible to the eye when looked on the surface. This has
improved health delivering and has reduced mortality rates to a lesser degree.
In the field of art, computers help artists to create intricate designs with
precisions and accuracy unlike the traditional method of using the hand. This
has increased the value and meaningfulness of art in the country.
It can be said without exaggeration, that the computer is a device that has
improved the general livelihood of the individual.
Page 86
TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONAL COMPOSITION
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. A work of art that has length and breadth only is referred to as

(a) One-dimensional form (b) Two-dimensional form (c) Three-
dimensional form (d) Four-dimensional form
2. All these are examples of two-dimensional works except

(a) Drawing (b) Painting (c) Collage (d) Sculpture
3. Which of these is one of the dominant processes involved in designing

artefacts?
(a) Colour (b) Visual inspection (c) Elements of design (d) Principles of
drawing
4. Which of these is the first step in making a two dimensional design?

(a) Organising (b) Planning (c) Arrangement (d) Scaling
5. The set of principles that helps in the creation of artworks include these
except
(a) Rhythm (b) Texture (c) Balance (d) Dominance
6. Three-dimensional works are always preceded by

(a) One-dimensional design (b) Two-dimensional design
(c) Three-dimensional design (d) Four-dimensional design
7. Which of these is NOT common to both two and three-dimensional works?

(a) Selection of visual information (b) Examination of visual information
(c) Analysis of visual information (d) Identification of visual information
8. An artwork in the round best refers to

(a) Coiled work (b) Three-dimensional work (c) Two-dimensional work
(d) One-dimensional work
9. Which of these is a three-dimensional work?

(a) Collage (b) Drawing (c) Sculpture (d) Painting
10. Learning of skills become possible by
Page 87
(a) Studying (b) Working with tools and materials (c) Drawing
(d) Painting
11. Which of the following processes can be used for assemblage of soft metals?
(a) Enamelling (b) Soldering (c) Sgraffito (d) Etching
12. Which of the following is a planographic process?

(a) Messotint (b) Gravure (c) Acquatint (d) Lithography
13. Metal casting is done in a

(a) workshop (b) studio (c) foundry (d) furnace
14. Beadmaking is a major craft of the

(a) Akwapims (b) Krobos (c) Brongs (d) Fantis
15. A mixture of clay and other ceramic materials is called

(a) body (b) batt (c) biscuit (d) grog
16. The most important feature on the label of a product is the

a. Ingredients b. Name c. Producer d. Quantity
17. Which of the following takes the longest time to dry?

a. Cement b. Clay c. Plasticine d. P.O.P
18. Which of the following is usually built around armature?

a. Bronze b. Cement c. Marble d. Silver
19. A suitable medium for outdoor sculpture is

a. Bronze b. Clay c. Plaster d. Plasticine
20. Which of the following processes is associated with leatherwork?

a. Centering b. Modelling c. Scorching d. Throwing
21. When the twill weave is used, the product that comes out is
a. Calico b. Check c. Gabardine d. Poplin
Page 88
ANSWERS
1. B 6. B 11.B 16. B 21. C
2. D 7. B 12. D 17. B
3. B 8. B 13. C 18. B
4. A 9. C 14. B 19. A
5. B 10. D 15. A 20. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Discuss the three (3) dominant processes involved in the designing of
artefacts.
2. State four (4) points essential in making a two-dimensional design.
3. Describe the relationship between two dimensional and three-dimensional
works.
ANSWERS
1. The three dominant processes involved in the designing of artefacts are:

(a) Visual investigation
(b) Learning of skills
(c) Problem solving
(a) Visual inspection

This is the exploration of the visual work through keen and critical observation by
the use of the sense of sight. This observation done is then translated into designs.
(b) Learning Skills

In producing artefacts, the artist acquires skill, knowledge and understanding of
various production techniques. These skills obtained can be implemented in
creating new forms and designs.
(c) Problem solving

Before artefacts are designed, it should have a purpose for its creation. The
finished work should be able to solve an existing problem in the community.
Therefore, careful thinking must be made to ensure that tools and materials are
used in a satisfactory way to achieve optimum results.
Page 89
2. The four (4) essential points in making a two-dimensional design are:
(i) Careful consideration should be given to the way the various elements of
design are arranged in the picture area. Principles of design should govern
the arrangement of the various visual tools to achieve a pleasant
composition.
(ii) The various aspects of the design should be organised to achieve unity so
that aspects of the finished work won’t be isolated from the other aspects
of the work.
(iii) The various units of the design should be related to each other.
(iv) There should be a general planning of the work before the production is
made.
3. The relationship between two and three dimensional works are:
(i) Preliminary drawings in two dimensions are made before the three-
dimensional works are produced.
(ii) Two dimensional forms give us the motivation to produce three
dimensional forms.
(iii) In both two and three dimensional forms, visual information derive from
the environment are identified, selected and examined.
(iv) Processes in visual investigation, learning of skills and problem solving

are employed in both two and three dimensional works.
(v) Varieties of materials are used in the production of both two and three
dimensional works.
Page 90
THREE DIMENSIONAL ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The arrangement of forms in space so that they have height, breadth and depth
is referred to as
(a) One dimensional art (b) Two dimensional art (c) Three dimensional
art (d) Four dimensional art
2. All these are three dimensional art except

(a) Sculpture (b) Ceramics (c) Basketry (d) Graphic design
3. What type of material is used in creating three dimensional works?

(a) Light material (b) Solid material (c) Malleable material
(d) Pliable material
4. The sharp metallic tool used for carving forms in three dimensions is called
(a) Mallet (b) Chisel (c) Pliers (d) Hammer
5. The subtractive process of building forms is termed as

(a) Modeling (b) Sculpture (c) Leatherwork (d) Carving
6. The making of articles from pliable materials is known as

(a) Basketry (b) Pottery (c) Carving (d) Sculpture
7. An additive method of building forms is known as

(a) Modeling (b) Pottery (c) Ceramics (d) Leatherwork
8. The method of decorating items like leather by treating its surface to give it a
raised effect is called
(a) Engraving (b) Embossing (c) Etching (d) Dunting
9. All these are production techniques used in building three dimensional forms
except
(a) Modeling (b) Casting (c) Picture making (d) Carving
10. Which of these materials is dense and non-porous?
Page 91
(a) Wood (b) Glass (c) Stone (d) Metal

11. The appearance of grey-baft is enhanced by
a. Bleaching b. Mercerizing c. Scouring d. Sizing
12. The absorption of dyes into fabrics is enhanced when the fabric is
a. Bleached b. Sized c. Soaked d. Washed
13. The process of preparing hides and skins into leather is

a. Embossing b. Scrapping c. Skinning d. Tanning
14. Which of the following is most appropriate for making models?

a. Plaster b. Plasticine c. Cement d. Bronze
15. Which of the following is suitable for an appliqué support?

a. Sheet metal b. Fabric c. Wooden panel d. Plywood
16. In basketry, fitching is done to

a. Decorate and finish bend b. Strengthen and decorate a basket
c. Weave alternately d. Form a skeleton of a new basket
17. Which of the following processes will remove impurities from woven fabrics?
a. Heddling b. Reeding c. Scouring d. Spinning
18. A figure modelled in low contour is a

a. Frieze b. Fresco c. Bas-relief d. Sunken relief
19. The most basic skill that helps to develop the power of observation is
a. Carving b. Drawing c. Modeling d. Weaving
20. A figure stressing comical features is called a

a. Portrait b. Caricature c. Profile d. Camouflage
21. Layout is referred to

a. The decoration of a hand written letter b. The plan showing how the final
work will look c. How the appreciation of the work would be done
d. How the final work would be framed
Page 92
22. The term dry footing is associated with

a. Turning b. Drying of pots c. Glaze fixing d. Clay preparation
23. The most distinguished sculptor in West Africa is

a. Vemi Bisri b. Vincent Kofi c. Ben Enwonwu d. Avia ideh
24. In indigenous African arts, plaiting and braiding of human hair are known as
a. Tatooing b. Scarification c. Adornment d. Coiffure
25. Nok sculptures were mainly of

a. Clay b. Wood c. Bronze d. Ivory
26. Clay preparation involves the processes of soaking, wedging and

a. Kneading b. Rolling c. Slabbing d. Throwing
27. By what process is the moisture content in wood reduced?

a. Firing b. Pressing c. Seasoning d. Squeezing
28. Which of the following options is classified as an inorganic material?

a. Bone b. Plaster c. Rubber d. Wood
29. In the practice of recycling, old bricks are ground to obtain

a. Gelatine b. Grog c. Plastics d. Plasticine
30. Exact reproduction of a three dimensional object is best done by

a. Carving b. Casting c. Fabrication d. Modelling
31. Wedging of clay eliminates inconsistencies, air bubbles and

a. Cracks b. Lumps c. Plasticity d. Shrinkage
32. The surface on which a two dimensional art work is done is referred to as
a. Cover b. Level c. Prop d. Support
33. Technique is the combination of physical ability, use of tools and

a. Design b. Drawing c. Materials d. Utility
34. The reason for adding grog to clay is to
Page 93
a. Prevent drying b. Make it porous c. Prevent shrinkage d. Make it soft
35. Metal is suitably melted in a/an

a. Crucible b. Enamel bowl c. Pot d. Stone Vase
36. Identify the suitable material added to clay to reduce its plasticity
a. Cement b. Plaster c. Sand d. Wax
37. Compliance of safety rules in the studio is to

a. Produce quality works b. Start work early c. Wear protective cloths
d. Work slowly
38. Identify the techniques of carving

a. Blocking, Whittling and engraving b. Chasing, casting and filing
c. Pinching, coiling and slabbing d. Throwing, turning and glazing
39. Which of the following is a technique in modelling?

a. Coiling b. Sizing c. Staining d. Throwing
40. Identify one characteristic of clay

a. Cracking b. Elastic c. Malleable d. Rusting
41. Making a sculpture by means of additive process is referred to as

a. Carving b. Casting c. Modelling d. Throwing
42. At what stage is clay suitable for burnishing?

a. Bone-dry b. Fired c. Leather-hard d. Wet
43. Art pieces of great importance are kept and preserved in

a. Archives b. Galleries c. Libraries d. Museums
44. Seeds, paper, fabric and other objects are stuck onto a surface to produce
a. Collage b. Fresco c. Impasto d. Mosaic
45. In weaving, the tool that carries the threads across the warp is called
a. Shuttle b. Spool c. Heddle d. Treadle
Page 94
46. An imperial sheet o paper usually measures

a. 78cm×57.2cm b. 88.4cm×70.2cm c. 88.4cm×70.2cm d. 78cm×39cm
47. A leather pocket containing charms is called

a. Magic wind b. Purse c. Puppet d. Talisman
48. Distinct marks made on the spine of the sections of a book for collating are
known as
a. Printer’s signature b. Muslin c. Tags d. Tapes
49. The device for holding together the papers in a book after gluing the spine is
called the
a. Plane b. Compressor c. Guillotine d. Press
50. The tool for transferring hot wax in batik design is called
a. Tjanting b. Application c. Pliers d. Copier
51. Which of the following are true of how brushes should be kept?
I. They should be soaked in water or a week to remove all dirt
II. They should be cleaned thoroughly in lukewarm water after use
III. They should be pointed or flattened to the original shape with the fingers
IV. They should be stored with the bristles up in a can
a. I and II only b. I, II and III only c. I, II and IV only d. I, II, III and IV only
52. The point where the warp and the weft threads intersect to become cloth is
called the
a. Shed of the cloth b. Fell of the cloth c. Sheen of the cloth d. Selvedge of the
cloth
53. A picture of inanimate objects is known as

a. Figure b. Mosaic c. Imaginative composition d. Still Life
54. Upsetting is a term used in

a. Collage b. Leather work c. Textiles d. Basketry
Page 95
55. Which of the following is a two dimensional?

a. Foot-trac b. Necklace c. Lampshade d. Mural
56. What type of paper is used in printing the Ghanaian Times?

a. Newsprint b. Cartridge paper c. Typing paper d. Cardboard
57. The process of splashing and dribbling paint on a canvas is called

a. Geometric art b. Dynamic art c. Action painting d. Accidental painting
58. In textiles, bleeding means

a. Treating fabrics to make them white b.dye running out of fabric
c. Removing blood stains from fabric d. Adding red dyes to a dye solution
59. Throwing is a process of

a. Fashioning clay objects on a revolving wheel b. Removing air bubbles from
clay c. Hitting clay balls on a table d. Trimming excess clay
60. The tip of a pointed brush makes what type of line?

a. Fine line b. Blunt line c. Thick line d. Black line
61. The metal tool used for painting is

a. Rasp b. Spatula c. Paring knife d. Palette knife
62. A picture made from memory mainly falls under

a. Still life composition b. Imaginative composition c. Seascape composition
d. Landscape composition
63. Greenware is clay in its

a. Fired state b. Glazed state c. Unfired state d. Wet state
64. What name is given to the edge of a woven fabric?

a. Fell b. Frill c. Selvedge d. Shed
65. Preparing the surface of a support for printing is referred to as

a. Coating b. Glazing c. Priming d. Varnishing
Page 96
66. Which of the following terms does not apply to wood sculpture?
a. Kneading b. Incising c. Carving d. Seasoning
67. In terms of function, which of the following products is closest to poster?

a. Cartoon b. Banner c. Label d. Brochure
68. In pottery, the first step of the throwing process is

a. Pulling b. Shaping c. Centering d. Kneading
69. Which of the following is used for protecting paintings and plaster models?
a. Varnish b. Fixative c. Thinner d. Turpentine
70. The kick wheel is used in

a. Textiles b. Ceramics c. Sculpture d. Graphics
71. A drawing material which is sometimes bound with oil is called

a. Pastel b. Plasticine c. Charcoal d. Poster
72. Blackness of pots in traditional pottery is achieved by

a. Slipping b. Smoking c. Painting d. Firing
73. Making an object from scrap metals fall under the art of
a. Construction and Assemblage b. Joining and Melting
c. Carving and Casting d. Scotching and riveting
74. Bas relief is another term for

a. Low relief b. High relief c. Sculpture d. Modelling
75. In which branches of art are embossing and burnishing used as decorations?
a. Leather and pottery b. Leather and picture making c. Textiles and pottery
d. Sculpture and textiles
76. The two main types of dyes are

a. Spirit and water based b. Indanthrene and dylon c. Caustic soda and salt
d. Tanning and fast dye
Page 97
77. Plastic material is to modelling as hard material is to

a. Casting b. Carving c. Slipping d. Glazing
78. A paper pulp mixed with glue, paste, oil or resin is known as
a. Cartridge paper b. Papier mache c. Newsprint paper d. Bonded paper
79. Bronze is an alloy of

a. Copper and Zinc b. Zinc and brass c. Brass and iron d. Tin and copper
80. When ground pigment is added to egg yolk, the result is

a. Poster colour b. Tempera colour c. Pastel d. Gouache
81. The initial stage of bisque firing is termed

a. Biscuit firing b. Glaze firing c. Water smoking d. Densification
82. Identify a water resistant media from the options

a. Water colour b. Poster colour c. Indian Ink d. Felt pens
83. What material is used to make ceramic insulators?

a. Kaolin b. Feldspar c. Terracotta d. Limestone
84. A rolling pin is used in

a. Spreading colour in screen printing b. Flattening clay for pottery
c. Spreading colour over a lino block d. Laying warp in weaving
85. Montage is a picture made

a. Out of pieces of photo cuttings b. on a billboard c. On the ceiling of a church
d. On a wall
86. Compositors and engravers are

a. Literary artists b. Graphic artists c. Fine artists d. Static artists
87. Which of these brushes is suitable for water colour painting?

a. Hog hair brush b. Sable brush c. Filbert brush d. Bristle brush
88. How many pebbles or marbles are used for the oware game?
Page 98
a. 24 b. 40 c. 44 d. 48
89. Which of the following options is an example of sculpture in the round?

a. Fresco b. Mural c. Plaque d. Statue
90. The process of polishing the surface of pots with a tool to make it smooth and
shining is
a. Batt b. Bisque c. Burnishing d. Saggers
91. A curved tool made of wood, metal or plastic used for the shaping, scraping or
smoothing clay objects is called a
a. Frog b. Raku c. Rib d. Spatula
92. A narrow strip of hide or leather used in sewing leatherworks is

a. Belt b. Lace c. Rope d. Thong
93. Using rolled clay for modelling is known as

a. Coiling b. Moulding c. Rolling d. Roping
94. In casting, you have to first prepare

a. Grog b. Moulds c. Sand bags d. Weft
95. Dyes extracted from fruits, flowers, barks and roots are known as
a. Colour dyes b. Pigment dyes c. Synthetic dyes d. Vegetable dyes
96. The difference between pottery and ceramics is that

a. Ceramic wares are fired to higher temperatures
b. Only ceramic wares are glazed
c. Only pottery wares are breakable
d. Pottery wares are dried before firing
97. A small piece of coloured glass, marble or stone used in mosaic is termed
a. Stainless glass b. Stele c. Stucco d. Tesserae
98. A technique of painting on a plastered surface of a wall is termed

a. Buon fresco b. Fresco c. Fresco secco d. Gesso fresco
Page 99
99. The process of removing unwanted areas of a picture is known as

a. Bleeding b. Blowing up c. Cropping d. Trimming
100. The purpose of an armature in modelling is to

a. Give beauty to a work b. Increase the height of a work c. Increase the value
of a work d. To give support to the work
101. Which of the following options is an example of primary clay?

a. Ball clay b. Fired clay c. Kaolin d. Slip
102. Select from the options an instrument used in measuring temperature in the
kiln
a. Barometer b. Pyrometer c. Speedometer d. Thermometer
ANSWERS
1. C 6. A 11. A 16. B 21. B 101. C
2. D 7. A 12. C 17. C 22. C 102. B
3. B 8. B 13. D 18. C 23. C
4. B 9. C 14. D 19. B 24. D
5. D 10. C 15. B 20. B 25. A
26. A 27. C 28. B 29. B 30. B
31. B 32. D 33. C 34. C 35. A
36. C 37. C 38. A 39. A 40. B
41. C 42. C 43. D 44. A 45. A
46. A 47. D 48. C 49. D 50. A
51. C 52. B 53. D 54. C 55. D
56. A 57. C 58. B 59. A 60. A
61. D 62. B 63. C 64. C 65. C
66. A 67. B 68. C 69. A 70. B
71. A 72. B 73. A 74. A 75. A
76. A 77. B 78. B 79. D 80. B
81. C 82. D 83. A 84. B 85. A
86. D 87. B 88. D 89. D 90. C
91. D 92. D 93. A 94. B 95. D
96. A 97. D 98. B 99. C 100. D
Page 100
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) Explain a three dimensional art
(b) List five (5) production techniques used in making three-dimensional art
2. Briefly describe three (3) tools and materials used in producing three
dimensional art
3. Discuss three (3) production techniques for making three dimensional art
ANSWERS
1. (a) A three dimensional art is an art form that has length, breadth and depth.
Three dimensional arts can be seen from all angles that is why it’s sometimes
referred to as works-in-the-round. Forms in three dimensions are arranged in
a given space so that they have height, length and breadth. Examples of three
dimensional arts include sculpture works, leatherworks, ceramic works,
basketry works etc. Solid materials such as wood, stone, metal, cane, raffia etc
are used in producing works in three dimension.
1. The five production techniques used in making three dimensional arts are:
1. Carving
2. Modeling
3. Casting
4. Embossing
5. Basketry
2. The three tools and materials used in producing three dimensional arts are:
Tools: Materials:
i. Chisel i. Wood
ii. Hammer ii. Stone
iii. Awl iii. Clay
Tools:
(i) Chisel:
This is a sharp metallic cutting tool which has different shapes of the
cutting edge used purposely for carving. There are several varieties of
sizes. They are used in chipping off parts of solid material usually
wood for the form to stand out. It greatly assists in subtractive
processes of building forms.
Page 101
(ii) Hammer:
This is a tool used for driving cutting tools into materials to bring out
variety of shapes and forms.
The edge of the hammer is made of heavy steel. There are a variety of
its shapes and sizes.
(iii)Awl
An awl is a piercing tool with a pointed edge which is usually inserted
into a wooden handle for creating holes in soft and pliable materials.
Materials:
i. Wood
This is a coarse, heavy material obtained from plants and trees
used in the creation at several artefacts in three dimensions. There
are basically two type of wood namely soft wood (wawa, Asanfena
etc) and hardwood (Ebony, Nyamedua, Abako etc)
ii. Stone
This is a dense, non-porous material obtained from the earth used
in making three-dimensional products. The soft types of stone like
the soap stone is used for carving.
iii. Clay
This is a soft, pliable, porous material that is fashioned into three
dimensional forms by modelling. Clay is malleable or soft in its
wet state and become hard (leather hard) when dried.
After firing wares produced from them in a Kiln, it turns into a
buff or brownish colour.
3. The three (3) production techniques for three dimensional arts are:
i. Carving
ii. Modelling
iii. Casting
Page 102
i. Carving-
This is the process of creating three dimensional forms by cutting
or chipping away solid materials in bits to achieve the desired
form. Carving tools such as chisels, gouges etc are used. It is said
to be a subtractive process.
ii. Modelling-
This is the process of creating three dimensional forms by adding
soft and malleable material in bits to build a form in relief or in-
the-round. Modelling is carried out by the use of the hand and
other Modelling tools. It is said to be an additive process.
iii. Casting-
This is a three dimensional method of production that involves the
pouring of liquid substances like cement, clay, bronze, lead and
plaster of Paris into a mould to produce an exact replica of the
design.
PRINT MAKING
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The art of transferring an inked image onto a surface is called

(a) Drawing (b) Printmaking (c) Carving (d) Textiles
2. Which of these is an art reproduction process?

a. Sketching b. Drawing c. Printmaking d. Modelling
3. Which of these is not a printed item

a. Bag b. Books c. Posters d. Stickers
4. Ideas for making prints can best be obtained from

a. Natural objects b. Books c. Clothes d. Symbols
5. All these are cutting tools for printing except
Page 103
a. Knives b. Razor blades c. Chisels d. Awls
6. Making a print directly from one surface onto another is termed as

a. Relief printing b. Frottage printing c. Stencil printing
d. Direct printing
7. Powder colours for making direct prints are mixed with

a. Water b. Starch c. Turpentine d. Kerosene
8. Relief printing is sometimes referred to as

a. Block printing b. Stencil printing c. Frottage printing
d. Direct printing
9. Which areas of a relief block is chipped off?

a. Positive b. Negative c. Inside d. Outside
10. The oldest printing method is

a. Relief printing b. Stencil printing c. Frottage printing
d. Roller printing
11. The printing technique that involves the placing of paper on a textured surface
and rubbing its back is known as
a. Relief printing b. Frottage printing c. Stencil printing
d. Roller printing
12. Which of these textures is not suitable for making frottage prints?
a. Coins b. Tree barks c. Mosquito net c. Flowers
13. Relief blocks are

a. Raised b. Indented c. Engraved d. Etched
14. Which of these tools is not used in making frottage prints?

a. Crayon b. Pencil c. Charcoal d. Oil paint
15. Which areas of a stencil is cut out

a. Positive b. Negative c. Outer d. Inner
Page 104
16. Stencils are cut using all these cutting tools except
a. Blade b. Cutting knife c. Chisels d. Scissors
17. Which of these materials cannot be used in producing stencils?

a. Cardboards b. Plastics sheets c. Clay d. Metal sheets
18. Relief patterns are created on all these except

a. Foodstuffs b. Wood c. Lino d. Paper
19. Rubbing in frottage printing can be done using all these except
a. Chalk Pastel b. Pencil c. Charcoal d. Paint
20. Which of these prints is a form of direct print

a. Stencil prints b. Frottage prints c. Relief print d. Screen prints
21. Which of the following processes is used in removing impurities from fabric
before printing?
a. Mercerization b. Sizing c. Scouring d. Mordanting
22. Frottage is a process in

a. Print making b. Bronze casting c. Basketry d. Pottery
23. The ideal wood for making frames for screen printing is
a. ebony b. Mahogany c. Odum d. Wawa
24. In printing fabrics, dyes are fixed to prevent

a. bleeding b. Blotting c. Creeping d. running
25. The most suitable support for intaglio printing is

a. Wood b. Lino c. Glass d. Metal
26. In silk screen printing, the ink is forced through the mesh by the use of
a. Brayer b. Pliers c. Squeegee d. Roller
27. Fixative is a preservative for drawings done in

a. Chalk b. Ink c. Poster colour d. Watercolour
Page 105
28. Placing paper on a coin surface and rubbing with a pencil is termed
a. Montage b. Frottage c. Marbling d. Dabbing
29. In which branches of art are embossing and burnishing are used as
decorations?
a. Leatherwork and potter b. Leatherwork and picture making
c. Textiles and pottery d. Sculpture and textiles
30. The two main types of dyes are

a. Spirit and water based b. Indanthrene dye and dylon
c. Caustic soda and salt d. Tanning and fast dyes
31. When a ground pigment is added to yolk, the result is

a. Poster colour b. Tempera colour c. Pastel d. Gouache
32. Sugar paper is most suitable for

a. Pastel and charcoal b. Crayon and emulsion c. Mobile and models
d. Bookbinding and painting
33. Negative spaces of the images traced on a silk screen are

a. Painted black b. Left unblocked c. Dabbed with printing paste d. Blocked
with lacquer
34. Which of the following is a monoprint?

a. Frottage b. Lino-cut c. Marbling d. Wood-cut
35. Hard steel is used to sink lines into the plate surface in
a. Embossing b. Engraving c. Etching d. In laying
36. Planography, relief and intaglio are processes associated with

a. Ceramics b. Jewellery c. Printing d. Sculpture
37. A process of making a design on wood or calabash with a hot metal tool is
a. Pantograph b. Pyrograph c. Skiving d. Tooling
38. The open image area for screen printing is called
Page 106
a. Frottage b. Motif c. Stencil d. Template
ANSWERS
1. B 6. B 11. B 16. C 21. C 26. C

2. C 7. B 12. D 17. C 22. A 27. A
3. A 8. A 13. A 18. D 23. D 28. B
4. A 9. B 14. D 19. D 24. A 29. A
5. D 10. A 15. A 20. B 25. D 30. B
31. B 32. A 33. D 34. C 35. B 36. C
37. B 38. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. a. Define printmaking.
b. List five (5) types of printmaking.
2. Describe the relief printing method.
3. a. What is direct printing?
b. Describe the direct printing technique.
4. Write short notes on frottage printing.
5. Write briefly on stencil printing.
ANSWERS
1. a. Printmaking is defined as a means of transferring an inked image from one
surface to another by the use of any of the printing methods. Printmaking is done
in order to learn a process, reproduce a design and as a means of communicating
ideas. Examples of printed items include posters, stickers, labels, banners etc.
b. The types of printing are:

i. Direct Printing
ii. Frottage Printing
iii. Relief Printing
iv. Stencil Printing
v. Screen Printing
2. Block or relief Printing is a printing method that involves making a print from a
raised surface or block. It is also referred to as Relief Printing. It is the oldest
Page 107
printing technique. Relief blocks can be made from wood, lino, foodstuffs etc.
After the design has been drawn on the block, the negative areas of the design are
chipped off for the design to stand out. Printing paste is applied on the block and
used for printing.
Relief/Block Printing Process
Tools and materials: Knives, Chisels, Gouges, Cardboard, Pencil, Eraser,

Printing paste or ink, Foam, Brush, Masking tape, Tracing paper, Wood, Lino,
Foodstuffs (Yam, Cassava, Cocoyam), Fabric.
Procedure
1. Select a theme/topic.
2. Make preliminary sketches
3. Select, improve and transfer the best sketch unto the block: soft wood, foam,
lino, cocoyam, etc.
4. Cut, chip or carve off the negative areas (non-image areas) of the design.
5. Apply printing ink/paste onto the surface of the block.
6. Press or stamp the inked block on the substrate (material) to register the print.
7. Allow the printed work to dry.
NB: The process can be repeated and organized if a repetitive design is needed.
Relief printing sketches
3. (a) Direct Printing is the making of prints by transferring an inked image

directly from one surface onto another. These surfaces include natural and
manmade surfaces like surfaces of sawn wood, corn cob, sponge, sole of canvas
shoes, bottle tops, rope, string, hands, feet, stick etc. In direct printing, images of
objects are directly transferred from one surface onto another. Printing paste is
applied with foam or brush. This is then stamped gently onto the surface to be
printed. It is an easy method of printing which is not costly to do.
Page 108
(b) Tools and materials: paper, starch, poster or powder colour, printing ink or
paste, object/image, brush or foam.
Procedure
1. Collect a variety of materials suitable for making direct prints.
2. Mix powder or poster colour with starch to an even or uniform consistency.
Already made printing paste is also suitable.
3. Cover the surface of the object with the printing paste with the aid of a brush or
foam.
4. Place a sheet of paper on a flat surface or padded printing table.
5. Gently transfer the inked object or image onto the paper to register the print.
6. Gently lift the object from the paper and allow the print to dry.
4. Frottage printing is another type of direct printing is the frottage printing. It

involves the collection of ideas from textured natural or man-made objects, e.g.
tree barks, coins, corrugated cards, etc. Frottage printing is a method of printing
done by placing paper on a textured surface and rubbing the back with media such
as crayon, pencil or charcoal to register the design onto the surface of the paper. It
should however be noted that the drawing tool should not be pointed otherwise it
may create holes in the paper. Examples of textured objects include coins, tree
barks, mosquito mesh, concrete floors, etc.
Frottage Printing Process
Tools and materials: crayons, pencils, charcoal, textured surfaces (coins, tree
barks, etc), and materials like paper, fabric, etc.
Procedure
1. Select a suitable textured surface.
2. Place the paper on top of the textured surface.
3. Hold the paper firmly on the textured surface and gently rub the surface of the
paper evenly with a pencil, crayon or charcoal to register the textured design on
the paper.
Page 109
5. Stencil printing is the process of making prints from stencils made of flat sheets
such as paper, fabric, metal plates, plywood, etc. After the designs or letters have
been drawn on the surface, the positive areas are cut out for the negative areas to
remain. The paint is then applied at the open areas of the stencil to register the
design on the material.
Stencil Printing Process
Tools and materials: Cardboard, Manila board, Cutting Knife/Razor blade,

Printing paste or ink, Masking tape, Drawing Pins, Foam, Brush.
Procedure
1. Draw or trace the design on the cardboard or Manila board with enough spaces
surrounding it to serve as reservoirs (area for printing ink or paste).
2. Accurately cut out the positive areas (image areas) of the paper with a sharp
cutting tool.
3. Position the stencil at designated area on the material.
4. Firmly hold the ends of the stencil with the aid of masking tape or drawing
pins.
5. Apply the printing paste or ink with the foam and gently dab the cut out areas
of the stencil.
6. Gently remove the stencil to register the print.
7. Allow the print to dry.
Stencil printing sketches
Page 110
AFRICAN ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Most African art works served
(a) Religious purpose (b) Secular purpose (c) Social purpose
(d) Agricultural purpose
2. The top of the hierarchy of beliefs in Africa is

(a) Belief in ancestors (b) Belief in God (c) Belief in spirits
(d) Belief in animism
3. The Akans of Ghana represent their ancestors with

(a) Special drums (b) Blackened stool (c) Carved stool
(d) Special costumes
4. Shango is represented by
(a) Adinkra symbol (b) Thunderbolt symbol (c) Chiwara symbol
(d) Antelope symbol
5. The Yorubas call mother earth

(a) Asaase Yaa (b) Odudua (c) Shango (d) Chiwara
6. Chiwara of the Bambara of Mali is a
(a) god of thunder (b) god of agriculture (c) god of rain (d) god of fire
7. The antelope mask is used to remember the spirit of

(a) Shango (b) Asaase Yaa (c) Chiwara (d) Odudua
8. The belief that God has given special power to some plants and animals is
called
(a) Belief in spirit (b) Belief in animism (c) Belief in God
(d) Belief in ancestors
9. Fertility powers are represented by which animal?

(a) Snakes (b) Owls (c) Elephants (d) Crow
Page 111
10. Rituals and ceremonies marking the movement from one stage of life to
another is called
(a) Passage of life (b) Rights of passage (c) Rites of passage
(d) Ritual ceremonies
11. Talismans and amulets are worn to protect oneself from

(a) gods (b) evil spirits (c) good spirits (d) ancestors
12. The life cycle starts from
(a) Death (b) puberty (c) marriage (d) birth
13. The movement from adolescence to adulthood is known as

(a) Puberty (b) Marriage (c) Death (d) Birth
14. Which ceremony is used in commemorating the birth of a child?

(a) Dipo rites (b) Outdooring (c) Funeral (d) Wedding
15. In Africa, a newly born child is named on which day?

(a) Fifth day (b) Sixth day (c) Seventh day (d) Eight day
16. Things concerning home management are taught at what stage of the rites of
passage?
(a) Puberty (b) Birth (c) Marriage (d) Death
17. The legal union of a man and a woman is said to be

(a) Marriage (b) Birth (c) Puberty (d) Death
18. The inevitable end of man is called

(a) Birth (b) Puberty (c) Marriage (d) Death
19. Art is considered to be an integral part of

(a) Fashion (b) Life (c) Adulthood (d) Society
20. The branch of art that can be seen and felt with the sense of touch is called
(a) Visual (b) Performing (c) Verbal (d) Painting
21. All these are indigenous visual art forms except
Page 112
(a) Sculpture (b) Painting (c) Drama (d) Textiles

22. Works in sculpture done in Africa is mainly in
(a) Metal (b) Stone (c) Wood (d) Glass
23. Production techniques in sculpture include all except

(a) Carving (b) Weaving (c) Casting (d) Modelling
24. Textiles production techniques include all these except

(a) Printing (b) Dyeing (c) Appliqué (d) Casting
25. One popular indigenous textiles is

(a) Kente (b) Batik (c) Tie-dye (d) Cloak
26. Beads are worn to serve all these purposes except

(a) Aesthetic purpose (b) Medicinal purpose (c) Spiritual purpose
(d) Womanly purpose
27. Palm rachis, cane and grass are used in making items in
(a) Leatherwork (b) Basketry (c) Beadwork (d) Pottery
28. The outer covering of large animals is called

(a) Kip (b) Skin (c) Hide (d) Pelt
29. Examples of body art forms include all these except

(a) Body painting (b) Coiffure (c) Body marks (d) Body trials
30. Which of these is not an indigenous African musical instrument?

(a) Marrakech (b) Rattle (c) Drums (d) Guitar
31. Which of these parts of Africa does not form part of African Arts?
(a) Central (b) Eastern (c) Southern (d) Northern
32. Most art forms in Africa serve

(a) Aesthetic purposes (b) Religious purposes (c) Secular purpose
(d) Spiritual purposes
Page 113
33. In the spiritual environment, the African believes he is at the

(a) Top (b) Centre (c) Bottom (d) Side
34. The top of the hierarchy of beliefs in Africa is

(a) Belief in ancestors (b) Belief in animism (c) Belief in God
(d) Belief in spirits
35. Which of these deities is associated with the sky?

(a) God (b) Ancestors (c) Spirits (d) Dwarfs
36. Most African worship God through

(a) Lesser gods (b) Spirits (c) Dwarfs (d) Magic and sorcery
37. The Akans of Ghana represent their ancestors through

(a) Special drums (b) Special songs (c) Blackened stools
(d) Asantehene
38. Which of these is not a qualification of being an ancestor?

(a) Martyrs death (b) Good character (c) Died a natural death
(d) Died through accidents
39. All these are spirits except

(a) Shango (b) Kanaya (c) Chiwara (d) Odudua
40. The belief that God has given special powers to some animate and inanimate
objects is referred to as
(a) Sorcery (b) Witchcraft (c) Animism (d) Spiritism
41. Which of these animals is associated with fertility?

(a) Crow (b) Snake (c) Owl (d) Crocodile
42. Practices based on magic but used for vile things are said to be
(a) Spiritism (b) Sorcery (c) Animism (d) Occultism
43. The African protects himself from malevolent spirits by

(a) Wearing talisman (b) Wearing special rings (c) Wearing Batakari
Page 114
(d) Wearing beads
44. Ceremonies that marks the movement from one stage of life to another is
known as
(a) Stages of life (b) Rites of passage (c) Rites of life (d) Stages of passage
45. The first stage in life is

(a) Birth (b) Spirit (c) Child (d) Puberty
46. The inevitable end of man is said to be

(a) Old age (b) Death (c) Marriage (d) Puberty
47. The life cycle ceases at

(a) Birth (b) Marriage (c) Puberty (d) Death
48. Outdooring ceremony is performed at which stage of life?

(a) Birth (b) Puberty (c) Marriage (d) Death
49. A newly born child qualifies to be a full member of the community after
(a) Six days (b) Seven days (c) Eight days (d) Ten days
50. The naming ceremony is performed by a member of the

(a) Maternal family (b) Paternal family (c) Close friend’s family
(d) Close neighbour’s family
51. The next stage after birth is

(a) Marriage (b) Puberty (c) Adolescence (d) Death
52. Which of these is not a concept of art in indigenous African society?

(a) Art and craft are the same (b) There is no special word for Art
(c) Art form is an integral part of life (d) All art forms can be done by both
sexes
53. The rites that introduces adolescents into adulthood is known as

(a) Marriage rites (b) Birth rites (c) Puberty rites (d) Death rites
Page 115
54. One of these is a taboo regarding the arts in indigenous Africa is

(a) Females are not supposed to spin yarns (b) Pregnant women should not
make pottery wares. (c) A blacksmith is not supposed to strike a person
with his bare hands (d) Weaving is exclusively for men
55. The chiwara mask of the Bambaras is shaped like which animal?
(a) Horse (b) Antelope (c) Lion (d) Snake
56. Which of these is a taboo related to weaving?

(a) Old looms should not be broken (b) Weavers should not stand while
weaving (c) The shuttle should not be thrown from right to left
(d) Spinning should not be done by men
57. Media for the production of African works are revered because
(a) They are costly (b) They are believed to come from the ancestors
(c) They are believed to contain spirits (d) They are given by God
58. All the following form part of the instruction given to initiates during puberty
rites except
(a) Customs of the people (b) Law and justice (c) Parental counselling
(d) Fighting skills
59. Shango of the Yurobas in Nigeria is a

(a) god of rain (b) god of thunder (c) god of agriculture (d) god of fertility
60. Mother Earth of the Akans of Ghana is a

(a) goddess of rain (b) goddess of fertility (c) goddess of agriculture
(d) goddess of lighting
61. The Nok terra cotta was named after the

(a) culture of the people at the time (b) ruler of the town at the time of the
first find (c) man who found the first piece (d) town where the first piece was
found
62. Which of the following ethnic groups is noted for terra cotta sculptures?
(a) Asante (b) Dogon (c) Mende (d) Nok
Page 116
63. The Chiwara mask symbolises

(a) royalty (b) strength (c) peace (d) fertility
64. One major effect of Christianity on West African art was that
(a) the artists were alienated from their own arts (b) the production of art
forms became regimented (c) artists produced more artworks (d) sculptors
carved forms that represented Christian themes
65. The African woodcarver emphasizes the breasts and buttocks because
(a) they enhance the beauty of the carved figure (b) the buttocks and breasts
symbolise fertility (c) the carver has skills in depicting them (d) men in Africa
are fascinated to see these forms
66. Which method was used to produce the Ashanti gold weights?
(a) Glazing (b) Moulding (c) Carving (d) Cire-perdue
67. Africans celebrate festivals and ceremonies mainly to

(a) exhibit material culture (b) venerate ancestors (c) count their natives
(d) meet partners for marriage
68. African art forms are described as functional because

(a) they are used for various purposes (b) society loves to see them
(c) everybody can produce them (d) society respects the carver
69. Rites of passage marks the transition through

(a) adulthood, adolescence and old age (b) birth, marriage and death
(c) ancestorship, chieftaincy and kingship (d) infancy, motherhood and
parenthood
70. In the practice of animism, snakes, crocodiles, frogs and birds are linked with
(a) abundance (b) fertility (c) growth (d) twins
71. In indigenous art, there is no distinction between

(a) verbal and visual art (b) art and craft (c) fine and commercial art
(d) painting and sculpture
Page 117
72. Linen and jute are classified as

a. Protein fibre b. Animal fibre c. Synthetic fibre d. Vegetable fibre
73. African traditional art was made mainly for

a. Religious purposes b. Commercial purposes c. Aesthetic purposes
d. Recreational reasons
74. Which of the following are the earliest forms of art?

a. Engraving, paintings and sculpture b. Painting, ceramics and engravings
c. Sculpture, textiles and etching d. Beadmaking, basketry and ceramics
75. Akuaba is to fertility as Ibeji is to

a. Ancestral veneration b. Agricultural rites c. Dead twin d. Water spirit
76. Which of the following countries produced soapstone sculptures?

a. Cote d’Ivoire b. Sierra Leone c. Ghana d. Guinea
77. Which of the following ethnic groups produced the nomoli?

a. Baule b. Dogon c. Mende d. Senufu
78. Which of the following expresses personal emotions and thoughts?

a. Appellation b. Dirge c. Lyric d. Praise-name
79. In traditional belief, ancestors are called for help through

a. Libation, drumming and offering b. Offering, purification and abstinence
c. Prayer, lamentation and fasting d. Pacification, ablution and cleansing
80. Benin court art usually takes the form of

a. Painting b. Pottery c. Sculpture d. Textiles
81. The major characteristic of African carving is

a. Abstraction b. Movement c. Naturalism d. Realism
82. Bead making is one of the major works of the

a. Akwapims b. Krobos c. Shais d. Fantes
Page 118
83. The presentation of a stool to a woman during marriage is a practice in

connection with
a. Ancestor veneration b. Rites of passage c. Belief in spirits d. Belief in
animism
84. Identify the female secret society that uses the Bundu mask.
a. Epa b. Gelede c. Poro d. Yaasi
85. Which secret society uses the Chiwara in its agricultural ceremonies?
a. Flankuru b. Poro c. Sande d. Yaase
86. Nok culture is noted to have produced several

a. Bronze heads b. Stone masks c. Terra cottas heads d. Wooden masks
87. Ife art flourished in about

a. 900B.C.-200A.D. b. 1000AD-1400AD c. 1500AD-1900AD
d. The twentieth century
88. Ife in Nigeria is noted for

a. Wood carving b. Bronze heads c. Leatherworks d. Cultural dances
89. The term animism denotes

a. Extraction of dyes from animal and plant sources b. Shrines with carvings of
plants and animals c. Sympathetic magic d. Spiritual powers in plants
90. Bronze plaques of Benin in Nigeria were made by

a. Plaiting b. Forging c. Smelting d. Casting
91. The indigenous African arts started from the

a. 14the century b. Birth of Christ c. Prehistoric times d. 20th century
92. Fabrics decorated with appliqué patterns originated from

a. The Republic of Benin b. La Cote d’voire c. The Republic of Congo
d. The Republic of Togo
93. The palace art of Benin Empire was mostly made of
Page 119
a. wood and clay b. Gold and ivory c. Brass and silver d. Bronze and clay
94. Traditional craft of Mende women is mainly

a. Cloth weaving b. Basketry c. Beadmaking d. Pottery
95. Portraiture is the study of

a. Torso b. Head and shoulder c. Plants only d. Animal only
96. Masks and figures of African tribesmen were not displayed in public
throughout the years because
a. People were not interested in seeing them b. They were made for specific
occasions and ceremonies only c. They did not want the white men to take
pictures of them d. They feared thieve would steal them
97. One reason to prove that African art is diversified is that

a. African ideas are limited b. They do independent work c. Many people
practice art d. There is variety of art forms
98. The Nigerian artist known for wood carving is

a. Chinua Achibe b. Josy Ajiboye c. Lamidi Fakaye d. Wole Soyinka
99. Animism is the belief that inanimate objects have

a. beauty b. Children c. Gold d. Life
100. Most traditional arts were based on

a. Aesthetics b. Beliefs c. Festivals d. Initiation
101. The circular pillar in the middle of the traditional stool represents
a. Female embrace b. Male children c. Presence of God d. Support of the earth
102. Many clans and families practice face-marking as a means of

a. Identification b. Keeping their custom c. Representing ancestors d. Spiritual
upliftment
103. Chiwara mask is supposed to be an image of a/an

a. Antelope b. Donkey c. Leopard d. Lion
Page 120
104. Traditional symbols are important because they

a. Are easily carved b. Attract foreigners c. Communicate ideas d. Sell at
high prices
ANSWERS
1. A 11. B 21. C 31. D 41. B 51. B 61. A 71. B
2. B 12. D 22. C 32. B 42. B 52. D 62. D 72. D
3. B 13. A 23. B 33. B 43. A 53. C 63. D 73. A
4. B 14. B 24. D 34. C 44. B 54. C 64. A 74. A
5. B 15. C 25. A 35. A 45. A 55. B 65. B 75. C
6. B 16. B 26. D 36. A 46. B 56. A 66. D 76. B
7. C 17. A 27. B 37. C 47. D 57. C 67. B 77. C
8. B 18. D 28. C 38. D 48. A 58. C 68. A 78. C
9. A 19. B 29. D 39. B 49. B 59. B 69. B 79. A
10. C 20. A 30. D 40. C 50. B 60. B 70. B 80. A
81. A 82. B 83. B 84. D 85. A 86. C 87. B 88. B
89. D 90. D 91. C 92. A 93. D 94. A 95. B 96. B
97. D 98. C 99. D 100. B 101. C 102. A 103. A 104. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Write Short notes on these religious beliefs in Africa:

i) Belief in God
ii) Belief in Ancestors
iii) Belief in spirits
iv) Belief in Animism
v) Belief in sorcery and witchcraft
2. (a) Define the rites of passage.
(b) Describe the rites that are performed at the various stages of life.
3. Identify and explain the four major stages of rites of passage.
4. Write short notes on five (5) concepts of art in indigenous African society.
5. (a) List ten (10) indigenous African visual art forms.
(b) Describe five (5) of the above listed indigenous African visual art forms.
6. Explain five (5) characteristics of indigenous African art.
Page 121
7. a. What is ancestral veneration?

b. Why are the ancestors venerated?
c. In what FIVE ways are ancestors venerated?
8. a. What is body art?
b. Discuss the indigenous body arts of Ghana under the following headings:
i. Tools and materials
ii. Method of production
iii. Uses or functions
9. Discuss the differences and similarities that characterise indigenous West
Africa sculptures.
10. Discuss the impact of formal education on the indigenous arts of Ghana.
11. Discuss the major functions of the following artefacts in the traditional
African set up:
i. Stools
ii. Swords
iii. Emblems
iv. Beads
ANSWERS
1. i) Belief in God:
God, the Supreme Being is believed to be at the top of the hierarchy. He is
viewed as the creator and giver of life. He is believed to be omnipotent,
omniscient and omnipresent. God is associated with the sky and the Asantes
of Ghana thinks he is everywhere. He is worshipped indirectly through lesser
gods and ancestors by most Africans. Owing to this, few shrines are built for
him in parts of Ghana (Asantes), Dogon (Mali) and Kikuyu (Kenya).
ii) Belief in ancestors:

An ancestor is someone who died and led an exemplary life. They are
normally kings, queen mothers, elders, etc. They did not die accidentally
through suicide or dishonourable diseases like epilepsy, leprosy and madness.
Deaths through war were a valid qualification for one to be an ancestor.
Africans believe that these ancestors watch over the affairs of members in the
society. Ancestors are represented in human forms by the Baluba in DR.
Congo, the Baule in Ivory Coast and the Malinke in Sierra Leone. The Akans
of Ghana represent them with blackened stool. Festivals and ceremonies are
Page 122
held in honour of the ancestors to thank, praise and to petition them for their
help in solving societal problems. Special costumes and dances are used in
invoking the spirits of the ancestors.
iii) Belief in Spirits:

It is believed in Africa that God has given special powers to spirits or lesser
gods. Some of these spirits were once human beings but were helped to
become spirits through other spirits.
The spirits are viewed as sons or ministers of God, each having his assigned
duty. Some control the rain, river, fertility, lightening, fire, agriculture, etc.
The Yorubas in Nigeria call on Shango, the god of thunder and lightning for
rain, while the Bambaras of Mali invoke the spirit of Chiwara to assist them in
their agricultural activities.
iv) Belief in Animism:

Animism is the belief that God has given special powers to some plants, animals
and objects for man to tap them for his survival. Rituals, rites and ceremonies are
observed before power in them can be tapped. Concoctions prepared from plants
such as Nyamedua, Onyina, Baobab, etc are used in curing several ailments. Also,
animals like snakes, crocodiles, birds, also possess special powers in curing
barrenness, sicknesses, etc. Images of these animals are made into necklaces,
bracelets, rings etc. and worn on the body.
v) Belief in Sorcery and Witchcraft:

Africans believe that there are witches and sorcerers who can cause evil and
destroy. Witchcraft powers are believed to be passed on from one person to the
other through inheritance or gifts. People seek protection from these evil practices
by wearing talismans and amulets.
2. (a) The rites of passage refer to the various significant rites, rituals and
ceremonies used in marking the transition from one stage of life to another.
These stages are Birth, Puberty, Marriage and Death.
Page 123
(b) i) Birth:
This is the first stage of the life cycle. It is believed in Africa that a newly born
child remains bound to the spiritual world. It is after the seventh day that this link
with the spiritual world is broken. To mark this stage, naming and outdooring
ceremonies are held. The Asantes calls the ceremony ‘Abadinto’, while the Gas
call it ‘Kpodziemor’. The newly born child receives his first moral training which
is about truthfulness. He is told to distinguish between water and wine. Several
artefacts such as clothes, Pots, music, dance, etc are used to grace the occasion.
ii) Puberty:
This is the second stage of the life cycle. The period marks the transition from
adolescence to adulthood. Puberty rites are held for the youth to give them the
training that will well equip them to play their roles as members of the
community. The Asantes call this rites ‘Bragoro’ while the Krobos in the Eastern
region of Ghana call it the ‘Dipo’ rites. During the rites, the young women are
taught home management skills, personal hygiene, how to relate to their future
husbands and other essential things that will make her play the role of a wife
effectively. The young men are also taught the customs and norms of the land,
law and justice, fighting skills etc. They are also taught several art production
techniques such as sculpture, pottery, painting etc. Several art forms like body arts
(beads, jewels, body painting, tattooing), performing arts etc are used.
iii) Marriage:
This is the third stage of the life cycle. It is the legal union between a man and a
woman with the consent and approval of both families. Marriage is seen to be the
very essence of one’s existence. After each family is satisfied with the careful
investigations into each other’s family history, the marriage rites are performed.
Various artefacts such as clothes, beads, music, dance, drama, drumming etc are
used. Gifts are offered to the couple by friends and relatives.
iv) Death:
This is the last stage of the life cycle. It is said to be the inevitable end of man.
It is not seen as the end of the life cycle but rather, as a journey to the spiritual
world. The deceased is adequately prepared for the journey. Several artefacts like
bowls, cups, mats, handkerchiefs and virtually everything he will need in his
Page 124
journey is placed in his casket. The funeral ceremony is marked with sorrowful
songs, dirges, appellations, music, dance, libation, etc to bid farewell to the
departed soul.
3. The five (5) concepts of art in indigenous Africa are:

i) African works of art are produced for a particular purpose. Some
works of art are used for certain rites or rituals, and these are destroyed
or discarded after the observance of the ceremony.
ii) Taboos in connection to the art activities in Africa are strictly observed
by artists. Some of these taboos are (a) A weaver is not supposed to
break an old loom which when breached would incur bad luck. (b) A
blacksmith is not supposed to strike with his bare hands which when
not observed, would make the gods angry.
iii) Tools and materials used in the art productions are believed by
Africans to be charged with spirits. Therefore, before they are used,
these spirits have to be petitioned through purification rites to avoid
being hurt.
iv) Art forms in Africa are considered to be a necessity and an integral
part of everyday life. Art looms high in any activity an African
engages in.
v) The arts in Africa are not the privilege of a few selected people in the
society but rather for the whole community. Artists are feared and
highly respected because they are believed to be closer to the gods and
ancestors.
4. (a) The ten (10) indigenous African visual art forms include:
(1) Textiles (6) Basketry
(2) Painting (7) Leatherwork
(3) Pottery (8) Architecture
(4) Sculpture (9) Goldsmithing
(5) Bead work (10) Body Art
(b) (i) Sculpture: Works in sculpture in Africa are mostly done in wood and
also other materials like stone, ivory, bone and metal. Examples of sculptural
works include stools, masks, drums, human and animal forms, jewelleries, etc.
These are mainly used in religious activities and also secular purposes.
Page 125
ii) Painting: Symbols of gods and deities worshipped are painted on the
walls of shrines and temples. Masks, statues and drums of deities are also painted
to depict the traits of the god or goddess.
iii) Pottery: Pottery wares were made by the indigenous Africans for the
purposes of storage, cooking, worship, etc. These wares were fired openly using
firewood. Examples include cooking pots, ritual pots, storage, pots, etc.
iv) Basketry: The art of making containers by the use of materials such as
grass, palm rachis, canes, etc. The materials are split into units and woven into
interesting patterns for carrying and storing items.
v) Body Arts: This involves body painting, body marks and coiffure. These
paintings, marks and special hair styles help in knowing one’s identity, social
status, age, sex, etc. Others are for medicinal purposes, decorative purposes,
religious purposes, etc.
5. The five characteristics of indigenous African art include:

i) Functionality of the art form
ii) Symbolic importance of the work
iii) The artworks are related to everyday life
iv) The artworks are common to all members of the society
v) The artworks served educational purposes.
i) Functionality of the art form:

Art forms in Africa served either one purpose or several purposes. Works were to
serve either a religious, social or secular need.
ii) Symbolic importance of the work:

Most of the visual tools like shapes, colours, ideas, etc. had their symbolic
relevance and meanings.
White, for example, symbolises purity, happiness, etc while oval shape
symbolises softness and female tenderness.
Page 126
iii) The artworks are related to everyday life:

Artworks form an integral part of everyday life. Domestic duties, religious and
secular duties were performed by the use of an artwork.
iv) The artworks are common to all members of the society:

All members of the community shared the artworks. They all understood the
concepts and beliefs behind the creation of the arts. The arts belonged to everyone
in the society.
v) The artworks served educational purposes:

Artworks were used as instructive tools. Artefacts like masks, stools, music,
dance, etc were used in teaching the youth the norms and values in the society
during initiation rites. Artworks teach us about our cultural heritage.
6. a. Ancestral veneration is the value, honour and great respect that are enjoyed
by the ancestors because they are known to have played vital roles in the social
life of a group or race.
b. Ancestors are venerated because they are considered to be most powerful due
to the fact that Africans believe that God has given them powers to be used in
various ways such as doing good (benevolence) or causing evil (malevolent).
c. The FIVE ways through which the ancestors are venerated include:
1. Prayers are said requesting them to take care of the society and her needs.
2. Libations are poured during which their brave deeds are recounted.
3. Incantations are chanted.
4. They are symbolically represented in various societies by creating art forms to
serve as abodes for them. A typical example is the blackened stools of the Akans.
5. Festivals provide occasion to serve them through the arts during which their
deeds are recounted and their protection is solicited.
6. In the rites of passage, the good deeds of the ancestors are recounted asking
them for peace, continuity of race and prosperity.
7. Foods and drinks are provided and they are requested to partake in them.
8. They are symbolically represented through the use of art forms like masks,
stools, pottery etc.
Page 127
7. a. Body arts are the arts done on the body either in the form of body painting,
body marks or coiffure. In indigenous Ghana, body arts played various roles in the
indigenous society. They were made to serve aesthetic, medicinal, political,
identification, spiritual, symbolic, entertainment and religious purposes.
b. Discuss the indigenous body arts of Ghana under the following headings:
i. Tools and materials:

There are various tools and materials that are used for the making of the arts on the
body. Some of the tools and materials used include razor blades, knives, needles,
pins, brush, fingers, earth colours and minerals, plants and herbs, eggs, blood and
other animal products.
a. Knives and razor blades:

These sharp tools are used for the cutting and creation of tribal marks.
b. Needles and pins:

These are piercing tools that are used for piercing, perforating and making various
forms of scarification.
c. Brush and fingers:

They are used for applying paints and earth pigments on the body.
d. Earth pigments and colours:

The various soils are mixed with water and other binders. They are then applied with
brush or the hands at appropriate portions of the body for various purposes.
e. Plant and herbs:

The leaves, roots and stems of some special plants believed to possess special healing
powers are used in preparing concoctions which are taken for medicinal purposes.
Others are used for producing costumes and cosmetics.
ii. Method of production:

There are various methods of producing the various forms of body arts. These
include body painting, body marks, coiffure, shaping of the head, and perforation
Page 128
of the ears, nose and eye brow, incision of the teeth, scarification and the
manipulation of the lips.
iii. Uses or functions:

For instance, body paintings in the form of tattooing are done on special parts of
the body for beautification purposes. For the women, the tattoos may appear on
the neck, shoulders, breast, navel etc to depict their feminine beauty. In
indigenous Ghana, a woman who has safely delivered a baby paints herself with
white kaolin to signify her relief or success from child birth. During festivals,
people paint their bodies in the symbols of the deities, ancestors and gods whom
they are honoring. Some are for spiritual protection against evil people who will
attend the function. Among the Gas and the Fantes, the bodies of twins are
painted with clay during outdooring ceremonies to signal their fortune.
Indigenous Ghanaian priests paint special parts of their bodies such as their left
eye, ankles and wrists and dance in a circle created with white kaolin for spiritual
protection. The corpse of dead bodies of individuals who committed suicide in
indigenous Ghana were painted with grey or ash to disfigure their bodies for the
disgraceful act. Body painting also served medicinal purposes in Indigenous
Ghana. For example, a child who develops a swelling on the cheeks called
Gyemerekutu among the Akans is cured through painting the cheeks with created
dots from a mixture of red earth pigment (Ntwuma), ash from the burnt firewood
and black from the soot of cooking pots.
Also, some hairstyles or coiffure were made to enhance the personal appearance
of people. Examples of indigenous Ghanaian hairstyles include Densinkran,
Ntekua, Nteekuma, dedah, Mesa etc. It serves identification purposes such as
indicating one’s sex, social status, level in the rites of passage or ethnic society.
For example, high ranking women in indigenous Asante communities braided
their hair in the Densinkran (a low hair cut in a round or calabash shape dyed in
black) to indicate their social status. It was reserved for queen mothers, and other
important women and girls in the King’s house. The Afro hairstyle was for the
young and enterprising young men in the community. Successful business men,
teachers and dignitaries also braided their hair in the Afro style.
Body marks in the form of cicatrixes, scarification or mutilation had various

functions in indigenous Ghanaian communities. For instance, special mutilated
marks usually called the Donkor marks are deliberately created on the bodies of
‘born to die’ babies in the indigenous Ghanaian communities to prevent them
from going back to the spiritual world.
Page 129
Among the Northerners of indigenous Ghana, these marks help in identifying

one’s ethnic society as being a Frafra, Dagomba etc. The Dagabas of Northern
Ghana make disc-like marks on the bodies of puberty girls as a signal to show that
they are ready for marriage. The Gonjas also create mutilated marks of their
protective deity called Nzami below the eye or on the cheek bone of the fourth
child of a mother who has consistently lost her first three children for spiritual
protection.
The shaping of the head is done among the Manghetu tribe of Dr. Congo. The
head will be elongated right from the day the child is born. Due to the fact that the
cranium of the head of the baby is soft, it is manipulated to suit the shape each of
the diverse ethnic societies in Africa believes to be beautiful. Among the Asantes
of Ghana, the head must assume a round shape.
Among the Lobi tribe in Northern Ghana, they deliberately insert calabash disc in
the mouth just to elongate the lower lips which is considered to be aesthetically
pleasing among their culture. Sometimes the ears, nose and eye brows are
perforated and inserted with decorative earrings as a form of enhancing their
appearances. The Kikuyu women in Kenya load their ears with heavy copper
earrings just to make their ears big and long since they consider it as a form of
beauty.
Other functions or uses of body art include political purposes ( supporters of

political parties showing their political affiliations by painting their bodies in their
party colours), entertainment purposes etc.
9. There are various ethnic societies in West Africa. This section of the African
continent is sometimes referred to as the sub-Saharan Africa. Some of the ethnic
societies in this region of Africa include the Asantes (Ghana), Bambara and
Dogons (Mali), Mende (Sierra Leone), Yoruba, Nok and Ife (Nigeria), Baule
(Central part of Ivory Coast), and Baluba (D.R. Congo). Indigenous West African
sculptures bear some characteristics. Some of these characteristics are similar to
the various ethnic societies whilst other are different and are peculiar to a
particular ethnic society.
SIMILARITIES
The similarities of the sculptures from the various ethnic societies in West Africa
are largely seen in the philosophies behind the creation of the artworks, types of
Page 130
sculptures produced, functions of the sculptures, tools and materials used for the
production, production techniques or methods, surface treatment and form
presentations.
i. Philosophy:
The philosophies, ideas and concepts behind the production of the sculptures in
West Africa are centred on the beliefs, taboos, norms and values of the people.
The common belief systems include belief in God, belief in Ancestors, belief in
Animism, and belief in spirits.
ii. Types of sculpture produced:
The various ethnic societies in the West African region produce ancestral
sculptural figures, fertility figures and masks.
iii. Functions of the sculptures:
Most of the masks and sculptural figures produced in West Africa served religious
and symbolic purposes such as for the veneration of the ancestors, seeking
protection from the benevolent spirits while fighting against the malevolent
spirits. Some of the sculptural figures were to aid the worship of the supreme
deity. Others were to charge barren women and men with fertility powers whilst
others were for medicinal and healing purposes.
Sculptural figures like bowls, pots, ladles, stools, spoons etc. were to serve
utilitarian purposes such as cleaning, storing items, cooking, seating, drinking etc.
Some like relief carvings, three-dimensional sculptural forms are also used for
decorative purposes playing aesthetic roles such as enhancing the general outlook
of the interiors and exteriors of homes, offices, temples etc.
iv. Tools and materials:
All ethnic societies in West Africa use polished tools for the production of their
sculptural figures. These tools include adze, chisels, gouges, knives, cutlass etc.
The materials used for sculpture in West Africa include wood, stone, metal and
clay (terracotta).
v. Surface treatment:
Page 131
The surfaces of most sculptures in West Africa are mostly decorated with tribal
markings in the form of scarification, cicatrices, piercings etc. These markings are
believed to invigorate the sculptural pieces with spiritual powers.
vi. Form presentation:
The form presentation of the sculptural forms ranges from abstract or non-
representational, realistic or naturalistic, semi-abstraction or realistic.
DIFFERENCES
The differences in the sculptural figures of the West Africans are seen in the areas
of appearance or finishing, production techniques, and subject matter.
Finishing:
The works of the Mendes and Baules are well polished and shows a high glossy
nature while others like the Nok sculptures were left unglazed or unpolished. The
famous Akuaba doll of the Asantes though are polished, do not receive a high
gloss finish.
Production techniques:
The Nok of Nigeria engaged in modelling of their sculptural figures in clay while
firing them openly using the traditional firing method. The Asantes, Mendes,
Baluba and Bambaras engaged in the carving of their sculptural figures. They
were finished by sanding. The Baule of central part of Ivory Coast, Asantes of
Ghana and the Ife of Nigeria engaged in casting mostly the cire perdue/ Open-
hearth method.
Subject matter:
The subject matter of most of the sculptural works in West Africa differs greatly
from one ethnic society to another. Some were based on animal themes, human
themes etc. The Nok for instance produced animal figures as fertility figures
because of their belief in Animism and their practice of snake cult. Other
Page 132
sculptural figures took the form of human beings with realistic, abstract and semi-
realistic renditions. Signs and symbols are also fashioned into sculptural figures.
10. Formal education, sometimes referred to as Western education has impacted

greatly on the indigenous arts of Ghana in several ways and areas. These areas
include the philosophy for artistic productions, media for production, art forms,
techniques, mode of acquisition of knowledge and skills and functions of the
indigenous arts.
Philosophy:
The indigenous arts of Ghana were driven by beliefs, norms and values in the
society. However, due to the influence of formal education indigenous arts are
now driven or motivated by aesthetic or utilitarian need.
Media:
Local tools and materials such as raffia, cane, wood, rattan etc. were formerly
used for the production of indigenous arts. However, with the influx of formal
education, foreign based tools and materials are used alongside the local materials
for the production of artworks. These foreign tools and materials include acrylic
paints, plaster of paris, glass, oil paint, water colour, plastics, gouache etc.
Art forms:
The art forms produced in indigenous arts include basketry, pottery, leatherwork,
calabash work, textiles etc. Due to the impact of formal education, there has been
an addition of other art forms such as graphic design, picture making, ceramics,
and photography.
Techniques:
The indigenous techniques of production included carving, modelling, casting,

dyeing, weaving and painting. There has been an addition such as throwing
because of the potter’s wheel, assemblage etc. owing to the impact of formal
education.
Mode of acquisition of knowledge and skills:
Page 133
The acquisition of skills and knowledge in the indigenous arts was through
apprenticeship where masters taught the trainees and no certificates were awarded
to the trainees after completion of training. This is however different with the
impact of formal education. Formal training in schools and training institutions
are offered to learners to acquire the skills of the arts and certificates of merit are
awarded on completion of the programme of study. Formal theories are taught
learners unlike the list of taboos and oral instruction given in the impartation of
indigenous training in the arts.
Functions:
The function of indigenous art was mainly religious or symbolic though some
played utilitarian and aesthetic roles. The functions of indigenous arts have
heightened and are more geared to aesthetic and utilitarian functions as against the
purely religious or spiritual purposes.
11. The major functions of the artifacts in the traditional African set up are as
follows:
i. Stools:
The stool plays a vibrant role in the traditional African society. It is the central
symbol of Akan politics. It is believed to be the repository of all ancient traditions
and the spirits of the ancestors. It is believed to symbolize the soul of the society.
It serves as a symbolic link between the common people in the society and their
leader who may be a king or chief. It denotes the office of a chief or king. The
Golden stool among the Asantes of Ghana is said to contain the spirit of the
Asante nation. It is used as a symbol of unification of many Akan people under
the Asante kingdom. Female stools in small sizes are sat on by initiate girls who
are to be ushered into adulthood among the Asantes popularly referred to as
‘Bragoro’ to receive various instructions regarding the intiation rites.
Aside the symbolic and spiritual functions of stools, it also plays utilitarian roles
in the domestic setting of the African. They are sat on to perform various chores
such as cooking, washing, etc. They are also offered as seats to visitors to sit on.
ii. Swords:
Page 134
There are various forms of swords in the traditional African set up. They play
diverse roles. The popular sword that plays a symbolic role and is of greater
importance to the African is the ceremonial sword.
Ceremonial swords are specially carved or casted swords used for royal
ceremonies. They are usually arranged in a semi-circular or horse-shoe formation
before him. They serve various functions in the society. They signify the social
standing of the clan, group or state in terms of strength, wealth and attitude. The
ceremonial sword is an important symbol of statecraft. It has spiritual and
political associations. They are used for ritual and festive events. It identifies
kings and chiefs and distinct them from the other members of the society during
state functions. They are used for swearing oaths during enstoolment. It is often
presented to a retiring great warrior in the Ghanaian community to serve as
recognition of his bravery, devotion and courage, thereby qualifying him as a
warrior chief. The ceremonial sword also symbolise the safe passage during
purification rites of chiefs and ancestral state stools and for display. In
contemporary Ghana, the ceremonial swords are also used as symbols of
ambassadorial rank.
The other forms of swords are used as implements of war and in attending to
farming and hunting activities in the African set up.
iii. Emblems:
An emblem is an object that symbolise the ideals, beliefs, and concepts of a group
or association. Objects used or adopted by institutions and organisations as an
emblem can be animate or animate. Examples include animals, plants, umbrellas,
broom, etc. Usually, the object adopted as an emblem has some traits or attributes
that reflect the goals, beliefs and aspirations of the group or association. Various
groups use emblems as a form of identification. For instance, political
organisations like the New Patriotic Party uses the elephant as an emblem to
identify their party whilst the National Democratic Congress has adopted the
umbrella as an emblem for identification. Market groups and associations, fishing
groups, football clubs, corporate institutions and bodies likewise use emblems as
a form of identification.
Emblems also symbolise the ideals of the group or association. A powerful

fishing group may use an elephant to show how mighty and strong their group is.
Kumasi Asante Kotoko has adopted the porcupine as an emblem because of the
unending fighting spirit of the animal which reflects the club’s determination.
Page 135
iv. Beads:
Beads are small gemstone, plastic, seed or wooden ball pierced for stringing on a
cord to be used as a form of ornamentation on the body such as a necklace or
sewn on a cloth as an embellishment or decoration. Beads come in great variety in
Africa and they play various roles. The type of bead, colour, size and design
usually has symbolic interpretations. Others are merely for decoration or for
serving utilitarian purposes.
Symbolically, beads are threaded on the stool of the king or ruler in Cameroun to
denote his office. Among the tribe men of Yoruba and southern Sudan, special
beads are used as a means of identification. Also, the Xhosa people of South
Africa identify their married couple with the beaded jewelleries they adorn
themselves with. The Bapende ethnic society in Dr. Congo also use masks
threaded with beads in carrying out the various initiation rites for their youth.
Some are also threaded in strips and are worn on the mouth of initiates to
symbolise the secrecy regarding the activities they engage in during the initiation
process.
Beads are also worn on the body for merely aesthetic purposes or as a form of
body enhancement. For instance, initiate girls among the Krobos in the Eastern
part of Ghana wear fine beaded jewellery on various parts of their bodies to
enhance their personal appearance. Likewise, the Kikuyu of Kenya and the Zulus
in South Africa braid threaded beads on their clothes as forms of decorations.
CONTEMPORARY/CURRENT AFRICAN ARTS
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Judicial powers among the Bambara rest in the power of

(a) Flankuru society (b) Komo society (c) Ntomo society
(d) Kpoi society
2. Which artists are feared most among the Bambara of Mali?

(a) Potters and carvers (b) Smiths and carvers (c) Potters and smiths
(d) Blacksmiths and Potters
Page 136
3. The most outstanding carving of which the Bambara is fame is

(a) Chiwara mask (b) Bundu mask (c) Ibeji figures (d) Minsereh figures
4. The Bambaras were noted for their

(a) Pottery wares (b) Agricultural works (c) Skilled fights (d) Renowned
kings
5. The Mendes are from

(a) Sierra Leone (b) Mali (c) South Africa (d) Ivory Coast
6. The men secret society among the Mendes was known as

(a) Yaasi (b) Komo (c) Poro (d) Bundu
7. Which of these secret societies is for women among the Mendes

(a) Yaasi (b) Flankuru (c) Poro (d) Komo
8. The female figures of the Mendes were called

(a) Akuaba doll (b) Ibeji figures (c) Minsereh figures (d) Bundu masks
9. Which ethnic society is in the central part of Ivory Coast?

(a) Baule (b) Baluba (c) Bambara (d) Mende
10. Carving became a popular art among the Baule because

(a) it was easy to do (b) tools were readily available (c) there was a great
demand for statues (d) It was a career imposed by the gods.
11. The name ‘Nok’ was given to a tin mining village in Nigeria by
(a) Bernard Nelson (b) Bernard Fagg (c) Bernard Nah (d) Bernard Glover
12. Which of these ethnic groups in West Africa practised snake cult?
(a) Bambara (b) Baule (c) Nok (d) Swazi
13. The carved milk pot was a popular artwork among the
(a) Asantes (b) Mende (c) Bambara (d) Swazi
Page 137
14. Female figures are dominant in which of these West African ethnic groups
because of their practise in matrilineal inheritance?
(a) Baluba (b) Bambara (c) Baule (d) Asantes
15. The Akuaba doll wood carving is produced among which of these ethnic
groups?
(a) Asantes (b) Baluba (c) Bambara (d) Nok
16. Which of these is not a contemporary art form?

(a) Beadwork (b) Architecture (c) Sculpture (d) Photography
17. The contemporary art form that concerns itself with the production of images
of object is known as
(a) Painting (b) Photography (c) Printing (d) Cinematography
18. Contemporary pottery is made on a device known as

(a) Kiln (b) Potters guild (c) Potter’s wheel (d) Loom
19. Which of these arts were motivated by religious beliefs?

(a) Contemporary arts (b) Indigenous arts (c) Modern arts (d) Medieval arts
20. Which contemporary art employs music, literature and drama in its
production?
(a) Graphicology (b) Cinematography (c) Photography (d) Grammatology
21. Benin court art usually takes the form of

(a) sculpture (b) textiles (c) painting (d) pottery
22. Which of the following ethnic groups is noted for terra cotta sculptures?
(a) Asante (b) Dogon (c) Mende (d) Nok
23. Which of the following masks is used in rituals connected with the simo
society?
(a) Bundu (b) Nimba (c) Gelede (d) Kanaga
24. Which of the following ethnic groups is found in Sierra Leone?
Page 138
a. Baule b. Dogon c. Kissi d. Mende
25. The minsereh figure is the art form of the

a. Baule b. Dogon c. Kissi d. Mende
26. The kneeling woman on the Shango staff symbolises

a. Puberty b. Sterility c. Maturity d. Fertlity
27. In bookbinding, a folio consists of

a. 2 pages b. 4 pages c. 6 pages d. 8 pages
28. The Nomoli figure is executed in

a. Terra-cotta b. Wood c. Soapstone d. Granite
29. Which of the following artists painted the ‘Xylophone players’?

a. E.V. Asihene b. Ato Delaquis c. James Kwame Appiah d. P.M. Amonoo
30. Traditional African art was mainly for

a. Economic and religious purpose b. Social and religious purpose
c. Aesthetics and appreciation d. Criticism and appreciation
31. Ife in Nigeria is noted for

a. Wood carving b. Bronze heads c. Leatherwork d. Cultural dances
32. In indigenous African wood carving, emphasis is laid on the

a. Stomach b. Torso c. Head d. Legs
33. Bas relief is another term for

a. Sculpture b. High relief c. Low relief d. Modeling
34. How is symbolic or absolute form represented?

a. Through naturalistic presentation of forms b. By the use of pointillism and
aerial perspective c. Through the use of monochromatic colours
d. By abstract or geometrical treatment of an object
35. Montage is a picture made
Page 139
a. Of pieces of photo cutting b. On a billboard c. On the ceiling of a church

d. On a wall
ANSWERS
1. B 11. B 21. D 31. B
2. B 12. C 22. D 32. C
3. A 13. D 23. B 33. C
4. B 14. A 24. D 34. D
5. A 15. A 25. D 35. A
6. C 16. A 26. D
7. A 17. B 27. B
8. D 18. C 28. C
9. B 19. B 29. B
10. C 20. B 30. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Write on the socio-economic importance of the arts of these major ethnic
groups in West Africa:
a. Mende
b. Bambara
c. Baule
2. Identify ten (10) contemporary visual arts and three (3) contemporary
performing arts.
3. Write briefly on five (5) differences between contemporary and indigenous art
forms.
4. Discuss two (2) uses of contemporary African art forms.
5. Explain the role of the following art forms in the everyday life of the African;
i. Music and Dance
ii. Sculpture
iii. Body arts
iv. Verbal arts
6. Write short notes on the Chiwara mask of the Bambara including the media
used, forms, characteristics and functions.
7. a. What is a secret society?
Page 140
b. Examine four effects that the Mende secret societies had on their arts.
8. Outline the duties of the Bundu Secret Society of Mende women.
9. Discuss the impact of artifacts in the socio life of the Bambara people of Mali.
ANSWERS
1.
(i) Mende
The Mendes are a group of people who dwell in Sierra Leone. Their main
occupation is farming. They believe in God, ancestors, animism and also practised
magic, sorcery and witchcraft. Their villages and towns are governed by secret
societies and for this reason, chiefs that rule there have limited powers. The men’s
secret society is called ‘Poro’ while the female secret societies included the
‘Sande’, ‘Bundu’ or ‘Yaasi’. These secret societies gave moral instructions to the
youth in areas of sexual conduct, hygiene, laws of the land, warfare, etc. Artefacts
were used as teaching aids. The Mendes practised several arts like weaving,
spinning, etc. Their wood carvings particularly the Bundu masks, Nomoli
soapstone figures and Minsereh figures were the most outstanding. The masks
were used in the rites of the initiates while the Minsereh figures served healing
and divination purposes.
(ii) Bambara
The Bambaras emanates from Mali and their main occupation is farming. They
believed in Faro whom they viewed as the creator of the universe. The Bambaras
were ruled by six secret societies among which the most powerful and influential
ones were the Komo and Flankuru societies. The Komo secret society exercised
judicial powers while the Flankuru society supervised agricultural activities. The
Bambaras practised various indigenous arts like textiles, smithing and carving.
The most outstanding carving of the Bambaras of Mali is the Chiwara mask or
headdress which was used for the antelope dance in their agricultural activities.
Moreover, the headdress is worn during the ritual dance of puberty and harvest
times.
(iii) Baule
The Baule people reside in the central part of Ivory Coast. They could speak the
Akan language since they were once part of the Asante Kingdom. They believed
in the almighty God who they called Alura, the ancestors and lesser gods.
Page 141
The baules practised various arts including carving and casting using the lost wax
technique. The Baules believed that they lived in heaven with their spouses before
coming to this earth. Therefore after seeing this spouse in a dream, the sculptor is
commissioned to carve it. This practise accounts for the great demand for
sculptural figures among the Baule. These ancestral figures were used in the
veneration of the ancestors.
2. The ten (10) contemporary visual arts and three (3) contemporary performing
arts are:
Contemporary Visual Arts Contemporary Performing Arts
1. Architecture 1. Dance
2. Sculpture 2. Music
3. Painting 3. Drama
4. Graphics
5. Cinematography
6. Photography
7. Textiles
8. Pottery and ceramics
9. Metal art
10. Basketry
3. The five (5) differences between contemporary visual art and contemporary
performing arts are:
(i) Philosophy behind the production of the works
(ii) Art forms
(iii) Media
(iv) Tools and Equipment
(v) Functions
Differences Indigenous African Arts Contemporary

African Arts
1. Philosophies Works were motivated by Works are not guided
behind the beliefs. Taboos were observed and restricted by any
production of the and rituals were also taboo or beliefs
works performed before works were
produced
2. Art forms Art forms included basketry, Art forms include
Page 142
pottery,leatherwork, carving, graphic designs,

modelling, casting, weaving, lettering, printing,
metalsmithing,dyeing,printing, cinematography,
architecture,beadmaking, calligraphy ceramics,
painting, appliqué, coiffure, glass-blowing,
calabash and gourd work. painting, architecture,
sculpture and textiles.
3. Media Local materials like wood, Clay, cement, fibre,

cane, rattan, raffia palm, twigs, plaster of Paris, glass,
bone, horn, fibre, skin, hide, oil paint, water
shells, earth colours, dyes, colours, pencils,
gourds, calabash and feathers crayons, pins, plastics,
gouache, paper, metal
4. Tools and Adze, cutlass, etc Chisel, saw, hammer,
Equipment powered tools
5. Functions The arts served religious and The arts served
secular needs secular, aesthetic and
religious needs
4. The two uses of contemporary African arts are:

1. Religious activities
2. Politics
i) Religious activities:
Architectural structures like sanctuaries, temples, cathedrals, mosques and other
religious structures are built for religious worship. Religious programmes are
channelled to the general public by the use of artefacts like posters, banners,
billboards, etc. Religious leaders adorn themselves in attires produced through
textiles. Religious programmes, prayer and worship settings are enhanced through
songs, stories, drumming and dancing which are aspects of performing arts.
ii) Politics:
Art plays a vital role in politics, the identities of the various political groups are
made possible by the use of emblems, logos, etc. Political campaigns,
programmes and meetings are carried out by the use of art forms such as posters,
banners, billboards, etc. Performing art forms such as music and dance come into
Page 143
play during political rallies, etc. Political issues are made available to the general
public through books, handouts, leaflets, etc
4. (a) Music and Dance:

Music and dance are used in entertainment and other recreational activities. Music
and dance forms are performed at programmes and festive occasions like
weddings, naming and outdooring ceremonies, sporting activities, etc. Music and
dance assists in relieving people of stress and boredom.
(b) Sculpture:
Works in sculpture serve variety of purposes. In the domestic setting, sculptural
forms such as furniture, doors, pillars, wall hangings, etc serve decorative and
utilitarian purposes. Sculptures of heroic figures are erected to serve
commemorative purposes.
(c) Body Arts:

Body arts such as body painting, body marks serve various purposes. Some of
these include religious, medical and entertainment purposes. The hairstyle of an
individual helps in identifying the sex, age group, social class, ethnic group, etc.
(d) Verbal arts:

Verbal arts refer to the arts that are orally performed by the use of the mouth.
Verbal art forms such as storytelling, poetry recitals, dirges, libations, proverbs,
etc. helps in the giving out of moral instructions and also in entertaining people.
Dirges and libations aid in mourning the dead.
6. The medium used for the production of the Chiwara mask is a hardwood of the
Dondol (Bombax Cornul). The plant is resistant to ants attack and the climate.
There are two kinds. They are male and female. The male is the largest with long
arc shaped horns often of one-Yard span. The female is smaller with lesser and
straighter horns, rings in the ear and nose. It often bears her young on her back.
Both the male and female are fixed to small bonnet worn by the dancers who
imitate the bounds of the antelope. Some of the characteristics of the Chiwara
mask are:
1. They are stylised and geometric in form.
Page 144
2. They are generally constructive.

3. They show individual expression of form from village to village.
4. There are no fixed traditions that are to be followed when producing them.
The function of the Chiwara mask is that they are used in feasts of sowing and
harvesting. It is worn in occasions when a new field is to be cultivated or laid out.
7. a. A secret society is an association or group belonging to a clan or an ethnic
group in a particular community which meets; make an encampment at obsure or
hidden places at certain time intervals to observe strictly some rites, rituals,
customs and cultural practices of a particular society or clan. All their activities
are secretive and are known by only their members.
b. The Mendes are an ethnic group located in Sierra Leone. Among the
Mendes, their kings exercise limited authority among the people. Virtually all
powers and authority are vested in their secret societies. They dominate the social
and political lives of the Mende people. The men’s secret society is called Poro
while the female secret society is also called the Sande, Bundu or Yaasi. These
secret societies had several effects on the arts of the Mendes. Some of these
effects include:
1. The secret societies used works of art as teaching aids to instruct the young
initiates about the customs of the land, warfare, sexual conduct, personal hygiene,
beliefs and concepts of life, etiquette etc. Performing art forms such as drama,
music, dance, poetry, riddles, proverbs and dirges are used for the giving out of
the instructions to the initiates.
2. The secret societies were responsible for maintaining law and order among the
people. They set the standards for artistic productions among the Mendes. They
determine what is aesthetically pleasant or unpleasant.
3. The secret societies are also responsible for instructing the initiates in the
various art disciplines. They teach the young girls how to spin yarns while the
male initiates are taught how to weave on the loom as well as sculpting.
4. The secret societies teach the initiates the concepts, norms, philosophies and
beliefs in the society which is directly associated with the artistic productions.
Page 145
8. The Bundu Secret Society of Mende women had several duties that they played
in the Mende society especially for the young women. Some of the duties they
performed include:
i. They teach the young ones how to maintain personal hygiene and house
management. This training helps the young women to know how to attend to their
motherly roles in the future.
ii. They also instruct the young initiates the concepts, norms and beliefs of the
land. This training helps the young girls to know much about their cultural
heritage.
iii. They taught the young initiates artistic skills that they could work with in
future. These skills included training in textiles, pottery etc.
iv. They taught them the laws of the land so that the young initiates can live
peacefully and maintain law and order in the Mende community.
9. The Bambara ethnic society is located in Mali. The Bambara cultivate the land
for sustenance. The main occupation there is farming. The people engage in
agricultural activities like the planting and cultivation of corn and other cereals. A
section of the people also engages in pastoral farming. Some few selected people
were trained in smithing and carving. These smiths and carvers are greatly
respected and feared because they are believed to be closer to the gods and
ancestors. The Bambaras believe in God whom they call Faro. He is believed
among the people as the creator and redeemer of the universe who sends rain for
the fertility of the land. The sacred colour of Faro is white. Therefore, he is
petitioned through the performance of certain oracles and rituals before any
farming activity is started on a land. White items and objects are offered to him as
sacrifices during the performance of the rituals such as white clothes, eggs, cowry
shells, white sheep and hens. It is believed that when this is done, the people will
earn the favour and blessings of Faro and a bumper harvest. They also believed in
ancestors.
The Bambaras practiced various forms of art. These include sculpture, textiles,
blacksmithing and beadwork. The sculptural figures they made included masks,
male and female ancestral and fertility figures, cult objects such as bowls, stools,
flutes, Harps and door latches or locks. Ritual staffs were smithed in iron and used
Page 146
in rituals connected to ancestral veneration. The famous mask produced by the

Bambaras is the Chiwara mask or headdress which is in the form of an antelope.
The textile was done mostly by the Bambara women. The chief material they used
was cotton which was dyed in the discharge dyeing technique. They decorated the
surface of the cloth with elegant geometric patterns. These clothes were used for
clothing purposes. Others were for the interior and exterior decorations of homes,
shrines and ceremonial houses. Various artefacts that they produced served
utilitarian purposes such as cooking, sitting, washing, storing etc.
The female sculptural figures were used in fertility cults which ensured the
fertility of women in the society. The Chiwara masks were worn during ritual
dances before tilting and planting were done on the land. It is believed by the
people that it was the antelope that taught them how to cultivate grain. Therefore
the antelope is viewed as sacred among the people. During harvest and puberty
rites where fertility of the land and women is earnestly sought, the dancers wear
the Chiwara mask or headdress. Their dance movements, leaps and vibrations
reflect that of an antelope. This symbolic dance symbolizes the magical
relationship of the antelope to fertility among the Bambara.
Moreover, the Bambaras have several secret societies that govern the affairs of
the people. They also play a vibrant role in the initiation rites of males and
females who are been ushered into adulthood. The males are taught fighting skills,
laws, norms, values etc. of the land so that they can better shoulder their
responsibilities in future when they wear the shoes of their predecessors. The
women were taught things on home management, personal hygiene etc. In these
initiation rites, the various art forms were used as teaching aids. Masks were worn
to instill discipline in trainees in the various initiation camps.
GHANAIAN ARTS AND ARTISTS
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Which of these art forms is not typical of Ghana?

(a) Kente (b) Stools (c) Painting (d) Drums
2. The word ‘Adinkra’ means

(a) Welcome (b) Farwell (c) Greetings (d) Come
Page 147
3. Which printing method is used in producing the Adinkra cloth?

(a) Block printing (b) Stencil printing (c) Screen printing
(d) Roller printing
4. Adinkra cloth is dyed in a dyebath prepared from which tree?

(a) Baobab (b) Onyina (c) Nyamedua (d) Badie
5. The rich indigenous cloth of the Asantes of Ghana is

(a) Fugu (b) Kente (c) Kuntunkuni (d) Batakari
6. What symbolises the office of a chief in Ghana?

(a) Stool (b) Umbrella (c) Linguist staff (d) Ceremonial sword
7. Drums are played during all these occasions except

(a) Wedding (b) Funerals (c) Sports (d) Lullaby
8. Which of these Ghanaians own the Batakari as its indigenous cloth?

(a) Westerners (b) Southerners (c) Northerners (d) Easterners
9. All these are examples of indigenous Ghanaian visual arts except

(a) Photography (b) Pottery (c) Beadwork (d) Sculpture
10. Which of these types of clothes is worn during funerals?

(a) Fugu (b) Adinkra (c) Kente (d) Batakari
11. One of these is not an indigenous Ghanaian performing art form?

(a) Music (b) Dance (c) Drama (d) Cinematography
12. Which of these art forms is limited in time?

(a) Painting (b) Sculpture (c) Dance (d) Textiles
13. The term ‘indigenous’ means

(a) Old (b) New (c) Modern (d) Already
14. All these are musical instruments except

(a) Horn (b) Flute (c) Drum (d) Stools
Page 148
15. Which of these is not a type of bead?

(a) Necklace (b) Bracelets (c) Ring (d) Whistle
16. Which of these materials is mainly used for carving in Ghana?

(a) Wood (b) Stone (c) Ivory (d) Metal
17. Round pots in Ghana symbolise

(a) Boldness (b) Perfection (c) Warmth (d) Affection
18. Which of these is a stringed instrument?

(a) Flute (b) Drum (c) Hite (d) Horn
19. Skins in leatherwork, refers to

(a) Coverings of large animals (b) Covering of small animals
(c) Covering of lizards (d) Covering of goats
20. Hides in leatherwork, refer to

(a) Covering of large animals (b) Covering of small animals
(c) Upper part of animals (d) Lower part of animals
21. Which of the following Ghanaian artists is a sculptor?

(a) Akpo Teye (b) R.C. Ekem (c) Saka Acquaye (d) E.C. Nyarko
22. The prominent art forms of the Dogon were the

a. Terra cottas b. Ritual tools c. Ancestral figures d. Gelede masks
23. Pecking the outline of figures is a technique of
a. Painting b. Engraving c. Appliqueing d. Etching
24. The Ghana Association of Artists was formed in 1973 to

a. Sell artworks outside Ghana b. Promote and develop art in Ghana
c. Retrieve all artworks taken away by the Europeans d. Replace indigenous arts
with contemporary arts
25. In which of the following artist’s works are crowd often used as theme?
a. Ato Delaquis b. Ablade Glover c. Kofi Antubam d. Lionel Idan
Page 149
26. Art associations are formed in order to

a. Bring about unity for improvement b. Collect dues from members
c. Sell cheap work to the public d. Hold regular meetings
27. The ‘Crucifix’, a carving done in wood was made by
a. Ablade Glover b. Amon Kotei c. Kofi Antubam d. Vincent Kofi
28. The negative influence of Christianity on Ghanaian art is the

a. Change in beliefs and concepts b. Practice of tribalism c. Increase in religious
conflict d. Building of shrines
29. In Ghana, D. Zigah and D. Kobblah are men of great ability in

a. Sculpture b. Pottery c. Painting d. Textiles
30. Decorations on traditional buildings in Northern Ghana are executed by

a. Old men b. Children c. Women d. Young men
ANSWERS
1. C 6. A 11. D 16. A 21. C
2. B 7. D 12. C 17. B 22. C
3. A 8. C 13. A 18. C 23. B
4. D 9. A 14. D 19. B 24. B
5. B 10. B 15. C 20. A 25. B
26. A 27. D 28. A 29. A 30. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. List and explain five (5) indigenous Ghanaian visual art forms.
2. Identify and explain three (3) indigenous Ghanaian performing art forms.
3. Write on the uses of these typical art forms in Ghana:
(i) Kente
(ii) Drums
(iii) Stools
4. Write on these Ghanaian visual art forms:
(a) Body arts
(b) Beadworks
(c) Sculpture
Page 150
5. Write extensively on the uses of drums in the Ghanaian society.

6. Interpreting a work of art, reference can be made to the cultural background of
the artist. Give two examples of artworks and explain how the cultural
background of the artist influenced the works.
ANSWERS
1. The five (5) indigenous Ghanaian visual art forms are:
i) Pottery
ii) Basketry
iii) Leatherwork
iv) Sculpture
v) Painting
i) Pottery:
Indigenous pottery was made by hand. Several symbolic shapes were used in
making the pottery wares. Examples of these shapes include round shapes that
symbolise perfection of God, and half moon that signifies the warm embrace of a
mother. Indigenous pottery wares were used for storing food, oil, riches and even
witchcraft powers.
ii) Basketry:
Several indigenous forms of baskets were produced from raffia, straw, bamboo,
twigs, palm rachis, etc. Baskets were used in storing farm produce, etc.
iii) Leatherwork:
Products in leather like bags, talismans, footwear, hats, etc were made from the
skins, hides and pelts of animals.
iv) Sculpture:
Sculpture works were made in wood, stones, ivory, bone, metal (gold, silver, and
brass). These works served both religious and secular purposes. Images of gods
and goddesses were carved and used in religious ceremonies held in temples and
shrines. Historical figures like kings were sculpted and erected at community
squares and parks as commemorative figures.
Page 151
v) Painting:
Paintings were made on statues, masks and on shrines with symbolic colours,
motifs and patterns. During initiation rites the bodies of initiates were painted to
serve as a bond between them and the ancestors. Priests also adorn themselves in
special colours during some sections in their ritualistic performances.
2. The three (3) indigenous performing art forms are:

i) Music
ii) Dance
iii) Drama
i) Music:
Indigenous music is played at religious and social functions held in the
community. Some of these include church and shrine activities, funerals, festivals,
marriage, etc. Indigenous music was played at royal palaces, streets, etc.
ii) Dance:
Indigenous dance forms are performed in both formal and informal settings in the
community. Simple dance styles are performed during household chores, in
religious worship, rites and rituals. Complex dance styles are also performed
during social gatherings like festivals, funerals and also at community squares,
etc. The series of dance movement depict themes of everyday life, natural events,
beliefs and philosophies of life. In spiritual dance performances, sometimes,
special costumes are worn. Examples are the ‘Adowa dance’ performed by the
Asantes, etc.
iii) Drama:
Indigenous drama is performed to entertain and to give moral instruction to
members of the community. During storytelling sections, drama is been enacted
for the audience to visualise what was narrated. Indigenous drama is seen at
market places, farms, eating centres, in vehicles all in an informal settings. While
at formal gatherings at the palace and community squares, well rehearsed drama
are performed.
3. i) Kente:
Page 152
This is a typical indigenous hand woven cloth which is very notable among the
Asantes. It is produced on the traditional loom by the use of mainly cotton yarns
and other yarns such as wool, silk, etc. Kente comes in variety of colours, designs
and symbols. Each woven pattern of the Kente has a symbolic interpretation.
Kente is not a casual wear and is therefore worn on special occasions.
ii) Drums:
Drums are musical instruments carved out of softwood with one or both ends
covered with leather. The leather is stretched under tension and supported with
strings. Drums are played during religious and social events. Drums are of variety
of sizes ranging from small to big ones.
iii) Stools:
Stools in the Ghanaian society, are special seats or chairs given to kings as a sign
of their kingship. It empowers him in performing his priestly, administrative,
executive and judicial functions. There are stools that are used in domestic chores,
others used during ceremonies and festivals, and those used in the performance of
rituals and rites. An example is the blackened stool used for ancestral veneration
among the Asantes.
4. (a) Body arts:

These are the arts done on the body. It includes body painting, body marks,
coiffure etc. These forms of body art serve several purposes. Some are used for
personal adornment to entertain during festivals and other social gatherings.
Others serve medicinal and spiritual purposes. Sometimes, body marks serves as a
means of identifying one’s ethnic group, social class, age, sex, etc.
(b) Beadwork:
This is the art of using beads in making necklaces, wristlets, anklets, etc. These
beads are worn on the body as a form of decoration and also to serve medicinal
and spiritual purposes. During initiation rites for females, the young initiates
adorn themselves in several forms of beads which have symbolic meanings.
(c) Sculpture:
Page 153
Sculpture is the representation of a solid form either in relief or in-the-round.

Some of these sculptures include human and animal figures, doors, pillars, etc.
5. Drums are musical instruments played during religious and social functions. It
is one of the widest musical instruments used in the observance of several
occasions, rites and rituals.
i. In religious ceremonies, drums are played to appease or praise the gods.

ii. In Rwanda, special drums when played are believed to be the voices of the
ancestors and as such are used in relaying messages from ancestors.
iii. During initiation rites of young females in Asante commonly referred to as

“Bragoro”, Dondo drums are played to signal the adults in the community that the
initiates are ready for marriage.
iv. In some societies, drums are played to invoke the spirits of the ancestors in
warrior before engaging in wars.
v. Drums are also played to entertain people during festivals and other social
gatherings.
vi. Drums are played to ward off the influence of evil spirits from victims in
shrines.
6. One of the celebrated artists in Africa is professor Ato Delaquis who hails from
Cape Coast in Ghana. He is one of the artists whose cultural background has
bearing on the works of art that he produced. Living in a African cultural setting
where cultural traditions were highly upheld, he translated these cultural gems in
his works. Also, he took great notice of the socio-economic life of the people
living in his vicinity such as their occupation and incorporated them in his
marvellous paintings. Typical examples of his works that portray his rich cultural
tradition are ‘The Fishermen’ and ‘Dzinto’.
A critical analysis of the painting entitled ‘The Fishermen’ shows the mastery
way that Prof. Delaquis portrayed the fishing profession which was paramount in
the environment where he was raised thus Cape Coast. The setting is along the
coast as may have been witnessed by the artist himself. Canoes, fishermen busily
Page 154
engaging in their daily fishing activity with all seriousness are well depicted by
the vigorous brush strokes of the artist. The coconut trees which are regular
features of beaches and coasts in his cultural terrain, the tossing and hissing of the
waves of the sea, the traders with their baskets carrying fishes are carefully and
brightly depicted by the artist in the work. The work is an exact replica of the
main occupational life of the people in his area.
‘Dzinto’ or naming ceremony is another painting that we see the cultural

depiction of the artist at play. In this painting, Prof. Delaquis brought to lime light
some of the principal activities that are carried out when a child is outdoored and
given a name. The activity is generally carried out on the eighth day after the
child’s link with the spiritual world is believed to have been completely severed
as is believed by Africans in general. Therefore to mark this milestone and happy
occasion, the naming ceremony or ‘Dzinto’ as it’s referred to as in the local
language of the artist is performed. It is a cultural duty that has to be performed
by the parents and families of the born child to thank God and the ancestors. The
smiles on the faces of those in attendance, their gay looking attires they’ve worn,
the depiction of items used during the occasion are superbly shown in the work.
These two works of Prof. Ato Delaquis discussed above shows the great impact of
his rich cultural background as a native of Cape Coast, a Ghanaian and an
African.
CONTEMPORARY/CURRENT GHANAIAN ARTS
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Which of these is not a contemporary art form?

(a) Photography (b) Beadwork (c) Graphic design (d) Cinematography
2. Contemporary art began in

(a) 1930 (b) 1920 (c) 1927 (d) 1925
3. Ceramics wares are fired in

(a) Kiln (b) Loom (c) Potter’s wheel (d) ovens
Page 155
4. Ablade glover is a
(a) Sculptor (b) Painter (c) Potter (d) Textile designer
5. Which of these contemporary Ghanaian artists is a cartoonist?

(a) Ablade Glover (b) Ghanatta (c) Ato Delaquis (d) Amoah
6. In which of the following artist’s works are crowds often used as the theme?
(a) Amenuke (b) Delaquis (c) Ghanatta (d) Glover
7. ‘The Dilemma of Ghost’ by Christian Aidoo is an example of a

(a) Poem (b) Drama (c) Novel (d) Story
8. The popular place for the production of pottery in Ghana is

(a) Ahwiaa (b) Bonwire (c) Mfensi (d) Pankronu
9. Which of these contemporary Ghanaian artists is noted for designing postage

stamps?
(a) Tetteh Mate (b) Asihene (c) Hagan (d) Amenuke
10. Which of these contemporary Ghanaian artists’ work is characterised by
bright colours?
(a) Ghanatta (b) Amenuke (c) Delaquis (d) Asihene
11. Which of these is not a type of contemporary Ghanaian music?

(a) Choral music (b) Hip pop music (c) Military music (d) Artists music
12. Charlotte Hagan is a contemporary Ghanaian artist who works in the area of
(a) Sculpture (b) Textiles (c) Graphic design (d) Pottery
13. Printmaking, calligraphy, lettering are aspects of which of these contemporary

Ghanaian art forms?
(a) Textiles (b) Graphic Design (c) Pottery (d) Ceramics
14. One form of picture making is

(a) Printing (b) Collage (c) Appliqué (d) Embossing
Page 156
15. The branch of art that is concerned with communication to the general public
is
(a) Graphic design (b) Textiles (c) Sculpture (d) Leatherwork
16. Directions are given through

(a) Stickers (b) Wrappers (c) Logos (d) Signboards
17. Casting, annealing, soldering are production techniques in
(a) Ceramics (b) Pottery (c) Metal works (d) Leatherworks
18. Vincent Akwete Kofi is a Ghanaian contemporary

(a) Painter (b) Sculptor (c) Potter (d) Architect
19. Which of these Ghanaian contemporary artists hails from Akim Fosu in the
Eastern region of Ghana?
(a) Ghanatta (b) Delaquis (c) Amoah (d) Glover
20. Which of these Ghanaian contemporary artists headed the panel for planning
art syllabuses for all educational levels?
(a) Glover (b) Amenuke (c) Hagan (d) Asihene
(b)
21. Which of the following is a notable Ghanaian painter?
a. W.N. Sackitey b. Oku Ampofo c. Amon Kotey d. F.T. Mate
22. The Ametakpakpe of the Ewe tribe is used for

a. Twin worship b. Naming ceremony c. Puberty rites d. Ancestral worship
ANSWERS
1. B 6. D 11. D 16. D
2. B 7. B 12. B 17. C
3. A 8. D 13. B 18. B
4. B 9. A 14. B 19. A
5. B 10. C 15. A 20. B
21. C 22. A
ESSAY QUESTIONS
Page 157
1. Write short notes on the works and contributions of these Ghanaian

contemporary artists:
i) S. K. Amenuke
ii) Ablade Glover
iii) Nana Yaw Boakye Ghanatta
2. Describe these contemporary Ghanaian visual art forms:
i) Graphic Design
ii) Ceramics
iii) Picture making
3. Arrange the names of these Ghanaian contemporary artists based on their area
of specification
i) Ablade Glover xi) Vincent Akwete Kofi
ii) Nana Yaw Boakye Ghanatta xii) Kofi Antubam
iii) Charlotte Hagan xiii) Lionel Idan
iv) Ato Delaquis xiv) James Boateng
v) Frederick Tetteh Mate xv) Dofzideny Kwaku Asare
vi) Kwame Amoah xvi) E. C. Nyarko
vii) B. K. Dogbe xvii) B. K. Adipah
viii) Kojo Fosu xviii) K. K. Broni
ix) S. K. Amenuke xix) Saka Acquaye
x) Ernest Victor Asihene
4. Write briefly on Ghanaian contemporary performing arts.
5. Write on the life, works, achievements and contribution of James Kwame
Amoah.
ANSWERS
1. (a) S. K. Amenuke
Dr. Sylvanus Kwami Amenuke is a painter whose paintings are based on
Ghanaian concepts, beliefs and ideas of life. The techniques he employ shows his
exposure to the formal education he had both inland and overseas. He blends
aspects of Ghanaian indigenous life with the elements of designing inspired by
modern concepts of art. Dr. Amenuke works with mixed media. Examples of the
media he used are poster colour, water colour, crayon, ink, acrylic paint and
adhesive. His works include titles such as ‘pouring palm wine’ (oil paint),
‘Puberty mask ‘(Oil paint) and ‘Mother’ (acrylic paint).
Page 158
He has immensely contributed to the development of Art in Ghana. His major

contribution is in the area of art education. He headed the panel for planning art
syllabuses for the various educational levels in the country. Dr. Amenuke has
written several books and journals in art. Paramount among these are “Attitude to
Art Education in Ghana,” “Approaches to Ghanaian Art”, “General Knowledge in
Art and Vocational Skills” for senior high schools and colleges of education.
(b) Ablade Glover

Professor Ablade Glover is a prolific painter who has specialised in painting
by the use of palette knife in an impasto style. He also employs the pointillism
technique of building forms and pictures. The themes for his works are people
and places; townscapes; market scenes, dwellings, etc. An example of his
works is the painting entitled “The market” done in oil paint.
His major contribution to art in Ghana is the compilation of the Ghanaian
proverbial Adinkra, Stool and linguist staff symbols. He has also built the
most modern and largest art gallery in Ghana.
(c) Nana Yaw Boakye Ghanatta

Ghanatta is a graphic artist who has specialised in cartooning and illustration.
He works mainly in pen and ink, water colours and oil paints. His style ranges
from realistic renderings to semi-abstracted representations. The themes for
his works were based on religious, political and economic concepts and values
of the Ghanaian society. These include drug abuse, stealing, etc. Sometimes
his cartoons aid in explaining governmental policies such as new economic
measures, health, educational programmes, etc.
Ghanatta was the first cartoonist to introduce cartoon and comics into Ghanaian
newspapers and magazines. His pocket and strip cartoons serve as an educational
tool for the moral, social and political development of Ghana. His greatest
contribution to art was the establishment of the Ghanatta College of Art and
Design in 1969.
2. (a) Graphic Design

This is a branch of visual art that is concerned with the giving out of
information to the general public by the use of pictures and words. Aspects of
graphic design include lettering, calligraphy, cinematography, book craft,
Page 159
print making, postage stamp and designing, stage designing, shop decoration
and interior decoration. Graphic design products include banners, posters,
billboards, signboards, certificates, wrappers, packages, etc.
(b) Ceramics
This is the art of making several objects and receptacles in clay and hardening
them by firing the wares in higher temperature. Examples of ceramic wares
are pots (water pots, cooler), bowls, cups, vases, tiles, ceramic sculptures, heat
and electric insulators, murals, plaques, pipes, bottles, louvre blades, etc.
(c) Picture Making

This is the art of making pictures by employing skills in drawing and painting.
It includes portraiture, scenic painting, collage, mosaic, etc. Pictures are used
as wall hangings in decorating places. Works in picture making serve
commemorative purposes. They help us to remember events and places.
3. Graphic Design Sculpture

i) Frederick Tetteh Mate i) Kofi Antubam
ii) Yaw Boakye Ghanatta ii) B. K. Dogbe
iii) Saka Acquaye
iv) Vincent K. Akwele
Painting Art History

i) Ablade Glover i) B. K. Dogbe
ii) Ato Delaquis ii) Kojo Fosu
iii) S. K. Amenuke
iv) Dofzideny Kwaku Asare
Art Education Textiles

i) E. C. Nyarko i) Lionel Idan
ii) B. K. Adipah ii) Charlotte Hagan
iii) James Boateng
Page 160
Ceramics and Pottery

i) K. K. Broni
ii) James Amoah
4. Ghanaian contemporary art began in the early 1920s. It sprung from the
formal academic art that was introduced by the British colonial government in
the then Gold Coast. Foreign elements integrated with indigenous concepts
make up most of the Ghanaian contemporary art forms. Tools, materials and
ideas are influenced by foreign elements. Contemporary Ghanaian arts are
divided into two, namely: contemporary Ghanaian visual arts and
contemporary Ghanaian performing arts. Examples of Ghanaian contemporary
visual arts include picture making, graphic design, ceramics, pottery,
cinematography, print making, sculpture, architecture, pottery, calabash work,
basketry, leatherwork, etc. On the other hand, the Ghanaian contemporary
performing arts include Dance, drama, music and verbal arts.
5. James Kwame Amoah

James Kwame Amoah is a contemporary Ghanaian potter who was born in
July 1943 at Agona in Ashanti. He had his secondary education at Prempeh
College and then entered the College of Art in the Kwame Nkrumah
University of Science and Technology in Kumasi. He gained an award for his
postgraduate studies in pottery and ceramics at the Ceramic Department,
Gesamthochschule, Kassel, West German.
He was appointed Assistant Research Fellow in Ceramics at the College of

Art, Kumasi. He was again appointed as a lecturer and promoted to senior
lecturer in 1982. He draws inspiration from indigenous forms. He employed
proverbial symbols and motifs on his pots as a form of decoration. He
conducted a study into indigenous pottery forms – their production techniques
and decoration at Pankrono. This study has helped in improving the
indigenous pottery forms to meet the modern standards.
Example of his works include the dinner set for the Essumenja Palace, Ghana,
a mural at Swammill, United African Company, Accra, Ghana; a mural mask
form at the Bank of Ghana; wall plaques in the V.I.P. louge, Kotoka
International Airport, Ghana. He participated in the FESTAC exhibition in
1977 held in Lagos, Nigeria and served as a member of the delegation from
Page 161
Ghana. He has also published a research report on production techniques for

indigenous pottery forms.
Page 162
DRAWING FOR COMPOSITION
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Idea development help artists in

(a) Becoming brilliant (b) Creating new designs (c) Mounting exhibitions
(d) Exposing galleries
2. The original qualities of an object in idea development is always

(a) Ignored (b) Retained (c) Considered (d) Removal
3. The art of creating an illusion of distance on a flat surface is termed as

(a) Composition (b) Perspective (c) Idea development (d) Figure drawing
4. Analytical studies involves observing objects

(a) Critically (b) In concession (c) Quickly (d) Closely
5. A one-point perspective has

(a) One vanishing point (b) No vanishing point (c) Two vanishing point
(d) Three vanishing points
6. Both the one and two point perspectives are sometimes called
(a) Aerial perspective (b) Linear perspective (c) Circular perspective
(d) Straight line perspective
7. Perspective is an optical illusion suggesting

(a) Balance (b) Distance (c) Weight (d) Symmetry
8. An imaginary line between the land and the sky is called

(a) Horizon (b) Eye-level (c) Viewpoint (d) Perspective
9. In perspective drawing, some lines appear to converge at the

(a) Meeting point (b) Vertical point (c) Vanishing point (d) Horizontal point
10. The feeling of depth in picture-making is called

(a) Horizon (b) Background (c) Perspective (d) Landscape
Page 163
11. An outline drawing is the same as

(a) Contour drawing (b) Mass drawing (c) Structural drawing (d) Block
drawing
12. The whole picture plane of a landscape perspective is divided into

(a) Ground plane, background and mountain plane
(b) Foreground, eye-level and vanishing point
(c) Ground plane, horizon and sky plane
(d) Building ground, mountain level and skyline
13. The vanishing point is also called

(a) Eye-level or horizon (b) Background or sky plane (c) Middle distance
of retreating line (d) Boundary line of horizon
14. In aerial or colour perspective, colours near the horizon should be

(a) Intense (b) Pale (c) Dull (d) Bright
15. In idea development, objects are drawn from

(a) One angle (b) Two angles (c) All angels (d) Sides view
16. All these are implemented in idea development except

(a) Addition (b) Subtraction (c) Transportation (d) Cancellation
17. One point perspective is the same as

(a) Horizontal perspective (b) Vertical perspective (c) Diagonal perspective
(d) Parallel perspective
18. Two point perspective is the same as

(a) Angular perspective (b) Parallel perspective (c) Horizontal perspective
(d) Vertical perspective
19. Aerial perspective is also known as

(a) Angular perspective (b) Atmospheric perspective (c) Parallel perspective
(d) Horizontal perspective
20. In perspective, objects far from the viewer are
Page 164
(a) Small (b) Big (c) Medium (d) Very large
21. To draw cuboids correctly is to apply

(a) Aerial perspective (b) Angular perspective (c) Functional perspective
(d) Parallel perspective
22. In colour perspective

(a) Shadows are painted in grey only (b) Violet is used for very big objects
(c) Objects which are nearer the viewer are pale (d) Colour is used to suggest
distance in a picture
23. How are capital letters referred to by a printer

(a) Gothic (b) Roman (c) Uppercase (d) Lowercase
24. Painters who used violet chiaroscuro were called

(a) Tealists (b) Tenebrists (c) Cubists (d) Commentists
25. The visual tension created in a painting is known as

(a) Dominance (b) Opposition (c) Rhythm (d) Texture
26. Fabrics with appliqué patterns originated from

(a) The Republic of Benin (b) La Cote d’Ivoire (c) The Republic of Congo(d)
The Republic of Togo
27. The whole picture plane of a landscape perspective is divided into

a. Ground plane, background and mountain plane b. Foreground, eye level and
vanishing point c. Ground plane, horizon and sky plane d. Building ground,
mountain level and sky line
ANSWERS
1. B 11. A 21. B
2. B 12. C 22. D
3. B 13. A 23. C
4. A 14. B 24. B
5. A 15. C 25. B
Page 165
6. B 16. D 26. A
7. B 17. D 27. C
8. A 18. A
9. C 19. B
10. C 20. A
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is perspective?
(b) Describe a one-point perspective.
2. (a) What is drawing?
(b) Explain these terms:
(i) Vanishing point
(ii) Horizon
(iii) Ground plane
(iv) Sky plane
3. State the principles governing perspective drawing
4. Write briefly on aerial perspective
5. Write short notes on two-point perspective
ANSWERS
1. (a) Perspective is a way of drawing object and scenes to create an illusion of
distance on a flat surface.
(b) One point perspective is a type of perspective which has one vanishing
point. In one-point perspective all parallel lines moving horizontally away
from the viewer converge at the vanishing point. However, all vertical lines
remain vertical. All objects decrease in size as they move towards the
vanishing point.
2. (a) Drawing is a way of critically observing and recording information about

visual forms.
(b) (i) Vanishing point: This is the point where the two parallel lines in the
picture plane converge on the horizon or eye level. It is the point where the
eye cannot see beyond.
Page 166
(ii) Horizon: This is the imaginary line between the sky plane and the
ground plane. It is the area where the sky happens to meet the earth.
(iii) Ground plane: This is the area of the picture plane that falls below
the horizon or eye level.
(iv) Sky plane: This is the area of the picture plane above the horizon or
eye level.
3. The principles governing perspective drawing are:

(i) Objects nearer to the viewer appears bigger and taller than those far
away in the distance
(ii) Coloured objects that are closer to the viewer appear brighter than
those in distance.
(iii) Parallel lines moving in the same direction away from the viewer
appear to meet at a point where it seems to be disappearing.
4. Aerial perspective sometimes referred to as atmospheric or colour perspective

is a way of creating depth and distance on a flat surface by the use of colours.
Colours of objects closer to the viewer are brighter while those far away
appear pale. Different tonal values are used in determining the distance in
aerial perspective.
5. Two-point perspective is a type f perspective that has two vanishing points

that sits on the same horizon line. In two point perspective, two sets of parallel
lines converge at separate vanishing points on the horizon.
DRAWING FOR COMMUNICATION
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. In figure drawing, which part of the body is used as the unit measurement of
the entire body?
(a) Neck (b) Hand (c) Leg (d) Head
2. The body of an average person measures

(a) 4 ½ head lengths (b) 8 head lengths (c) 7 ½ head lengths
Page 167
(d) 6 head lengths
3. A young infant’s body measures

(a) 2 ½ head lengths (b) 5 head lengths (c) 6 head lengths (d) 7 head lengths
4. The main parts of the face include all these except

(a) Eyes (b) Nose (c) Hairs (d) Ears
5. The part of the body from the shoulder to the waist is called
(a) Cylinder (b) Torso (c) Corner (d) Main body
6. The organisation of elements of design guided by design principles is known

as
(a) Planning (b) Design (c) Composition (d) Arrangement
7. The area occupied by objects in a picture is called

(a) Positive area (b) Negative area (c) Space (d) Shape
8. The space around objects in a picture is called

(a) Negative area (b) Positive area (c) Space outwards (d) Space inwards
9. The positive space in a picture usually covers what percentage of the total
picture area?
(a) 60% (b) 80% (c) 75% (d) 90%
10. The negative space in a picture usually covers

(a) 10% (b) 20% (c) 25% (d) 30%
11. Which of the design principles is used to break monotony?

(a) Balance (b) Variety (c) Rhythm (d) Dominance
12. Systematic repetition of design elements to create a sense of movement is

known as
(a) Rhythm (b) Balance (c) Dominance (d) Variety
13. A composition that has only length and breadth is known as
Page 168
(a) Two dimensional composition (b) Three dimensional composition

(c) Four dimensional composition (d) One dimensional composition
14. A composition that has length, breadth and height is referred to as

(a) Three dimensional composition (b) Two dimensional composition
(c) One dimensional composition (d) Four dimensional composition
15. All these are three dimensional art works except

(a) Pots (b) Statues (c) Stools (d) Collage
16. All these are examples of two dimensional art works except
(a) Cups (b) Mosaic (c) Collage (d) Painting
17. A paper drawing is in which form?

(a) One dimensional form (b) Two dimensional form
(c) Three dimensional form (d) Four dimensional form
18. A picture composed in the mind is said to be a/an

(a) Imaginative composition (b) Still-life composition
(c) Mindset composition (d) Brainstorm composition
19. Which of these compositions is difficult to compose?

(a) Still-life composition (b) Imaginative composition
(c) Quick composition (d) Brainstorm composition
20. Ideas are best expressed in art through

(a) Drawings (b) Photographs (c) Composition (d) Sketches
21. Cartoons that communicate political issues to the general public is known as
(a) Gag carton (b) Editorial cartoon (c) Comic strip cartoon
(d) Animated cartoon
22. The idea ‘fragile’ is depicted on packages by

(a) Broken pot (b) Broken plate (c) Broken glass (d) Broken vase
Page 169
23. A symbol of an arrow with a pointed end tracing up placed on packages

means
(a) Go straight (b) This way up (c) Use a straw (d) Cut the top
24. Documentation of works of artists is done by the use of

(a) Brush name (b) Copy right (c) Portfolio (d) Symbols
25. Which of an artist’s works are kept in a portfolio?

(a) Bright works (b) Clean works (c) Best works (d) Paintings
26. Which of these materials is best used in constructing portfolios?

(a) Leather (b) Paper (c) Fabric (d) Rubber
27. Line, dots, shapes are examples of

(a) Design principles (b) Design elements (c) Unity (d) Balance
28. Confusion of the design elements is prevented by the use of

(a) Unity (b) Balance (c) Dominance (d) Variety
29. Balance, harmony, variety are examples of

(a) Design principles (b) Design elements (c) Compositional elements
(d) Visual tools
30. A plan of work to be executed is a

(a) Composition (b) Design (c) Organisation (d) Arrangement
31. Tonal drawing is used to define

(a) form (b) rhythm (c) silhouette (d) style
32. The vanishing point is also called the

a. Eye level b. Background c. Retreating line d. Boundary line
ANSWERS
11. D 11. B 21. B 31. A
12. C 12. A 22. C 32. D
Page 170
13. A 13. A 23. B

14. C 14. A 24. C
15. B 15. D 25. C
16. C 16. A 26. A
17. A 17. B 27. B
18. A 18. A 28. A
19. C 19. B 29. A
20. C 20. A 30. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is a composition?
(b) List and explain the two types of composition.
2. State five (5) ways through which drawings are used for communications.
3. (a) What is portfolio?
(b) Outline five (5) importance of portfolio
4. (a) What are principles of design?
(b) List five (5) principles of design
5. (a) What are elements of design?
(b) List five (5) elements of design.
ANSWERS
1. (a) Composition is the organisation, arrangement and planning of the various
elements of design guided by the design principles to achieve a desired effect.
(b) The two types of composition are:

(i) Two-dimensional composition
(ii) Three-dimensional composition
(i) Two-dimensional composition:

This is a composition of works of art that have only length and breadth.
All two-dimensional works are executed on flat surfaces. Examples include
paintings, collage, mosaic, etc. Two-dimensional composition serves as a
foundation for a three-dimensional composition.
Page 171
(ii) Three-dimensional composition:

This is a composition of works of art that has length, breadth and height
(depth). Three-dimensional compositions can be seen from all angles. Examples
of three-dimensional composition include Sculpture (statues), baskets, drums,
stools, etc. Three-dimensional artworks are sometimes referred to as “work-in –
the-round”.
2. Drawings communicate ideas and values in various ways. Some of these are:
(a) Drawings in the form of cartoons help in highlighting important issues in
the society. It aids in alerting the general public on social vices like rape,
stealing, illicit sex, etc.
(b) Drawings help in the planning and construction of buildings and other
projects.
(c) Drawing is used in explaining a process. For instance, electoral and

registration processes are easily explained to the general public by the use
of drawings.
(d) Drawings are also used in explaining printed text on posters, banners etc.
to the illiterate class in the society.
(e) Drawings in the form of symbols are placed on packages to communicate

to the consumers on the nature of the product.
3. (a) A portfolio refers to the collection of all the creative works of the artists or
a folder used to keep art works.
(b) The importance of portfolio is:

(i) It helps works of art to be neat and clean
(ii) It ensures the durability of works of art
(iii) It serves as a protection for works of art against harsh weather conditions
such as rain, dust and the ultraviolet rays of the sun.
(iv) Paper works are protected from being crumpled when kept in portfolio.
(v) It assists in the good documentation of one’s best works.
Page 172
4. (a) Principles of design are the rules that govern the composition and
organisation of the elements of design.
(b) The five principles of design are:

(i) Dominance
(ii) Variety
(iii) Rhythm
(iv) Balance
(v) Contrast
5. (a) Elements of design are the various visual tools used in the composition of
design.
(b) The five elements of design are:

(i) Dot
(ii) Line
(iii) Shape
(iv) Space
(v) Texture
PRODUCT DESIGN
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Hand-made articles refers to
(a) Items by hand (b) Items for hand (c) Hand in items (d) Made at hand
2. Designing of articles is done

(a) When producing articles (b) After producing articles (c) Before
producing articles (d) In producing articles
3. Which of these is needed for the production of hand-made articles?

(a) Skill (b) Rote (c) Crude tools (d) Knowledge
4. Hand-made articles are defined by

(a) Tools (b) Equipment (c) Materials (d) Expertise
5. For efficient use of materials, one needs to
Page 173
(a) Prepare materials (b) Understand materials (c) Experiment materials

(d) Clean materials
6. Which of these is not a material?

(a) Chisel (b) Stone (c) Wood (d) Clay
7. Which materials give artists freedom of creation?

(a) Rigid materials (b) Pliable materials (c) Turnable materials
(d) Plastic materials
8. Which materials restrict artists in creation?

(a) Rigid materials (b) Pliable materials (c) Malleable materials
(d) Turnable materials
9. A good design for hand-made articles should be

(a) Drawn (b) Planned (c) Executed (d) Painted
10. The first step to consider before producing items is

(a) Technical qualities (b) Occasion on which item will be used
(c) Uses (d) Purpose
11. The method used for the production of articles is under

(a) Design and shape of articles (b) Sketch models
(c) Technical qualities (c) Cultural symbols
12. To help artists visualise how finished products will look like requires
(a) Vision (b) Sketch modeller (c) Preliminary sketches
(d) Brainstorming designs
13. The reason behind the production of an item is considered under which of
these factors?
(a) Functionality (b) Cultural symbols (c) Purpose (d) Nature of
materials
14. The place the item to be produced will be used help artists in their choice of
(a) Shape (b) Design (c) Materials (d) Tools
Page 174
15. What attracts consumers most in items?

(a) Functionality (b) Purpose (c) Aesthetics (d) Colour
16. Which of these is not a manufacturing technique?

(a) Carving (b) Pottery (c) Leatherwork (d) Painting
17. Which of these production processes is a sculptural technique?

(a) Ceramics (b) Carving (c) Pottery (d) Jewellery
18. Burnishing, kneading, pinching, wedging are processes involved in

(a) Ceramics (b) Pottery (c) Carving (d) Jewellery
(b)
19. Piercing is best done using a/an
(a) Drill (b) Awl (c) Nail (d) Roller pin
20. All these are computer software programmes that aid in the designing of items
except
(a) Photoshop (b) CorelDraw (c) PowerPoint (d) Rhino
21. The operation that gives a book its convex back and its concave fore-edge is
termed
a. Bending b. Constructing c. Curving d. Rounding
ANSWERS
1. A 11. C
2. C 12. C
3. A 13. C
4. C 14. B
5. B 15. C
6. A 16. D
7. B 17. B
8. A 18. B
9. B 19. A
10. D 20. C
21. D
Page 175
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. List the factors to be considered when making articles by hand.
2. Explain any two (2) factors necessary for the production of articles.
3. Identify five (5) techniques employed in the production of items in art.
4. List three (3) computer software programmes for designing articles.
5. Discuss the difference between hand-made articles and machine-made
articles.
6. a. Discuss five ways that make hand-made articles different from machine
made articles.
b. List five considerations when making an article.
ANSWERS
1. The factors to be considered when making articles are:

- Purpose of the article
- Design, shape and form of the article
- Technical qualities of the article
- Nature and suitability of materials to be used
- Occasion on which the article will be used
- How many people will use the article
- Place the article will be used
- Preliminary designing
- Cultural symbols to be used
- Functionality and aesthetic qualities of the article.
2. i) Preliminary designing: These are various designs depicting how the actual
product to be made will look like. It is usually done on paper. This help artist
to visualise the varied designs they have conceptualised in mind.
ii) Technical qualities of the article: This refers to the methods or techniques
used in designing and producing the item. Examples of some of these
techniques are basketry, pottery, carving, jewellery, etc.
3. i) Carving ii) Basketry iii) Pottery iv) Leatherwork v) jewellery
4. (a) Rhino (3D) programme
Page 176
(b) CorelDraw
(c) Adobe Photoshop
5. Hand-made articles are articles made by the hand that employ manual
processes and techniques. Machine-made articles are items made by the use of
machines and electronic equipment.
Hand-made articles are unique and usually last longer. However, their
production rate is slow and finished works are not done with precision.
Machine-made articles are precise and their production rate is faster.
However, the joy gained as a result of producing items with the hand is
missed and uniqueness of finished products is also lost.
6. a. Hand-made articles are articles that are produced manually by hand using
manual or traditional techniques and processes. On the other hand, machine made
articles are articles that are produced using electronic machineries, processes and
techniques. Handmade articles differ greatly from machine made articles. Some of
these differences have been outlined below.
Hand-Made Articles Machine Made Articles
Articles are produced by hand with Articles are produced with the help of
hand-made tools and equipment. programmed machines.
Production rate is slow and few Production rate is faster and several
numbers of articles are produced. This numbers of articles are produced.
is largely due to that humans work at a Programmed machines work at a faster
relatively slower pace when compared rate and therefore results in larger
with machines. This affects the speed quantities of articles produced.
of production, lessening the number of
copies of the articles produced.
Items produced are not exactly the Items produced are accurately precise
same. They certainly bear some slight and the same in terms of size, colour,
differences in the same articles form etc. Product specifications are fed
produced by the same person due to our into the programmed machinery and
imperfect nature. therefore gives a more perfect or
Page 177
precise copies of the same article.
Articles produced are original and Articles produced are not very unique
unique. Fewer, intricate designs can be since machines are sometimes restricted
conveniently and skillfully made by in its production technique.
hand which machines may be restricted
Articles when produced with great Most of the articles produced with the
dexterity last for a longer time and are machine do not last longer than hand-
durable. made articles.
b. Some of the factors that need to be considered when making an article include:
i. Purpose of article- The artist must consider the purpose or need that calls for
the production of the artefact. This will serve as a guide to the artist in knowing
what to put in the designing and production of the artefact for it to meet its
intended purpose. For example, there is the need for the production of a clutch
bag to keep the items of an artist.
ii. Design, shape and form of the article- The artist has to critically consider the
design, shape and form of the article. This should be in harmony with the intended
purpose of the artefact. Moreover, the choice of colours, shapes and form should
also reflect the age, social status, sex and possibly, the occupation of the end users
of the article. For instance, if the article is meant for teenagers, males, females,
students, nurses or teachers, viewers must be able to reliably tell from the design,
shape and form of the article. Wallets for females may be produced with synthetic
leather colours such as pink or blue with oval shaped design as well as floral
patterns.
iii. Technical qualities of the article- The techniques and styles that would be
used for the production of the article should be carefully considered by the artist.
The technique to be used for the production of the product should be suitable with
the material to be used for the work as well as the purpose of the article borne in
mind.
iv. Nature and suitability of materials to be used- The material chosen for the
production of the article should suit the purpose intended for the article. For
instance, if the purpose of the clutch bag to be produced is to keep items to be
used by the artist, the designer should choose a material that can hold the said
items and ensure their protection. The designer can ask himself or herself some
questions such as ‘Will a clutch bag produced with leather, cardboard, or cloth be
Page 178
able to keep these items of the artist?’ A very appropriate material should be
chosen for the production of the article with the purpose of the article in mind.
v. Occasion on which the article will be used- The occasion during which the
article to be produced will be used should be known to help the artist to choose
appropriately the designs, colours and form of the article. For instance, if a
greeting card is to be made, the artist must know the occasion for which the card
is being designed for. Is it Christmas, birthday, examination or get-well-soon
card? The occasion would dictate to him the sort of colours and designs to use.
vi. Article to be used by one or several people- The number of users of the
article should be known by the artist. This would assist him in the selection of his
material, design and shape of the article. For example, if the article would be used
by just one person, the artist can factor that individual’s preference and taste such
as choice of shape, colour etc. in the designing and production of the product. On
the other hand, if the article will be used by several persons, the material to be
used should be strong and durable to be able to protect the article from the
frequent handling and usage of the masses of people. Moreover, the choice of
design and shape of the article should reflect the taste of a greater number of the
end users if not all of them.
vii. Designed to fit into the place where the article will be used- Where will the
article to be produced be used? Is it in a school, hospital, market place or office?
This information should be known by the artist. There are some designs and
colours that do not fit certain environs. For example, educational items will be
suitable for articles meant for an educational institution while farm produce such
as yam, corn, etc. are meant for articles to be used at the market squares.
viii. Preliminary designing or sketch models- Preliminary designs are the first
designs that the artist puts on paper. The designs are what the artist has envisioned
or brainstormed in his mind. This serves as a visual representation of the ideas in
the mind of the artist.
ix. Cultural symbols to be used- The artist must fully understand the
philosophies and ideologies behind the cultural symbols that he wants to use for
the designing of the article.The interpretations of the symbols should harmonize
with the purpose of the article. For example, the ‘Duafe’ Adinkra symbol which
means beauty, hygiene and feminine qualities is very appropriate as a cultural
symbol for a plaque designed to be hanged in the hall of a women’s association.
Page 179
x. Functional aspect and aesthetic qualities of the article- This is the most
important aspect that needs to be considered by the artist. The final product will
be useless if it fails to meet the intended function for its production. Also, the
artist has to consider the aesthetic elements to add up to the article. This would
enhance the appearance and attractiveness of the article.
DESIGN AND TECHNOLOGY PROCESS
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The first stage of the design process is

(a) Definition of the problem (b) Identification of the problem
(c) Investigation of the problem (d) Evaluation
2. Which of these is not considered under “investigation of the problem.”?

(a) Shape of the item (b) Tools and materials (c) Safety
(d) Functions
3. Appreciation is carried out at which stage of the design process?

(a) Problem identification (b) Possible solutions (c) Evaluation
(d) Investigation of the problem
4. An exact replica of a finished article is referred to as

(a) Sketch (b) Model (c) Prototype (d) photocopy
5. The specific nature of a problem is stated at which stage of the design

process?
(a) Problem identification (b) Investigation of the problem
(c) Definition of the problem (d) Evaluation
6. An exact likeness of a produced item in paper is called

(a) Paper Mache (b) Paper craft (c) Paper model (d) Paper work
7. Which of these is the most essential factor to a designer?
(a) Aesthetics (b) Safety (c) symbolism (d) Shape of item
Page 180
8. Corrections in items are done at what stage of the design process?

(a) Sketch model (b) Prototype (c) Working drawing (d) Paper model
9. Several preliminary sketches are done at which stage?

(a) Prototype (b) Sketch model (c) Possible solutions
(b) Paper model
10. The suitability of the item is considered at which stage of the design process?
(a) Production (b) Evaluation (c) Prototype (d) Investigation of the problem
11. Preliminary designing of a product is done immediately after

a. Definition of the problem b. Idea development c. Possible solutions
d. Investigation of the problem
ANSWERS
1. B. 11. B
2. D
3. C
4. C
5. C
6. C
7. B
8. A
9. C
10. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. List the first four (4) stages of the design process.
2. Explain these stages of the design process.
a. Possible solution
b. Evaluation
c. Definition of the problem
3. Discuss two (2) things that are considered under investigation of the problem
stage of the design process.
Page 181
ANSWERS
1. The first four (4) stages of the design process are:

(i) Identification of the problem
2. (a) Possible solutions:

This stage suggests likely solutions to the problem at hand. Several
preliminary sketches of the item are designed. The sketch that perfectly fit as the
remedy to the problem is selected and used.
(b) Evaluation:
This is the final stage of the design process whereby the design chosen is
produced using the actual materials. The work is appreciated and criticized by
friends and others. It is finally tested to see whether it can serve the purpose for
which it was produced.
(c) Definition of the problem:

This is the second stage of the design process whereby the specific nature
of the problem is stated. Also, the available materials that can be used for
producing the article is identified at this stage. The designer should clearly
indicate what is to be done.
3. The two (2) things that are considered under the investigation of the problem
stage are:
(i) Shape of the article
(ii) Tools and materials for the production of the article.
(i) Shape of the article:

Several shapes of the article are designed. These shapes can be natural or
man-made. These may be regular or irregular.
Page 182
(ii) Tools and materials:

This refers to the tools and materials that are used in the production of the
work. In determining the suitable tools and materials to be used, the artists
should consider their availability, durability, preparation and cost of the
materials.
INTRODUCTION TO LETTERING
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. All block letters are
a) Constructed b) Written c) Slanted d) Traced
2. Which of these is not a style of block lettering?

a) Roman b) Freestyle c) Italic d) Gothic
3. Which lettering style was developed from an old inscription on the Trojan
column?
a) Calligraphy b) Roman c) Italic d) Gothic
4. The ornamental or finishing strokes of Roman letters are known as

a) Lobe b) Stem c) Serif d) Counter
5. Which of these lettering styles do not have finishing strokes?

a) Roman b) Italic c) Gothic d) Freestyle
6. Letters without finish strokes are referred to as
a) No-serifs b) Non-serifs c) Sans-serifs d) Nil-serifs
7. One unique feature of gothic letters is that

a) They have serifs b) They have thin and thick strokes
c) They have uniform thickness d) Their horizontal strokes are usually thin
8. Which of the block lettering styles are written to slant?

a) Roman b) Italic c) Gothic d) Freestyle
9. The block lettering style that is very easy to read is

a) Gothic b) Roman c) Italic d) Text
Page 183
10. The shape ideally used in the construction of block letters is

a) Rectangle b) Circle c) Square d) Triangle
11. Text lettering is very suitable for

a) First letters only b) Headings only c) Paragraphs only
d) Long sentences only
12. Which letters of the alphabets take 5 x 5 squares?

a) ‘C’ and ‘D’ b) ‘M’ and ‘W’ c) ‘O’ and ‘X’ d) ‘Q’ and ‘Z’
13. All letters of the alphabets take 3 x 5 squares except

a) C, D, E b) M, A, A c) M, W, I d) X, Y, Z
14. Which of the block lettering styles is the most suitable in writing number
plates?
a) Gothic b) Roman c) Italic d) Freestyle
15. ‘Sans-serif’ is a French word that means

a) No serif b) Without serif c) Non-serif d) Having serif
16. Which of these letters is not classified under the narrow group of letters?
a) B b) C c) F d) L
17. Small letters are also known as

a) Lower case b) Upper case c) Medium case d) Short case
18. Capital letters are also known as

a) Lower case b) Upper case c) Medium case d) Short case
19. Roman and gothic letters are designed to

a) Slant b) Have angles c) Stand erect d) Be complex
20. The roman letters were developed in which century?

a) 14th century b) 15th century c) 16th century d) 17th century
21. The pointed ends of letters like ‘A’, ‘V’ and ‘W’ are called
Page 184
a) Serif b) Counter c) Apex d) Crossbar
22. Small letters with no ascenders or descenders are called

a) Counters b) Bowls c) X-height d) Stem
23. The bars of letters that extends above the body are termed as
a) Descenders b) Ascenders c) Counters d) Stems
24. The spaces inside and outside letters are termed as

a) Stems b) Bowls c) Counters d) Ascenders
25. The main strokes of letters is termed as

a) Pole b) Bowl c) Stem d) Counter
26. The bars of letters that extends below the body of letters are termed as
a) Ascenders b) Descenders c) Counters d) Stems
27. The curved part of letters is called

a) lobe b) Slope c) Bowl d) Loop
28. The part of the letter that joints two vertical lines is called
a) Joining bar b) Cross bar c) Inner bar d) Outer bar
29. The lower part of letter ‘Q’ is called

a) Slash b) Swash c) Swish d) Swaach
30. Spaces between words are known as

a) Word spacing b) Letter spacing c) Line spacing d) Adjustable spacing
31. Calculating interval spaces of letters using the eye is termed as

a) Eye spacing b) Mechanical spacing c) Vision spacing
d) Visual spacing
32. Block lettering is suitable for

a) making signboards b) writing casual letters c) free style writing
d) printing books
Page 185
33. Which of the following helps to identify a style of lettering?

a. Length b. Size c. Texture d. Typeface
34. Which of the following typefaces is referred to as Roman?

a. Cursive b. Gothic c. Italic d. Serif
35. Which of these letters has a swash?

a. Q b. R c. Y d. Z
36. The four families of typefaces include

a. Roman, Italic, Gothic and Text b. Italic, Calligraphy, Block and spur
c. Prototype, Trojan, Roman and Arabic d. Serif, Text, Gothic and Latin
37. Letters that stand erect with ornamental projections and alternating thick and
thin strokes are
a. Freestyle letters b. Gothic letters c. Italic letters d. Roman letters
38. Words written under an illustration are termed

a. Caption b. Cartoon c. Letterset d. Text
ANSWERS
1. A 11. A 21. C 31. D
2. B 12. B 22. C 32. A
3. B 13. C 23. C 33. D
4. C 14. A 24. C 34. D
5. C 15. B 25. C 35. A
6. C 16. B 26. A 36. A
7. C 17. A 27. C 37. D
8. B 18. B 28. B 38. A
9. A 19. C 29. B
10. C 20. B 30. A
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is block lettering?
(b) List five (5) characteristics of block letters.
(c) State five (5) uses of block letters.
Page 186
2. (a) Mention the three (3) styles of block lettering.

(b) State the differences between them.
3. (a) describe the characteristics of Roman letters.
(b) State three (3) significance and functions of Roman letters.
4. (a) Describe the characteristics of gothic letters.
(b) State five (5) functions of gothic letters.
5. Explain the types of spacing.
6. With illustrations, write on the following lettering types:
a. Roman
b. Gothic
c. Italic
d. Text
7. a. Explain the term ‘lettering’ as used in art.
b. Discuss the following qualities of lettering:
i. Suitability
ii. Legibility
iii. Good spacing
c. Identify four types of lettering
ANSWERS
1. (a) Block Lettering is a general term used in describing all lettering styles that
are drawn or constructed. Usually, squares or blocks are used in aiding the
construction of block letters.
(b) i) The stokes of block letters are uniform in thickness

ii) They are drawn and not written.
iii) They are bold and easy to read.
iv) They have no finishing strokes or serifs.
v) Squares of equal sizes aid in the construction of block letters
(c) i) They are used in writing on signboards, billboards and signposts.

ii) They are used in writing text on greeting cards
iii) Titles of books are usually written in block letters
iv) They are used in writing names of shops, institutions and companies
v) They are the most widely used style of text in designing communication
design products such as posters, banners, etc.
Page 187
2. (a) The three (3) styles of block lettering are

(i) Roman lettering
(ii) Gothic lettering
(iii) Italic lettering
(b) The differences between the block lettering styles are:

i) Roman and Gothic letters stand erect in a vertical position while Italic
letters are written to slant.
ii) Roman letters have varying thickness of strokes. The vertical strokes are
usually thick while the horizontal strokes are normally thin. On the other
hand, Gothic letters have equal or uniform thickness.
iii) Roman letters have serifs or finishing strokes while Gothic letters are
written without serifs and are therefore known as ‘sans-serif’ letters.
3. (a) i) Roman letters have varying thickness of strokes. The vertical strokes
are usually thick while the horizontal strokes are thin.
ii) Roman letters are drawn or constructed rather than written.
iii) Roman letters have finishing ornamental strokes known as serifs.
(b) The functions of roman letters are:

i) They are used in writing the body text of books, journals and magazines
ii) They are used in designing packages and greeting cards
iii) They are used in the writing on posters, banners, etc.
4. (a) i) Gothic letters are written without serifs or finishing strokes.

ii) They have upright strokes of equal thickness and weight
iii) They are bold and simple
iv) They are constructed or drawn
(b) i) They are used in writing inscriptions on billboard, signboards, etc.

ii) They are used in writing captions of newspapers, magazines,
journals, etc.
iii) They are used in writing the number plates on vehicles
iv) They are used in writing names of institutions, shops, companies,
etc.
Page 188
v) They are used in writing elementary books for nursery and lower
level pupils.
5. The types of spacing are:

i) Line spacing: This refers to spaces between lines or sentences in a
paragraph.
ii) Word spacing: This refers to spacing between individual words in a
sentences
iii) Letter spacing: This refers to spacing between individual letters in a
word. There are basically three (3) types namely:
(a) Visual spacing: This refers to the use of the eye in adjusting spaces
between letters. It is also called optical spacing.
(b) Mechanical spacing: This refers to assigning equal or uniform

spaces between letters. It is also known as mathematical spacing.
(c) Kerning: This is a type of letter spacing whereby there is an

overlapping of letters in a word such that there is little or no space
between them.
6. a. Roman lettering was developed from an old inscription found at the foot of a
column built by Emperor Trojan in Rome in 113 B.C. Roman letters have
ornamental or finishing strokes called serifs at both the top and bottom parts of
the letters. These serifs give the vertical strokes of the letters stability and also
make the letters graceful. The serif may be angular, rounded or rectangular. This
accounts for the varieties of serifs such as beaked serif, hairline serif, bracketed
serif, sheared serif and slab serif. Roman letters have varying strokes of thick and
thin. The vertical strokes are generally thick while the horizontal strokes are
usually thin.
These features outlined below distinct Roman lettering from other forms of
lettering.
1. They have varying thick and thin strokes.
2. They have serifs or ornamental projections at the top and bottom parts of the
letters.
3. The letters have different proportions or sizes.
4. They are extremely beautiful and attractive.
Page 189
5. The letters stand erect or upright.

6. They are drawn or constructed.
Roman letters are widely used for various purposes. Some of these are listed
below.
1. It is used in writing the reading materials in books, newspapers and magazines
due to its readability.
2. They are used in designing packages and greeting cards.
3. They are used in writing the text on posters, banners etc.
4. They are used for writing messages on citations.
5. They are used in writing certificates.
Roman lettering
b. Italic lettering: Italic lettering is a cursive typeface based on a stylized form of

calligraphic handwriting. Owing to the influence from calligraphy, such typefaces
often slant slightly to the right.
Italic Lettering
Page 190
c. Gothic lettering: Gothic lettering also known as ‘sans serif’ lettering refers to
letters of uniform thickness but without serifs (Finishing/decorative/ornamental
strokes). ‘Sans’ is a French word that means ‘without’. Therefore as already
explained, they are letters without serifs. It is a form of block lettering since it
bears all of its features. The letters are called ‘Gothic’ because of their thickness
or heaviness.
These characteristics help us to identify Gothic letters.
1. They have upright strokes of equal thickness and weight.
2. They have no serifs.
3. They are simple and bold.
4. They are easy to read and very attractive.
5. They stand erect in a vertical position.
6. They are constructed or drawn.
Gothic lettering has several uses. Some of these are listed below.
1. They are used for making book cover designs.
2. They are used for writing the text on greeting cards.
3. They are immensely used in the designing of posters, notices, sign writings and
other forms of advertisement.
4. They are used in writing headlines of magazines and newspapers.
5. They are used in writing signs placed at roadsides.
6. They are used in writing vehicle number plates.
7. They are used in writing elementary books for nursery and lower level pupils.
8. They are used in writing names of institutions, shops and companies.
Gothic letters
d. Text lettering: This is a style of writing that was introduced for writing books
and other manuscripts before printing was invented. They are decorative, pictorial
in character and ornamental in nature. It is also referred as decorative letters,
initial letters or illumination letters. It does not have specific characteristics but
Page 191
can be drawn anyway to suit the writers’ desire. It is normally used as first letters
for paragraphs.
7. a. Lettering is the art of constructing, writing or drawing alphabetical symbols

in a special or particular way according to some laid down guidelines and rules.
b. The following qualities of lettering have been discussed below:
i. Suitability
This is how well the selected typeface unites or harmonise with the message to be
conveyed to the general public. The selected type must also be appropriate to the
preferences of the targeted audience. The artist must also consider the readability
of the type. This deals with how easy the target audience can combine the letters
of the type into meaningful words and sentences as well as trying to decipher the
content. Readability concerns itself with how fast the onlooker reads and digests
the message portrayed by the artist. It looks at the unison created by the
combination of the individual letters into communicable symbols. The artist must
select a type that is easily readable.
ii. Legibility
This refers to how easy the typeface to be selected can be seen and recognized at a
distance. This should be very important to the graphic artist because the main
objective of our work is to communicate effectively to the people. Therefore,
before he selects a particular kind of typeface he should ask himself this important
question: ‘Will my targeted audience be able to see and understand the message I
am sending to them easily?’ If the selected font style answers it correctly in the
affirmative then the choice is good.
Page 192
iii. Good spacing

Spacing is the art of adjusting the gaps or spaces in letters, words or lines of text.
The artist must implement the right type of spacing for each project. There are
various types of letter spacing such as mechanical spacing, visual spacing or
kerning. Avery keen and good selection of a spacing technique would ensure the
effective reading and attractiveness of any project it’s used for executing. The
best amongst all these types of letter spacing is the visual or optical spacing where
the artist uses the optical sense thus the eye as well as his discretion in the
assigning of spaces between individual letters in words etc. This creates a great
bond between the letters and helps in achieving unity in the work.
c. The four types of lettering include:

i. Block lettering
ii. Freestyle lettering
iii. Calligraphy lettering
iv. Freehand lettering
BROAD PEN LETTERING (CALLIGRAPHY)
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Calligraphy can be written using all these except

(a) Quills (b) Reeds (c) Pastels (d) Sticks
2. The art of good penmanship is known as

(a) Calligraphy (b) Penmangraphy (c) Lettering (d) Painting
3. Another term for calligraphy is

(a) Script lettering (b) Penmangraphy (c) Kalligraph lettering
(d) Formal lettering
4. Calligraphy was first written on

(a) Paper (b) Skins (c) Scrolls (d) Leaves
Page 193
5. Calligraphy writing was restricted to which people?

(a) Learners (b) Scientists (c) Priest (d) Kings
6. The broad pen for writing calligraphy is held at an angle of

(a) 30o (b) 45o (c) 35o (d) 40o
7. Which of these features is true of calligraphic lettering?

(a) They are formal (b) They are constructed (c) They slant at an angle of
30o (d) They are less formal
8. The common material for making calligraphy pens is

(a) Reed (b) Bamboo (c) Cane (d) Quill
9. The type of ink commonly used for calligraphy is

(a) Pelican ink (b) Indian ink (c) Rotring ink (d) Quick ink
10. The advantage of a bamboo pen is that

(a) It is common (b) The nib can be reshaped (c) It is portable
(d) It can hold a large quantity of ink
11. The main reason for making a slit at the tip of a calligraphy pen manually
made it to
(a) Extend the mark of the pen (b) Serve as a reservoir for ink
(c) Create dots while writing (d) Split strokes into decorative forms.
ANSWERS
1. C 6. B 11. B
2. A 7. D
3. A 8. B
4. C 9. B
5. C 10. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. What is calligraphy?
Page 194
2. State five (5) characteristics f calligraphy

3. List the tools and materials for calligraphy
ANSWERS
1. Calligraphy, also known as script lettering is the art of good penmanship. In

calligraphy, special pens are used in writing decorative letters with thick and
thin strokes.
2. The characteristics of calligraphy are:

(i) They are constructed or drawn.
(ii) Pens for calligraphy are held at 45o
(iii) The lettering is less formal
(iv) They are flexible and beautiful
(v) They are written to slant forward
3. Tools for calligraphy are calligraphy pens which may be improvised or bought
in a shop; sharp knife.
Materials for calligraphy include varieties of ink such as Indian ink, Rotring
ink, Pelikan ink, etc; poster colours, Acrylic paint; cardboard, etc.
SCREEN PRINTING
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. In screen printing, designs are transferred onto surfaces by the use of

(a) Stencil (b) Screen (c) Rollers (d) Developing box
2. Another term for screen printing is

(a) Serigraphy (b) Lithography (c) Photography (d) Cinematography
3. Screens can be produced from all these materials except

(a) Silk (b) Mesh (c) Orghandi (d) Cotton
4. Printing paste are forced through a screen onto a material by the use of
Page 195
(a) Brush (b) Foam (c) Squeegee (d) A piece of cloth
5. The device for the development of screens is the

(a) Light box (b) Photo emulsion box (c) Development box (d) Shellac box
6. For bold and simple designs, which of these screen preparation methods is
suitable?
(a) Shellac method (b) Photographic method (c) Paper stencil method
(d) Lithographic method
7. Which of these screen preparation methods is the most economical?

(a) Shellac method (b) Photographic method (c) Lithographic method
(d) Paper stencil method
8. Why is potassium dichromate called a sensitizer?

(a) It is sensitive to touch (b) It is sensitive to light (c) It is sensitive to
chemicals (d) It is sensitive to darkness
9. What medium is used in the photographic method for screen development?

(a) Lacquer (b) Light (c) Kerosene (d) Diesel
10. What liquor is used in coating shellac screens?

(a) Kerosene (b) Lacquer (c) Diesel (d) Primer
11. Which of these terms apply to designs that spread beyond their limits?
(a) Bleeding (b) Blurring (c) Spilling (d) Putrefying
12. Which area of a shellac screen is blocked?

(a) Positive (b) Negative (c) Front (d) Back
13. In the photographic method of screen development, what substitute can be

used in replacing the artificial light?
(a) Fluorescent tubes (b) Frienscient bulbs (c) Solar energy (d) CFL bulbs
14. The traditional way of preparing a screen is by blocking it with

(a) Thinner (b) Turpentine (c) Lacquer (d) Diluted paraffin
Page 196
15. Screens are washed immediately after printing to

(a) prevent blockage (b) soften the mesh (c) prevent pinholes
(d) remove photo emulsion
16. Which of the screen preparation methods is very suitable for intricate designs?
(a) Photographic method (b) Lithographic method (c) Shellac method
(d) Paper-stencil method
17. ‘Photo’ in screen printing means

(a) Picture (b) Image (c) Light (d) Chemical
18. The photographic method of screen printing is carried out

(a) In the open (b) Under a tree (c) In a darkroom (d) In the art studio
19. After coating a screen, in the photographic method, the screen is dried with
the
(a) Sun rays (b) Light (c) Fan (d) Sensitizer
20. Why should a firm contact between the design and the screen frame be made?
(a) To avoid partial development of the screen
(b) To avoid the sensitizer from bleeding
(c) To avoid the edges of the design from blurring
(d) To avoid the hardening of the photo emulsion.
21. The exposure period in the development of photographic screen is dependent

on all these factors except
(a) The distance between the source of light and the design
(b) The strength of the source of light
(c) The strength of the sensitizer
(d) The complexity of the design
22. Trial prints made to check pinholes is carried out using

(a) Paste (b) Dye (c) Lacquer (d) Powder
23. The exposure period for solar developed screen is dependent on

(a) Brightness of the sun (b) Complexity of the design
Page 197
(c) Size of the screen (d) The strength of the sensitizer
24. A squeegee for printing should be pressed

(a) Hard (b) Softly (c) Moderately (d) Very hard
25. Good registration of prints means that

(a) The printed designs are bright (b) There is unison of repeats
(c) There is overlapping of designs (d) The printing paste is fast
26. A developed screen should be washed with

(a) Cool water and foam (b) Warm water and foam
(c) Soapy water and foam (d) Rainy water and foam
27. Excessive exposure of a screen to the sun rays in the solar method of screen
development results in
(a) Weakening of the strength of the silk material (b) Weakening of the
strength of the sensitizer (c) Blurring of the designs (d) Bleeding of
printing paste
28. If less pressure is exerted on the squeegee during printing, the printed design
would
(a) Be repeated (b) Not be registered properly (c) Bleed (d) Blurr
29. A washed silk screen should be dried in/under

(a) A sun (b) An open place (c) A shade (d) A darkroom
30. Which of these tools is used for screen printing?

(a) Brayer (b) Bone folder (c) Squeegee (d) Spatula
31. Bleaching is a process of rendering a fabric

(a) dark (b) strong (c) hard (d) white
32. Lino is the most suitable medium for

(a) engraving (b) etching (c) marbling (d) print making
33. A printed notice which serves as a means of communication is termed
Page 198
(a) cartoon (b) emblem (c) pattern (d) poster
34. Which of the following is a type of print?

a. Collage b. Frottage c. Montage d. Splash
35. Which of the following pictures are produced without making preliminary
sketches?
a. Collage b. Marbling c. Portrait d. Scenery
36. Which of the following is based on the principle of repulsion of grease and
water?
a. Lino cut b. Intaglio c. Woodcut d. Lithography
ANSWERS
1. B 11. B 21. D 31. D
2. A 12. B 22. D 32. D
3. D 13. C 23. A 33. D
4. C 14. C 24. C 34. B
5. C 15. A 25. B 35. B
6. A 16. A 26. C 36. D
7. D 17. C 27. A
8. B 18. C 28. B
9. B 19. C 29. C
10. B 20. D 30. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) Define screen printing?
(b) List five (5) tools and materials for screen printing.
2. Describe how to design and transfer images onto screens using the lacquering
method .
3. Discuss the differences between the photographic method and lacquering
method of developing screens.
Page 199
ANSWERS
1. (a) Screen printing is a printing technique that involves transferring designs
from screens by forcing printing paste through the open spaces of a screen by
the use of a squeegee
(b) The five (5) tools and materials for screen printing are:
Tools: Screen, brush, scissors, squeegee and developing box
Materials: Lacquer, printing paste, mesh, masking tape and wooden
frame
2. The following outlines the steps involved in designing and transferring images
onto a screen using the lacquering method:
i) Draw the design on a cartridge paper to a finished rough state.

ii) Stretch the mesh across the wooden frame and staple all the ends with
staple pins
iii) Mask over the stapled areas with a masking tape on both outside and
inside of the screen.
iv) Place the design on a flat surface and place the outer part of the screen
on it with the hollow part pointing upwards
v) Trace the design on the screen with a soft pencil
vi) Put a little lacquer in a small bowl and mix it with thinner to a flowing
consistency.
vii) Dip a brush into the lacquer and paint the negative areas of the screen
and allow it to dry.
viii) To ensure that there are no pinholes, go over the coating on a second
run.
ix) Allow the lacquer to thoroughly dry.
x) Make a trial print with powder and finally seal all pinholes.
xi) The lacquered screen is ready for printing.
3. The differences between the photographic method and lacquering method of

developing screens is that:
Page 200
(i) In the lacquering method, designs are transferred directly onto the
screen while in the photographic method; designs are indirectly
transferred from the paper onto the screen by the use of a developing
box.
(ii) Lacquered screens are best used in producing simple and bold motifs
or designs while photographic screens are best used in producing
intricate or complex designs.
(iii) The lacquered screens are more durable than the photographic screens.
(iv) Developed designs in photographic screens are accurate and precise
unlike designs in lacquer screens which are sometimes inaccurate.
(v) The production of lacquered screens is more laborious than the
production of photographic screens.
GREEK, RENAISSANCE, ORIENTAL AND OCEANIC ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The first period in Greek art is

(a) Archaic (b) Classical (c) Hellenistic (d) Neolithic
2. Greek art was influenced by the

(a) Chinese (b) Japanese (c) Indians (d) Egyptians
3. One of the major achievements of the Greeks is the invention of the

(a) World games (b) Olympic games (c) Calendar (d) Hieroglyphics
4. The Greeks were also called

(a) Graecos (b) Hellenes (c) Classics (d) Corinths
5. Greek art elapsed between

(a) 30,000 BC and 10,000 BC (b) 10,000 BC and 5,000 BC
(c) 10,000 BC and 1,000 BC (d) 1,000 BC and 30 BC
6. The most famous of all the cities in the history of art is
Page 201
(a) Cairo (b) Athens (c) Tokyo (d) Rome
7. The democratic system of ruling is credited to the

(a) Greeks (b) Egyptians (c) Chinese (d) Japanese
8. Sculpture in the archaic period was characterized by

(a) Flexibility of form (b) Stiffness of form (c) The use of curves
(d) The use of squares
9. Greek art reached its peak during the

(a) Archaic period (b) Classical period (c) Hellenistic period
(d) Renaissance period
10. The dominant material for the production of Greek sculpture was
(a) Marble (b) Wood (c) Clay (d) Stone
11. The male sculptural figures of the Greeks were known as

(a) Karis (b) Kours (c) Kouros (d) Kore
12. The female sculptural figures of the Greeks were known as

(a) Kore (b) Kouros (c) Kours (d) Karis
13. One distinct feature of Greek male sculptures was the

(a) Wearing of braids (b) Muscular built form (c) Placing of the left leg in
front (d) Positioning of the hands by the sides of the body.
14. Why were the male figures of the Greeks always in nudity?
(a) The men were always naked
(b) They performed naked in public
(c) Sculptors were best in sculpting nude figures
(d) Nude male figures were sold faster than clothe figures.
15. Which of the periods in Greek art elapsed between 450 BC to 323 BC?
(a) Classical period (b) Archaic period (c) Paleolithic period
(d) Hellenistic period
Page 202
16. What type of painting was introduced in Greece during the Hellenistic period?
(a) Landscape (b) Figure (c) Realistic (d) Vase
17. The lips of sculpted figures in the archaic referred to by historians as

(a) Greek’s smile (b) Archaic smile (c) Maiden’s smile (d) Classical smile
18. In which period in Greek history did artists make human figures in correct
proportion?
(a) Archaic (b) Classical (c) Hellenistic (d) Renaissance
19. Because of the great demand for storage items, the Greeks invented the
(a) Kiln (b) Pyrometer (c) Potter’s wheel (d) Spatula
20. Which of these architectural styles were dominant in the archaic period?
(a) Ionic (b) Corinthian (c) Doric (d) Zeus
21. The term ‘classical’ means

(a) Extraordinary (b) Superficial (c) Extravagant (d) First class
22. The discus thrower was made in

(a) Bronze (b) Marble (c) Stone (d) Wood
23. The lost wax technique of casting developed by the ancient Greeks was also
referred to as
(a) rite de passage (b) cire perdue (c) plaster of Paris (d) potter’s quarter
24. The Corinthian style of architecture was developed in

(a) Archaic period (b) Classical period (c) Paleolithic period
(d) Hellenistic period
25. The last period of Greek art that began in 373 BC and ended in 27 BC is
(a) Archaic (b) Neolithic (c) Hellenistic (d) Classical
26. The term ‘renaissance’ is a French word that means

(a) Re-examination (b) Rebirth (c) Resurrection (d) Recap of ideas
27. Renaissance largely took place in
Page 203
(a) Greece (b) Egypt (c) Italy (d) France
28. Renaissance period began and ended in which centuries?

(a) 2nd and 3rd centuries (b) 5th and 10th centuries
(c) 10th and 12th centuries (d) 13th and 15th centuries
29. Renaissance art was characterized by

(a) Team work (b) Individuality (c) Exploration of colours
(d) Unison of designs and personalities.
30. Which of these artists is not a Renaissance artist?

(a) Brunelleschi (b) Giotto (c) Cimabue (d) Alexander
31. Which family sponsored the production of art in the Renaissance period?
(a) Royal family (b) Medici family (c) Priesthood family (d) Wealthy
family
32. Which of these Renaissance artists is a painter?

(a) Brunelleschi (b) Donatello (c) Ghiberti (d) Giotto
33. The popular painting entitled ‘Mona Lisa’ was executed by which of these
Renaissance painters?
(a) Leonardo da Vinci (b) Cimabue (c) Massacio (d) Raphael
34. Mona Lisa is described as a

(a) Smiling woman (b) Quiet woman (c) Holy woman (d) Pretty woman
35. The popular painting “the last supper” was executed by

(a) Giotto (b) Mossacio (c) Leonardo da Vinci (d) Raphael
36. Which of these countries is not part of the orients?

(a) Greece (b) Japan (c) China (d) Korea
37. The basis of Indian art is

(a) Buddha (b) Religious beliefs (c) Dance (d) gods
Page 204
38. Which of these forms of art flourished in India?

(a) Sculpture (b) Painting (c) Jewellery (d) Leatherwork
39. The main religion in India is

(a) Hinduism (b) Shittoism (c) Buddhism (d) Mannerism
40. The style of painting executed by the Indians was

(a) Vase painting (b) Impasto painting (c) Landscape painting (d) Fresco
painting
41. The dominant textile material for weaving in India was

(a) Cotton (b) Silk (c) Nylon (d) Polyester
42. The famous dancing figure of the Indians is the

(a) Lord of pity (b) Lord of dance (c) Buddha in a feast (d) Dance hall
43. What belief was predominant in ancient China?

(a) Belief in life after death (b) Belief in animism (c) Belief in God
(d) Belief in ancestors
44. The Chinese painted on all these materials except

(a) Silk (b) Paper (c) Wall (d) Wood
45. Architectural structures in China were executed mostly in

(a) Marble and stone (b) Wood and stone (c) Wood and clay
(d) Thatch and mud
46. The Chinese practise a form of writing known as

(a) Hieroglyphic (b) Calligraphy (c) Lithography (d) Lettergraphy
47. One of the popular architectural structures of the Chinese is

(a) Doric (b) Pagodas (c) Stupak (d) Ionic
48. Early Chinese sculptures were for

(a) Decoration (b) The dead (c) The rulers (d) The priests
Page 205
49. Japanese art was inspired by the

(a) Indians (b) Chinese (c) Greeks (d) Egyptians
50. Japanese artworks are dramatic and vigorous because

(a) They used bright colours (b) They were warlike (c) They imitated the
Chinese (d) They used only warm colours.
51. Melanesia means

(a) Several islands (b) Many islands (c) Black lands (d) Crowded islands
52. Polynesia means

(a) Many islands (b) Several islands (c) Isolated land (d) Crowded islands
53. The field of specialisation was developed by the

(a) Egyptians (b) Renaissance (c) Polynesians (d) Melanesians
54. The Polynesians were famed in the production of a cloth known as

(a) Cotton (b) Tapa (c) Batik (d) Kyenkyen
55. The driving force behind Melanesian art was their

(a) Beliefs (b) Customs (c) gods (d) laws
56. Which of these islands is not part of Polynesia?

(a) New Guinea (b) Hawaii (c) Samoa (d) Tahiti
57. The skill of apprenticeship was used by the

(a) Melanesians (b) Polynesians (c) Indians (d) Egyptians
58. Which of these groups organised themselves into powerful groups?

(a) Polynesians (b) Melanesians (c) Indians (d) Japanese
59. Feather art was one of the important works in

(a) Polynesia (b) Melanesia (c) Japan (d) Greece
60. Oceanic art refers to the arts of people living in which ocean?
(a) Indian ocean (b) Atlantic ocean (c) Pacific ocean (d) Arctic ocean
Page 206
61. Mona Lisa was the work of

(a) Raphael (b)Leonardo da Vinci (c) Rubens (d) Michelangelo de
Bounarotti
62. Greek art reached its peak during the

(a) archaic period (b) geometric period (c) classical period (d) Hellenistic
period
63. All the following are beliefs of the Oceanic people except
(a) ancestral worship (b) Superstitious fears (c) life after death
(d) spiritual beliefs
64. Which of the following represents multiple views of objects drawn?

(a) Futurism (b) Pointillism (c) Cubism (d) Fauvism
65. Early Greek paintings that have survived till today are those made on
(a) walls and panels (b) vases and jugs (c) jugs and walls (d) vases and
panels
66. Islamic art has always been restricted to

(a) geometric ornament and calligraphy (b) text writing and sculpture
(c) calligraphy and block lettering (d) figurative ornament and calligraphy
67. Which of these is an exponent of cubism?

(a) Michelangelo (b) Paul Cezanne (c) Pablo Picasso (d) Vincent van Gogh
68. In architecture, the Greeks invented the

(a) pyramid (b) doric style (c) sphinx (d) sanchi stupa
69. The sculptor who executed the discus thrower was

(a) Kritios (b) Myron (c) Phaidas (d) Praxiteles
70. Religious buildings in India were constructed with

a. Clay and wood b. Wood and stone c. Stone and ivory d. Clay and metal
71. A characteristic feature of Greek art in the classical period is that
Page 207
a. Landscapes are painted b. Sculptured images were mainly of gods and

goddesses c. Statues had symmetrical stiff forms d. Temples were built in the
Doric style
72. The cire perdue technique involves the use of

a. Clay, wax and bronze b. Cement, clay and wax c. Wax, bronze and wood
d. Bronze, wax and ivory
73. In which period did the Greeks study human form to perfection?
a. Archaic b. Classical c. Geometry d. Hellenistic
74. Who are the outstanding artists of the high renaissance period?
a. Giotto, Caravaggio and Van Gogh b. Cezanne, Monet and Rembrandt
c. Leonardo, Raphael and Michelangelo d. Picasso, Michelangelo and Braque
75. The ancient Chinese executed sculptures of animals mainly in

a. Clay b. Metal c. Stone d. Wood
76. Pottery making was prevalent in Greece during the

a. archaic period b. Geometric period c. Classical period d. Hellenistic
period
77. Ancient mosaics were mainly done in

a. Glass b. Terra-cotta c. Tessarae d. Wood
78. The Polynesians based their artworks on

a. Everyday activities b. War and conquest c. Foreign cultures d. Beliefs and
practices
79. A characteristic feature of Greek sculpture in the Archaic period is that

a. Sculpted human figures were in correct proportions
b. Human figures were given movement and flexibility
c. Sculpted naked sportsmen were in different postures
d. Forms of statues were stiff and symmetrical
80. The Indians preserve sacred relics in the

a. Palace b. Shrine c. Stupa d. Temple
Page 208
81. The art movement which draws upon dream imagery is

a. Humanism b. Dadaism c. Surrealism d. Illusionism
82. Oriental Art comprises

a. Melanesian and Polynesian art b. Chinese and Melanesian art
c. Indian and Chinese art d. Polynesian and Indian art
83. The art form of the ancient Japanese was

a. Sacrificial bronze vessel b. Silk screen printing
c. Bronze jars d. Bird-shaped vessel
84. What material was used in the construction of temples and houses in ancient
Japan?
a. Clay b. Metal c. Stone d. Wood
85. The production of tapa is associated with the

a. Indians b. Chinese c. Polynesians d. Japanese
86. Islamic art is mainly

a. Ceremonial b. Decorative c. Figurative d. Religious
87. Who were the exponents of cubism?

a. George Braque and Paul Cezanne b. Pablo Picasso and Edgar Degas
c. Paul Cezanne and Pablo Picasso d. Pablo Picasso and George Braque
88. Which of the following is credited to the Hellenistic period of Greek art?
a. Doric style of architecture was invented b. Landscape painting was invented
c. Corinthian style of architecture was invented d. Picture-writing was invented
89. Which part of the paper-mulberry tree is tapa produced from?

a. Bark b. Gum c. Leaves d. Root
89. The art movement which placed emphasis on cultural values was
a. Expressionism b. Humanism c. Impressionism d. Surrealism
90. Guernica was painted by
Page 209
a. A Spanish b. A French c. An English d. An Italian
91. Which of the following is a description of the style of an individual artist?

a. Rose period b. Archaic period c. Renaissance period d. Classical period
92. Islamic art has always been restricted to

a. Geometric ornament and calligraphy b. Text writing and sculpture
c. Calligraphy and block lettering d. Figurative ornament and calligraphy
93. Early Greek paintings that have survived till today are those made on
a. Walls and panels b. Jugs and walls c. Vases and panels d. Vases and jugs
94. Colour printing is uniquely the artform of the

a. Chinese b. Egyptians c. Indians d. Japanese
95. Polynesian art expression consists of the making of

a. Figurines b. Jewellery c. Mats d. Pots
96. Greek sculptors were unknown during the

a. Archaic period b. Byzantine period c. Classical period d. Hellenistic
period
97. The ancient Greeks mostly carved their statues in marble because it is
a. Abundant in the land b. A precious material c. Ease to carve
d. Easy to transport
98. Ancient Greek cities unlike modern cities of today did not have
a. Markets and open spaces b. Stadiums c. Streets and drainage
d. Theatres
99. The Greek sphinx was designed and created by the

a. Chinese b. Egyptians c. Greeks d. Indians
100. In which period did Greek art influence Egyptian art?

a. Archaic b. Byzantine c. Hellenistic d. Roman
Page 210
101. Which of the following arts became a big industry during the Archaic
period?
a. Pottery b. Printing c. Sculpture d. Textiles
102. Indian sculptors carved huge statues of

a. Buddha b. Jesus c. Monks d. Priests
103. The Chinese writing which were closely associated with their painting was
invented in about
a. 1000 B.C. b. 11000 B.C. c. 2000 B.C. d. 500 B.C.
104. A notable painter of the Early Renaissance was

a. Leonardo b. Massacio c. Giotto d. Titian
105. Which of the following famous painters lived in Tahiti?

a. Cezanne b. Degas c. Gauguin d. Picasso
106. Sculptural traditions was focused on

a. Plaster casting and terracotta b. Clay modelling and bronze casting
c. Wax modelling and cement casting d. Wood carving and cement modelling
107. Stylized animals and rosette were the decorations on Greek pottery during
the
a. Archaic period b. Classical period c. Oriented period d. Transitional period
108. Greek vases of the 8th and 7th century B.C. were made of
a. Marble b. Bronze c. Yellow clay d. Black clay
109. Indians painted Buddhist themes on walls in

a. Acrylics b. Frescoes c. Oils d. Tempera
110. The influence of African sculpture on European art resulted in the formation
of
a. Colonialism b. Cubism c. Impressionism d. Surrealism
111. A curator works in
Page 211
a. Archive b. Library c. museum d. Studio
ANSWERS
1. A 11. C 21. D 31. B 41. A 51. A 61.B

2. D 12. A 22. B 32. D 42. B 52. A 62.C
3. B 13. C 23. B 33. A 43. A 53. C 63.B
4. B 14. B 24. B 34. A 44. D 54. B 64.C
5. D 15. A 25. C 35. C 45. B 55. B 65.A
6. B 16. A 26. B 36. A 46. B 56. A 66.A
7. A 17. B 27. C 37. B 47. B 57. B 67.C
8. B 18. B 28. D 38. C 48. B 58. A 68.B
9. B 19. C 29. B 39. C 49. B 59. A 69.B
10. A 20. C 30. D 40.D 50. B 60. C 70.B
71. A 72. A 73. B 74. C 75. C 76. A 77. C
78. D 79. D 80. C 81. C 82. C 83. B 84. D
85. C 86. C 87. D 88. B 89. A 90. A 91. C
92. A 93. A 94. D 95. C 96. A 97. A 98. C
100. C 101. A 102. A 103. A 104. C 105. C 106. B
107. B 108. D 109. B 110. B 111. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Write on the major contributions of Greek Art

2. (a) Mention four (4) areas of development in ancient Greek Art
(b) Describe how the forms of art you mentioned in (a) were used in everyday
life of the Greeks
3. (a) Explain what is meant by the term “Renaissance”
(b) Discuss the major contributions of Renaissance to the development of art.
4. Write short notes on the arts of one of the following people.
(b) Japanese art
(ii) Indian art
(iii) Chinese art
5. Write short notes on the arts of the Polynesians. Your answer should include:
definition, geographical location, and four (4) examples of their art forms.
Page 212
6. What are the main differences and similarities between African art and
Oceanic art?
7. Discuss five major contributions of the Greeks during the classical period.
ANSWERS
1. The major contributions of Greek Art are:
(i) The Greeks invented various systems of government, of which, democracy

is the paramount. This system of ruling is implemented by many nations
around the globe.
(ii) They have contributed greatly in many fields of human endeavour, in the
areas of science, mathematics, art, history, literature, astronomy, etc.
These serve as the basis for the development of knowledge in several areas
of study.
(iii) In the development of art, the Greeks through their studies in human
anatomy developed the concept of perspective, realism and assigning
correct proportions to forms. This helped in curbing the problem of
foreshortening confronted by the Egyptians.
(iv) The Greek developed the area of pottery by inventing the potter’s wheel
and other types of decorative liquors like glazes in different shades of
colours.
(v) They also helped in the development of sports and other recreational
activities through the Olympic Games. This has ensured the development
of world competitions in sporting activities.
2. (a) The four areas of development in ancient Greek art are:

i) Sculpture
ii) Architecture
iii) Pottery
iv) Painting
v) Music
i) Sculpture:
The Greeks made sculptural figures in the likeness of men, women and
children which they worshipped as deities. Victors at the national games
Page 213
and contests were sculpted. These figures were erected at vantage points
like market squares and other public places. Carved statues were also
placed on graves.
ii) Architecture:
The Greeks built many structures including temples, stadiums, theatrical
centres, etc. in wood and marble. Several styles of building like the Doric,
Ionic and Corinthian styles were developed.
iii) Pottery:
Several pottery wares were made to serve as containers for storing items
such as oil, honey, water, corn, etc. Some of these pottery wares served
utilitarian as well as religious functions. Potter’s wheel was developed to
aid in the speedy production of pottery wares.
iv) Painting:
The Greeks employed several styles of painting such as vase, fresco and
landscape painting. The surfaces on which they executed the painting were
on pottery wares, sculptures and on walls. The themes for the painting
were based on stories of gods and heroes. Perspective was used in their
paintings.
v) Music:
Music was played in all the activities organised by the Greeks such as the
sports and athletic contests, and in the theatrical displays where poetry,
drama and dance, came to play.
3. (a) Renaissance is a French word for ‘rebirth’. It is the rebirth or reawakening

or the renewal of knowledge. The Renaissance period span between the
thirteenth and sixteenth centuries. It fell between the medieval age and the
modern world. During this period, man began to think, reason and analyze
every aspect of life. They broke away from the conventions, rules and dictates
of the church. It was a period of high learning.
(b) The major contributions of Renaissance to the development of art is

immense. Some of these are discussed below:
Page 214
i) The Renaissance art helped in fostering creativity because the artists

developed their individual styles of presentation of forms.
ii) There was a massive development in painting, sculpture, architecture, etc.

Artists studied human anatomy and this led to correct representations of
forms. Perspective, foreshortening and realistic depictions of figures were
revolutionalised.
iii) There were several scientific observations of the world and many discoveries
were made due to the high learning that took place.
iv) There was a revival of classical theme in both art and literature. Studies in
classical antiquity paved way for the production of work of art with elements
of Greek and Roman art.
v) Artworks centred on the figure because artists of the period revitalized Greek
philosophy of humanism.
4. (a) Japanese art was inspired by the Chinese. However, their art forms were
dramatic and vigorous because of their warlike nature. They engaged in the
productions of several art forms such as painting, sculpture, architecture and
printing. The themes of their works were based on the social and military life
of the rich people in the society. Most of their paintings were portraits and
pictures of renowned personalities like actors, rulers, etc.
(b) Indian art was inspired by religious beliefs that evolved from the main
religion known as Buddhism. One of the paramount beliefs was the belief in
life after death. This belief determined the form and uses of Indian art.
The Indians practised several art forms such as architecture, sculpture,
jewellery and textiles. They built temples as places of worship of Buddha.
They also sculpted relief and three dimensional figures of Buddha and other
deities. Weaving with cotton which were either painted or printed were
produced. Jewellery also played an important role in the every life of the
Indians.
Page 215
(c) Chinese art flourished for a long period of time. Most of their art works
were used in the rites of ancestor Veneration. Several bronze vessels shaped
like birds and animals were used in the pouring of libation. Sculpture was
connected with the dead. Stone figures of animals were sculpted and placed
on tombs.
The Chinese invented a system of picture writings in about 1000 BC. They
painted on paper, silk and walls. Fine brushes, ink and water colours were
used for both painting and writing. Their architecture served all purposes such
as religious, secular, public and private. They also had a very rich tradition in
pottery, porcelain, embroidery, lacquered woods and jewellery.
5. Definition:
Polynesia comes from the Greek word for ‘many islands’.
Geographical location:
Polynesia is made up of islands spread over the North, Central and South of
the Pacific Ocean. Examples of these islands are Hawaii, Easter Islands,
Tonga, Samoa, Tahiti, Marquesas Island and New Zealand. These islands
shared common traditions and forms of art.
Art forms:
The Polynesians engaged in the productions of several art forms. Some of
these are sculpture, textiles, architecture and feather art.
Sculpture:
The Polynesians produced sculptural figures in wood and stone. These
sculptures had complex and linear designs. They are reckoned as producers of
canoes with patterns of shapes and animal figures.
Textiles
The Polynesians were noted for the production of a fabric of the finest quality
called TAPA. This fabric was produced from the bark of the paper-mulberry
tree. They were decorated by painting. The white tapa was laid and used in
their temples.
Page 216
Architecture:
The Polynesians had specialists in the building of houses. They were
organised into powerful groups. They built large and important guest or
ceremonial houses. They used reeds in making the walls of their houses while
the roofs were made of heavy thatch.
Feather work:
The Polynesians produced several works by the use of feathers. They wove
some of these into cloaks or sleeveless coats. A typical example is the feather
cloak from Hawaii.
6. African arts refers to the arts produced by the black skinned people located in
the sub- Saharan Africa while Oceanic arts refers to the arts done by the residents
living on the several islands located on the Pacific ocean.
The differences between Oceanic and African art are:
1. In the field of sculpture, Africans produced three dimensional sculptures while

the oceanic artists produced more of two dimensional sculptures.
2. The oceanic artists made several representations in paintings while there are
few paintings done by Africans.
3. The use of metal for artistic productions was abundantly used by Africans
whereas the oceanic artists used few of it for their artistic works.
4. The oceanic artists used more crude tools for their artistic creations while the
Africans used quite refined tools for their artistic productions especially sculpture.
5. Africans produced a lot of pottery wares due to the extensive roles it played in
their social and religious aspects of their lives. On the other hand, the oceanic
artists produced few articles in pottery.
The similarities between African and Oceanic arts are:
1. Their artistic productions were motivated by sets of beliefs and culture.

2. Their artistic productions were used in satisfying both aesthetic and utilitarian
needs.
Page 217
3. They all believe that all aspects of life are controlled by spirits especially the
ancestral spirits and they therefore engage in ancestral veneration and nature
worship or animism.
4. Their artistic productions were dominated by wood carvings.
5. They greatly used abstraction as the principal source of idea for the creation of
their artistic works especially sculpture.
6. Taboos were observed by both Africans and Oceanic artists before artworks
were created.
Q. 7. The classical period was the climax of Greek art history. It is usually
referred to by many art historians as the ‘golden age’ of Greek art, period of ‘High
Excellence’ or ‘First Class’. It was in this period that the Greeks excelled so much
in their artistic development as well as in other spheres of life. Some of the
marvellous achievements of the Greeks during the Classical period are:
1. Artists achieved physical beauty or perfection as well as harmony in their

artistic creations such as sculpture, painting, architecture and pottery.
2. In the area of sculpture, they achieved all the mastery in all the technical
aspects of production such as modelling, casting, engraving, carving etc.
3. There was the introduction of implied movement in figure sculpture and

sculptural figures were made to portray the idea of motion.
4. The classical artists achieve perfect balance between motion and stability as
well as the balance between emotions and restrain.
5. Representations of forms were according to Idealism which was the popularly

accepted notion of beauty or perfection.
6. In sculpture, the stance of the human figure was based on ‘S’ curves usually
called the Hip-shot with free hanging arms made to gesticulate.
7. There were also intellectual and creative achievements in the areas of Science,
Mathematics, Law, Politics and Astronomy.
Page 218
8. In the field of architecture, architects employed various post and lintel styles
which were serenely simple with perfect unity.
9. There was also a remarkable handling of two dimensional composition in vase

painting in the classical period.
10. Pottery also reached its peak with the introduction of amphora for storage
purposes and the aenoche for pouring purposes.
11. Extravagant theatres were built for theatrical performances such as music,
poetry, dance etc.
ART AND COMMUNITY SERVICE
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Artworks are exported to foreign lands to

(a) Promote our culture (b) Talk about our president (c) Earn foreign
exchange (d) Beautify foreign homes
2. Which of these art forms promote agriculture?

(a) Posters (b) Banners (c) Packages (d) Pottery wares
3. The traditional cloth of Ghana that attract tourists is

(a) Kente (b) Brisi (c) Adinkra (d) Kuntunkuni
4. The term that applies to artworks for tourism is

(a) Miniature (b) Figurines (c) Souvenirs (d) Art forms
5. The artwork that BEST promotes religious service is

(a) Music (b) Temple (c) Books (d) Posters
6. Which of these artworks are BEST used in the health sector?

(a) Textiles (b) Books (c) Banners (d) Leatherwork
7. Teaching and learning aids promote effective
Page 219
(a) Education (b) Teaching (c) Presentation (d) Learning
8. Which of these areas of visual art is deeply rooted in the cottage industries?
(a) Graphic design (b) Leatherwork (c) Ceramics (d) Picture making
9. Which of these sculptural figures produced in Ghana serve as tourist

attraction?
(a) Drums (b) Stools (c) Akuaba dolls (d) Linguist staffs
10. The popular wood carving community in the Ashanti region of Ghana is?
(a) Bonwire (b) Ahwiaa (c) Ntonso (d) Krofofrom
11. The development of structures that seek to meet the needs of recent and future
generations through effective management of natural resources is called
(a) Economic development (b) Natural development
(c) Managerial development (d) Sustainable development
12. Which of these is NOT obtained from an animal source?

(a) Skins (b) Seeds (c) Bones (d) Teeth
13. All these are got from a plant source EXCEPT

(a) Wood (b) Metal (c) Seed (d) Leaf
14. Resources buried in the earth are referred to as

(a) Plant resources (b) Soil resources (c) Mineral resources
(d) Rock resources
15. The government can help in the promotion of sustainable development by

(a) Planting more trees (b) Reinforcing laws against depletion of
resources (c) Inviting resource personnel (d) Reversing nature
16. All these are artefacts produced from leather EXCEPT

(a) Bags (b) Shoes (c) Belts (d) Stools
17. The popular production technique for metal arts is

(a) Smithing (b) Casting (c) Chasing (d) Repousse
Page 220
18. Which of these is NOT a pottery ware?

(a) Cup (b) Bowl (c) Plaque (d) Vase
19. Adinkra motifs have

(a) Unknown ideologies (b) Symbolic connotation
(c) Simplified forms (d) Psychological meanings
20. Paintings in Ghana are based on

(a) Animal scene (b) Village scene
(c) Market scene (d) Contemporary life
ANSWERS
1. C. 11. D
2. C 12. B
3. A 13. C
4. C 14. C
5. B 15. B
6. C 16. D
7. B 17. B
8. B 18. C
9. C 19. B
10. B 20. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Mention five(5) art forms used in the community
2. Explain the functions of art in religion
3. Write extensively on the role of art in tourism
4. (a) Define sustainable development
(b) Discuss two (2) measures to promote sustainable development
5. Describe with examples, these sources of natural resources:
(a) Animal source
(b) Plant source
(c) Mineral source
Page 221
ANSWERS
1. The art forms used in the community include:

(i) Sculpture
(ii) Metal works
(iii) Textiles
(iv) Pottery and ceramics
(v) Leatherwork
(vi) Basketry
2. Religious ceremonies are mostly promoted through the use of art. Temples,
churches and shrines which are architectural structures, provide a serene
environment for the religious activity to take place.
Deities, spirits, and martyrs of religious sects are sculpted in clay, wood, stone
or metal. These sculptures serve as shrines to house the spirits or to act as their
representatives. Costumes are produced for religious ministers, dancers,
choreographers and chiorestess to aid in easy identification as they render
their religious services.
Several publications that enhance the promotion of doctrine and teachings are
produced. Some of these include the holy Bible, the holy Koran, etc.
Performing arts such as music, dance, drama, recitations, appellations and
incantations are performed to grace religious activities. Sometimes, they are
used to invoke the spirit of the gods, goddesses and spirits. Art forms help in
promoting and sustaining religious ceremonies in the various religious groups
in the country.
3. The tourism industry in the country is greatly promoted through the various
forms of art produced in the country. Usually, traditional themes or subjects
that portray the rich cultural heritage of Ghana are used for the production of
the arts. These artworks are mostly in miniature or small forms referred to as
souvenirs. Example of artworks mostly produced to feed and promote the
tourism industry in the country are Akuaba dolls, stools, linguist staffs, chief’s
regalia, Gold weights, jewellery, etc.
Traditional symbols, designs or motifs are used in creating the forms of these
works of art. These symbols have symbolic connotations that explain the
Page 222
values, beliefs and customs of Ghanaians. These works of art drive many
tourists into the country, ensuring that foreign exchange is earned for the
nation. Without art, the tourism industry would have collapsed and the
country would have lost greatly in its economic gains.
4. (a) Sustainable development is the development of structures that seek to meet

the needs of recent and future generations through effective management and
maintenance of our natural resources.
(b) i) The government should enforce laws regarding the maintenance of the
natural resources in the country. Penalty to be meted out to misusers of natural
resources should be successfully carried out without any favouritism.
ii) Associations, organisations and corporate agencies who are concerned

with the sustenance of the natural resources should alert the general public on
the dangers associated with the depletion of the country’s natural resources.
This alertness can be made through campaigns, seminars, workshop, etc.
iii) Heads of educational institutions should inculcate the habit of

sustaining the natural resources in the hearts of learners or students. This will
enable them in developing and implementing the concept of sustainable
development in the country.
5. (a) Animal source:

This refers to resources got from animals. These resources obtained can be used in
the production of works of art. Examples are:
i) Skins and furs of animals
ii) Bones
iii) Teeth
iv) Ivory
v) Hairs, etc
(b) Plant source:

This indicates all the resources obtained from plants that can be used in the
production of works of art. The parts of the plant that can be used include: (i)
leaves (ii) stem (wood) (iii) seeds (iv) roots etc.
Page 223
(c) Mineral source:

This refers to all the resources got from the soil. These resources are buried deep
in the earth and can be used in producing several works of art. Examples of such
resources are: (i) clay (ii) metal (Bronze, Brass, Gold, Silver, etc) (iii) Glass
(iv) Plastics etc.
ART APPRECIATION
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The full awareness of a work of art is termed as

(a) Aesthetics (b) Appreciation (c) Creativity (d) Criticism
2. All these are importance of art appreciation except

(a) It promotes understanding between people of different cultures.
(b) It helps us to develop ideas about beauty
(c) It helps us to create art forms.
(d) It helps us to see individual artists.
3. For better appreciation of works of art, which of these is the most essential?
(a) Skills in art work analysis (b) Knowledge in creativity
(c) Knowledge in art history (d) Competence in criticising of artworks.
4. The first step in Art appreciation is

(a) Identification of the work (b) Invention of items in the work
(c) Technical qualities of the work (d) Interpretation of the work
5. The tools and materials used for the production of an artwork is stated at
which stage of Art appreciation?
(a) Inventory of items (b) Technical qualities
(c) Interpretation of the work (d) Identification of the work
6. At which stage in Art appreciation is the location of the art work mentioned?
(a) Technical qualities (b) Identification of the work
Page 224
(c) Inventory of items (d) Interpretation of the work
7. The characteristics of items in an artwork are described at which stage in Art

appreciation?
(a) Interpretation of the work (b) Inventory of items
(c) Technical qualities (d) Identification of the work
8. In Art appreciation, artworks are

(a) Appraised (b) Criticized (c) Graded (d) Awarded
9. In Art appreciation, which of these is not done?

(a) Study of works of art (b) Understanding the meaning of works of art
(c) Passing judgement on works of art (d) Comprehending the techniques used
by the artists
10. The last stage in Art appreciation is

(a) Identification of the work (b) Giving inventory of items in the work
(c) Interpretation of the work (d) Technical qualities of the work
11. The art of making something new is termed as

(a) Aesthetics (b) Creativity (c) Criticism (d) Appreciation
12. The correct order of the creative process is

(a) Preparation, incubation, insight, verification
(b) Incubation, verification, insight, preparation
(c) Preparation, verification, insight, incubation
(d) Insight, preparation, verification, incubation
13. Which of these is not a quality of a creative person?

(a) Curiosity (b) Reproducing people’s work (c) Ability to fit into new
situations. (d) Experimenting with a variety of ideas
14. Appreciation of art means

(a) Talking about qualities and meaning of art (b) Admiring art exhibitions
(c) Praising the artist (d) Encouraging good drawing
Page 225
15. Creativity can be explained as

(a) The reproduction of old designs (b) A problem solving activity
(c) A free and flexible drawing (d) The perfect use of colours
16. A person is said to be creative when he

(a) Knows about creation (b) Displays a variety of ideas
(c) Owns a variety of materials (d) Works very fast
17. Which of these is not a quality of a creative person?

(a) Curious (b) Eager to learn (c) Copy people’s work (d) Original
18. At what stage in the creative process does the creative person faces difficulties
in his creative activity?
(a) Preparation stage (b) Incubation stage (c) Inspiration stage
(d) Verification stage
19. In art, the science of beauty is termed as

(a) Appreciation (b) Creativity (c) Aesthetics (d) Criticism
20. One essential thing to know in aesthetics is

(a) Unity of the works of art (b) Awareness of the unity of the senses
(c) Principles of design (d) Elements of design
21. History of art involves reading about art and making

(a) Comparisons (b) Pictures (c) History (d) Paintings
22. A way of passing judgement in art is

(a) Aesthetics (b) Creativity (c) Criticism (d) Appreciation
23. The understanding of the environment by the use of the senses is referred to as
(a) Perspective (b) Perception (c) Criticism (d) Aesthetics
24. Perception is a process of

(a) Thinking (b) Criticizing (c) Drawing (d) Creating
25. Which of the following is not a procedure in appreciation?
Page 226
(a) Inventory (b) Identification (c) Interpretation (d) Creativity
26. Evaluation of a work of art is known as art

(a) Description (b) Criticism (c) Documentation (d) Aesthetics
27. One of the following is not a quality of a creative person.

(a) Superiority (b) Creativity (c) Adaptability (d) Curiosity
28. The concept of art that deals with the appreciation of beauty is referred to as
(a) Fine arts (b) Aesthetics (c) Industrial arts (d) Appreciation
29. A step in Art appreciation is

(a) Creating (b) Criticizing (c) Discussion (d) Judging
30. The logical sequence in art appreciation is

(a) Identification, interpretation, inventory, technical qualities
(b) Interpretation, identification, inventory, technical qualities
(c) Identification, inventory, technical qualities, interpretation.
(d) Inventory, identification, technical qualities, interpretation.
31. Taking the inventory of a work of art means stating

(a) the technical qualities (b) the title, date and size of the work
(c) all the items seen in the work (d) methods used by the artist
32. Passing judgement on a work of art after considering its qualities is termed
(a) appreciation (b) creativity (c) criticism (d) value
33. A creative person is characterised by

a. Temperament and haste b. Hard work and imagination c. Ideas and
uncertainty d. Chaos and disorder
34. Study of the theory of beauty is referred to as

a. Archaeology b. Aesthetics c. Kinesthetic d. Psychology
35. One reason for appreciation in visual arts is to

a. Appraise an artefact b. Criticize an artefact c. Decorate an artefact
Page 227
d. Judge an artefact
ANSWERS
1. B 11. B 21. A 31. C 35. A

2. C 12. A 22. C 32. C
3. C 13. B 23. B 33. B
4. A 14. A 24. A 34. B
5. B 15. B 25. D
6. B 16. B 26. B
7. A 17. C 27. A
8. A 18. B 28. B
9. C 19. C 29. C
10. C 20. B 30. C
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) What is Art appreciation?
(b) List the four (4) steps in Art appreciation.
(c) State three (3) reasons why Art appreciation is important in our everyday
life.
2. (a) What is creativity?
(b) Describe five (5) qualities of a creative person.
3. (a) What is criticism in art?
(b) State two (2) roles of criticism in Art appreciation
(c) Outline the main difference between art appreciation and criticism.
4. (a) What is aesthetics?
(b) Mention the requirements for making sound aesthetic judgement.
5. (a) What is perception?
(b) List the six (6) senses that enable us to understand our immediate
environment.
6. a. What is criticism in art?
b. Explain in five ways how one acquires the knowledge to criticise a work of
art.
7. a. Define perception
b. Explain four roles of perception in the creative process.
Page 228
ANSWERS
1. (a) Art appreciation is a full awareness of all the good as well as the bad
qualities in what we see, read and hear especially in art without passing
judgement on them.
(b) The four (4) steps in Art appreciation are:

(i) Identification of the work
(ii) Inventory of items in the work
(iii) Technical qualities in the work
(iv) Interpretation of the work
(c) Art appreciation is important in our everyday life because of these

reasons:
(i) It helps in promoting understanding and friendship between people
of different cultures.
(ii) It helps us to develop ideas about beauty.
(iii) It helps us to see individual artists or unknown arts of a period in
relation to the environment around us.
(iv) It enables us to assess and appraise a work of art without passing
judgement on it.
(v) It exposes us to many different works in particular areas of the arts.
(vi) It helps us to develop good taste.
2. (a) Creativity is the art of making something new. It also involves improving
upon existing ideas or rearranging old things or ideas in new forms.
(b) The qualities of a creative person are:

(i) He is very curious and eager to learn or to find out things about his
environment.
(ii) He is ready to explore or try out new things and ideas.
(iii) He is hard working and does not give up easily in times of
difficulty.
(iv) He is highly imaginative, practical oriented and experimental.
(v) He accepts challenges and tasks and completes them.
(vi) He is always hopeful and self-disciplined.
Page 229
(vii) He is original.
(viii) He has a great interest and love for what he does.
(ix) He is able to fit into a new situation.
(x) He is able to produce many ideas quickly.
3. (a) Criticism in art is a way of looking at, talking and thinking about works of
art to understand their aesthetic qualities and passing judgement on the work
of art.
(b) The importance of criticism are:

(i) It helps us to make intelligent discussion about works of art.
(ii) It assists art sellers, gallery keepers, etc, to differentiate between
good works of art and bad works of art.
(iii) It helps us to set a high standard for works of art.
(iv) It assists artists to compare their works with good works of old and
great artists.
(v) It exposes artists to the attitudes of members in his society.
(c) The main difference between art appreciation and art criticism is that
judgement is passed on artworks in art criticism whereas there is no
judgement in art appreciation.
4. (a) Aesthetic is the study of the theory or the science of beauty.
(b) The requirements for aesthetics are:

(i) Awareness of the unity of the senses in life.
(ii) Recognition that the senses are our means of gathering information
for creativity.
(iii) Awareness that sound, touch, line, colour, size, light and others
have their variations of aesthetic qualities.
5. (a) Perception is an area of psychology that deals with the study of the
immediate experience of living things
(b) The six (6) senses are:

(i) Sense of sight (eyes)
Page 230
(ii) Sense of hearing (ears)

(iii) Sense of taste (tongue)
(iv) Sense of smell (nose)
(v) Sense of touch (skin)
(vi) Kinaesthetic sense (muscles)
6. a. Criticism in art is a discussion or review of the characteristics of a work of

art OR a way of looking at, talking and thinking about works of art to understand
their aesthetic qualities OR a way of passing judgement on a work of art OR a
systematic discussion on a work of art usually involving four stages: Description,
Analysis, Interpretation and Evaluation.
b. Acquisition of knowledge to criticise a work of art include:
1. Sourcing knowledge about criticism from newspapers, magazines and other

published sources made available by critics.
2. Learning to see, hear or read about works of art on television, videos etc. These
help artists to gain deep insight into works of art.
3. Seeking to understand the styles, forms and functions of various works of art
will sharpen the taste of artists thereby assisting them to make better criticism of
works of art.
4. Having in-depth knowledge and understanding of the cultural background of

the artist to gain valuable information about the subject matter etc.
5. Getting familiar with the technique of handling tools and materials helps to
gain informed judgement.
6. Acquiring knowledge in the use of materials and tools as well as techniques

employed in specific works of art helps to appraise them.
Page 231
Q. 7 a. It is an area in psychology that deals with the study of the immediate

experience of living things by the use of our sense organs namely sense of sight
(eye), sense of hearing (ears), sense of taste (tongue), sense of touch or feeling
(skin), sense of smell (nose), and the sense of movement or kinesthetic sense
(muscles).
b. There are four vibrant stages or periods in the creative process. Each of them
takes a great deal of time. The stages are: Period of preparation, Period of
incubation, Period of insight or inspiration and Period of verification, elaboration,
perception and evaluation. In all these stages, perception plays a vibrant role.
1. Period of preparation
This is the first stage of the creative process where the creative person prepares
himself or herself to handle the problem at stake. He gathers a lot of information
from the environment using his senses primarily is the sense of sight and the sense
of hearing coordinates with the brain on what he is about to do and explores the
problem’s dimensions. He also explores various learning techniques to help him
amass an in-depth knowledge about the work he is about to do.
2. Period of incubation
This is the stage of the creative process whereby the creative person faces
difficulty while attending to the work and then take a temporarily leave from the
work. He puts all the senses to work by engaging himself in another work with the
hope of finding a remedy to the problem he has encountered. Incubation helps in
creative problem-solving in that it enables “forgetting” of misleading clues.
Absence of incubation may lead the problem solver to become fixated on
inappropriate strategies of solving the problem. Creative solutions to problems
arise mysteriously from the unconscious mind while the conscious mind is
occupied on other tasks. Therefore the creative person keeps working on other
things till he finally finds a solution to the problem.
3. Period of insight or inspiration

This is the period during which the creative person finds a solution to the problem
he encountered while doing the work. The remedy to the problem came because
of the sensitivity of the senses of the artist owing to the fact that it’s always
active. He leaves everything and quickly attends to the work. This may take the
creative person days, weeks, months or even years. It is also referred to as the
Intimation and illumination period.
Page 232
4. Period of verification, elaboration, perception and evaluation

At this stage, the creative person works very hard with great joy with the goal of
completing the work. He puts his sense of sight at work in evaluating the value of
the work. He admitting that knowledge is not inherent in one person. He shows
the work to friends, relatives and experts for their appreciation and criticisms.
MODERN ART
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. Which of these styles of art is based on the conception of forms, volume and
colours?
(a) Impressionism (b) Illusionism (c) Fauvism (d) Cubism
2. The concept of cubism originated from which of these artists?

(a) Pablo Picasso (b) Henri Matisse (c) Paul Cezanne (d) Leonardo Da Vinci
3. The work title “Les Demoiselles d’Avignon” was executed by

(a) Leonardo Da Vinci (b) Giotto (c) Pablo Picasso (d) Brunelleschi
4. The name ‘impressionism’ was got from the title of a painting by Monet
entitled
(a) Impressiononairre (b) Impression-sunrise (c) Impression-arise
(d) Impression-west
5. Which of these contemporary styles of art had elements of African culture?

(a) Expressionism (b) Fauvism (c) Impressionism (d) Cubism
6. The term ‘fauves’ means

(a) Perfectionist painters (b) Wild beasts (c) Wild painters (d) Crazy painters
7. The style of art that deals with the expression of the artists emotions is
referred to as
(a) Illusionism (b) Surrealism (c) Expressionism (d) Impressionism
Page 233
8. Illusionism is based on the concept of

(a) Foreshortening (b) Perspective (c) Criticism (d) Creativity
9. Which of these styles of art is based on the representation of dreams and

nightmares?
(a) Surrealism (b) Illusionism (c) Cubism (d) Fauvism
10. Another term for Neo-impression is

(a) Impressito (b) Pointillism (c) Division (d) Pressimonto
11. Which of these artists is a leader of the fauves?
(a) Henri Matisse (b) Pablo Picasso (c) Giotto (d) Paul Cezanne
12. In conceptual art, which of these is the most essential?

(a) Aesthetic qualities (b) Tools and materials (c) Ideas for the work
(d) Technical representation
13. Who led the conceptual artists?

(a) Pablo Picasso (b) Marcel Duchamp (c) George Braque (d) Derain
14. Which of these styles of art rejected the concept of realism?

(a) Surrealism (b) Cubism (c) Impressionism (d) Fauvism
15. Contextual art focuses on

(a) Forms of artwork (b) Realism of art works (c) Meaning of units of
design (d) Skills of the artist
16. An art style in which forms of objects are rendered in geometric shapes is
referred to as
(a) Contextual art (b) Conceptual art (c) Cubism (d) Impressionism
17. Which of the following famous painters lived in Tahiti?

(a) Gauguin (b) Cezanne (c) Picasso (d) Degas
18. Which of these artists was a proponent of expressionism?

(a) Van Gogh (b) Paul Gauguin (c) Paul Cezanne (d) El Greco
Page 234
19. Which of these works led to the term fauvism in art?

(a) ‘Last Supper’ (b) ‘Holy Trinity’ (c) ‘Salon d’Autonne’
(d) ‘Les Demoiselles d’Avignon’
20. Which of these Europeans artists was first influenced by African sculptures?
(a) Pablo Picasso (b) Henri Matisse (c) Paul Cezanne (d) Paul Gauguin
21. Digital art are mostly

(a) Made in digitals (b) Computer-generated (c) Three dimensional
(d) Inspired by vision
22. An advantage of digital art is that

(a) It is good for mass production of art forms. (b) It gives bright colours to
works. (c) It gives accurate depiction of works. (d) It ensures newness of
forms of art.
23. The electronic version of art tools used in digital art are referred to as
(a) Electronic art tools (b) Screen-touch tools (c) Phonographers
(d) Neographers
24. Byzantine art was mainly in
a. Collage b. Frescoe c. Mosaic d. Sculpture
25. Wild Beasts refers to

a. Fauvist painters b. Expressionist painters c. Impressionist painters
d. Post-impressionist painters
26. Greek statues were mostly carved in

a. Marble b. Ebony c. Sandstone d. Limestone
ANSWERS
1. D 11. A 21. B
2. A 12. C 22. A
3. C 13. B 23. D
4. B 14. B 24. B
5. D 15. C 25. A
6. B 16. C 26. A
Page 235
7. C 17. A
8. B 18. A
9. A 19. C
10. B 20. B
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. Write short notes on these modern styles of art:
(A) Cubism
(B) Impressionism
(C) Expressionism
(D) Surrealism
(E) Fauvism
(F) Illusionism
(G) Pointillism
2. Compare and contrast conceptual arts and contextual arts.
3. (a) What is digital art?
(b) State the importance of digital art.
4. Based on these headings:
i. Philosophy ii. Style iii. Theme/Subject iv. Exponents
write short notes on any TWO of the modern art movements in the 20th century.
ANSWERS
1. (a) Cubism:
This is a style of art whose concept is based on forms and shapes of
objects. The philosophy behind it was to reject the traditional and academic
demand for realism in art. It centred on abstraction and simplification influenced
by African sculpture. The father of cubism is Pablo Picasso. However, proponents
of this style of art include Derain, Henri Matisse, George Braque, etc.
(b) Impressionism:
The name impressionism was got from the painting by Monet titled
“Impression-Sunrise”. The focus of the impressionists was the perception of
visual sensations of light and colour. Their goal was to represent realism in its
highest degree contrary to the view of the cubists. Examples of impressionists
include Paul Gauguin, Paul Cezanne, Van Gogh, etc.
Page 236
(c) Expressionism:
This art movement came as a result of the artist’s desire in expressing his
emotions or feelings. This innate dictates of artists led to a distortion in forms and
shapes in nature. Proponents of this movement include Vincent Van Gogh,
Strindberg, El Greco, etc.
(d) Surrealism:
The whole concept of the surrealists was based on the representation of
dreams and nightmares. Natural combinations and associations of forms and
objects were breached resulting in a quite confusing and impossible composition.
Andre Breton is the leader of the Surrealists. Others include Pablo Picasso, Paul
Klee, etc.
(b) Fauvism:
The name ‘fauvism’ means ‘wild beasts’. This was because most of works
of this art movement created a fury to an art critic who gave them that name.
Their goal was to express their thoughts, feeling and emotions freely in an art
work. Proponents of this movement are Henri Matisse, Vlaminck, etc.
(c) Illusionism:
This style of art is based on the technical rules of perspective. However,
the works of the illusionists were to give the notion that pictorial space is an
extension of real space.
(d) Pointillism:
This style of art was focused on the use of points or dots in gradually
building up forms, pictures and scenes on a surface. The pointillists include
Seurat, Matisse, Van Gogh, etc.
2. Conceptual art is the art which is based on the concepts or ideas in a work of
art. Marcel Duchamp led this style of art. On the other hand, contextual art is
based on the meaning of forms and shapes. The meaning attributed to the
shape, colour, etc used, formed the basis for the artistic creation.
3. (a) Digital art refers to all art forms which are created by the use of the
computer in digital form. All designs are computer generated.
Page 237
(b) The importance of digital art are:

(i) Assists in the mass production of works of art.
(ii) There is accuracy and precision in design.
(iii) There is an array of choices in lettering styles, colour schemes, etc.
(iv) There is speed in execution of works of art.
(v) This art production technique is environmentally clean.
(vi) It is easy and quick when making corrections in the works of art.
4. Answer:
ART PHILOSOPHY STYLE THEME EXPON

MOVE ENTS
MENT
- To represent -Representation - Paintings of Gustave
REALIS subject matter of forms in an everyday Courbet,
M truthfully as they objectively real activities. Jean-
actually looked view. Francois
with no - Depiction of Millet,
exaggerations. - Depiction of people of all Honore
forms as classes in Daumier
- To avoid accurately as their
artificiality, artistic possible. surroundings
conventions and engaging in
supernatural real activities.
elements.
- To achieve an -Form is defined -Use of Dufy,
EXPRES emotional impact by an natural forms.Matisse,
SIONIS through agitated exaggeration of Vlamino
M brushwork, intense natural objects for -Central on k, Van
colours and the use emphasizing an human figure, Gogh,
of violet, emotion, mood or landscape and Paul
hallucinatory concept. cityscape. Gaugin,
imagery. Edourd
-Forms and Munch
-A desire to express colours are freely
what is felt rather distorted to
than perceived or achieve a
reasoned. heightened
emotional impact.
Page 238
CUBISM -To analyse and -Reduced natural - Use genre Pablo

dissect forms on forms into largely subjects Picasso,
canvas. angular, (everyday Georges
geometrical activities) and Braque,
-Used multiple equivalents. natural forms. Ferdnard
views of objects to Eg. Guitars, Ledger,
create the effect of -Presentation of figures, fruits, Duan
their three multiple views of bottles, Gris
dimensionality the same objects. houses etc.
while
acknowledging the -Figures and
two dimensional background have
surface of the equal importance.
picture plane.
FAUVIS -Saw colour as -Expressionistic -Outdoor Henri

M autonomous, as a -More decorative subject matter Matisse,
subject in and of - Bold, orderly usually Andre
itself. and charming simplified Derain,
colours George
-An attempt to use - Vigorous -Nudes, still Rouault
colours for their brushwork lives and
emotional value -Drawing that is landscapes
and not merely unrelated to
because they colour
describe something.
IMPRES -Artists tried to -Paintings lack Claude
SIONIS capture in paint, the realism Monet,
M fleeting effects of -Painting out Manet,
light, shade and -Duplicated the of doors and Camille
colour on natural glimmering effect social satire. Pissaro,
forms. of light bouncing Renoir,
off the surface of Degas,
-Reacted against an object. Berthe
the constraints of Morisot
the academic style -Used etc.
and subject matter complementary
colours such as
red and green to
one another to
Page 239
produce the
optical vibrations
perceived when
one is looking at
an object in full
sunlight.
SURREA -Artists wanted to -Paintings placed -Paintings of Louis
LISM make art ambigious emphasis on the dreams, Bourgeoi
and strange. mysterious, fantacies and s,
marvelous, the Leonora
-They dwelt on mythological and subconscious. Carringto
dreams and irrational. n, Max
fantacies to reveal Ernst,
the surreal (true -Works expresses Leonor
reality). hunger, sexuality, Fini
anger, fear, dread,
ecstasy.
ENTERPRENEURAL SKILLS
OBJECTIVES TEST
1. The public display of artefacts to show and market products is termed as

(a) Bazaar (b) Fair (c) Exhibition (d) Show
2. An exhibition held outside the country of an artist is known as

(a) Class exhibition (b) Foreign exhibition (c) International exhibition
(d) Overseas exhibition
3. A single artist holding an exhibition to display only his works is referred to as

(a) Single exhibition (b) Exclusive exhibition (c) Individual exhibition
(d) Artist exhibition
4. Exhibitions held in the society, where societal members partake is known as

(a) Societal exhibition (b) Community exhibition (c) Internal exhibition
(d) One on one exhibition
Page 240
5. In a group exhibition, several artist team up to

(a) Negotiate ideas (b) Display their works (c) Work on an artwork
(d) Fight for their rights.
6. In which type of exhibition is variety of items displayed?

(a) Special exhibition (b) Classical exhibition (c) General exhibition
(d) Typical exhibition
7. An example of a specialised exhibition is

(a) Ghana Monumental board fair (b) Ghana International Furniture
Exhibition (c) Ghana International Trade Fair (d) Ghana Local Trade Fair
8. Exhibiting a specific product is termed as

(a) Actual exhibition (b) Display exhibition (c) Specialised exhibition
(d) Display exhibition
9. Ghana International Furniture Exhibition (GIFEX) is an example of a

(a) Group exhibition (b) General exhibition (c) Specialised exhibition
(d) Regional exhibition
10. Which of these is not a reason for mounting an exhibition?

(a) To sell products (b) To advertise products (c) To display works for
reproduction (d) To make known artists
11. All these are considered in preparing an exhibition except

(a) Hanging (b) Packaging (c) Framing (d) Polishing
12. Which of these is not a vocation in visual arts?

(a) Graphic design (b) Textiles (c) Leather work (d) Actor
13. What vocation in visual art provides an enterprise in book illustration?

(a) Picture making (b) Graphic design (c) Sculpture (d) Jewellery
14. Which of these enterprises is under jewellery?

(a) Goth smithing (b) Wood carving (c) Weaving (d) Brick sand tiles
Page 241
15. What is undertaken to see whether there is market for an intended product?
(a) Campaign (b) Market watch (c) Market survey (d) Promotion
16. Which of these is the most essential factor to consider when setting up an
enterprise?
(a) Location (b) Capital (c) Labour (d) Business registration
17. Capital used in purchasing tools, equipment and materials for a new
enterprise is called
(a) Fixed capital (b) Start-up capital (c) Working capital (d) Original capital
18. The capital needed to keep the business running is referred to as:
(a) Start-up capital (b) Fixed capital (c) Working capital (d) Original capital
19. Salaries of workers are paid from

(a) Fixed capital (b) Working capital (c) Start-up capital (d) Original capital
20. All these are agencies that provide financial assistance for setting up an
enterprise except
(a) GRATIS (b) GETRADE (c) EMPRETEC (d) NBSSI
21. Which of these is not an agency that provides technical assistance to small-
scale industries?
(a) GRATIS (b) GETRADE (c) EMPRETEC (d) ITTO
ANSWERS
1. C 11. A 21. C
2. C 12. D
3. C 13. B
4. B 14. A
5. B 15. C
6. C 16. B
7. B 17. B
8. C 18. C
9. C 19. B
10. C 20. A
Page 242
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) Define the term exhibition.
(b) List five (5) levels of exhibition
2. (a) Mention the two main types of exhibition
(b) Explain one (1) type of exhibition
3. State five (5) factors to consider when planning, preparing and mounting an
exhibition.
4. (a) List five (5) vocations in visual arts
(b) State the selected enterprises for the vocations listed in (a) above
5. (a) Outline five (5) factors to consider before setting up an enterprise.
(b) Mention three (3) agencies each that provides (i) Financial assistance and
(ii) Technical assistance for small-scale industries.
6. Describe ten roles of Art associations and industries in nation building.
ANSWERS
1. (a) An exhibition is a public display of artefacts to show and market skills,
discoveries or inventions, etc.
(b) The five (5) levels of exhibitions are:

(i) Individual exhibition
(ii) Group exhibition
(iii) Class exhibition
(iv) International exhibition
(v) Community exhibition
(vi) School exhibition
(vii) District exhibition
(viii) Regional exhibition
2. (a) The two (2) main types of exhibition are:

(i) Specialised exhibition and (ii) Generalized exhibition
(b) i) Specialised exhibition:

This refers to an exhibition whereby a specific kind of product or good is
publicly displayed for sale. Several types and forms of particular products such as
furniture, sculpture, painting etc is exhibited. An example of a specialised
exhibition is the Ghana International Furniture Exhibition (GIFEX).
Page 243
ii) Generalised exhibition:

This refers to an exhibition in which several varieties of products or goods
are publicly displayed for sale. Different kinds of products such as painting,
textiles, graphic design ceramics, etc. are all exhibited. An example is the Ghana
International Trade Fair.
Factors to consider when planning, preparing and mounting an exhibition are:

(i) The date, time and place (venue for the exhibition)
(ii) The theme of the exhibition
(iii) The publicity or advertisement
(iv) The people to invite (invitations)
(v) Duration for the exhibition
(vi) Building appropriate portfolio
(vii) Preparing the exhibition centre or venue
(viii) Mounting of exhibits.
(ix) Preparing a brochure and visitors book
(x) Planning the opening and closing ceremonies.
3. (a) The vocations in visual arts are:

i. Textiles
ii. Picture making
iii. Graphic design
iv. Sculpture
v. Ceramics
vi. Jewellery
vii. Basketry
viii. Book industry
ix. Leather work
x. Painting
VOCATIONS SELECTED ENTERPRISE

Textiles Weaving and printing
Picture making Portrait designing
Graphic design Book illustration, package designing
Sculpture Wood carving, clay statues
Ceramics Brick and tile production
Page 244
Jewellery Bold and silver smithing

Basketry Container and furniture productions
Book industry Book publishing
Leather work Bag and shoe production
Painting Wall hangings and canvas paintings
4. (a) The factors to consider before setting up an enterprise are:

(i) The kind of business or enterprise to set up.
(ii) Capital to run the enterprise
(iii) Location of the enterprise
(iv) Availability of raw materials
(v) Labour force
(vi) Selection of the name of the enterprise
(vii) Registration of the business
(b) (i) Agencies for financial assistance are:

• National Board of Small Scale Industries (NBSSI)
• Export Promotion Council (EPC)
• Aid to Artisans Ghana (ATAG)
• Ghana Export Trade (GETRADE)
• EMPRETEC
• Banks and other financial institutions, etc.
(ii) Agencies for technical assistance are:

• GRATIS
• GETRADE
• ITTU
• ATAG, etc.
6. An art association is a group of artists, art patrons, art teachers etc. who have
come together with the sole aim of promoting, preserving, promoting and
transmitting the artistic cultural heritage of the nation through its organised
workshops, seminars, talks, durbars, exhibitions, fairs etc. On the other hand, an
art industry is a firm or company set up with the aim of producing art related
products and services. They largely do this to promote and preserve the artistic
cultural heritage of the nation.
Page 245
The art associations and industries play various roles in the building of the nation.
Some of these roles and how it enhances and builds the nation have been
discussed below.
i. They help in offering training to several unemployment youth as well as less

endowed artists in the nation-
The art associations and industries through the organisation of workshops and
training on the various art disciplines help unemployed youths in the nation in
acquiring workable skills and techniques for artistic productions. The acquisition
of the skills are utilised into the setting up of small-scale industries or enterprises
thereby eradicating or reducing to a minimal degree the unemployment ratio in
the nation.
ii. They ensure the promotion and preservation of artistic cultural heritage- The
activities of the various art associations and industries assists in the preservation
and promotion of our rich traditional arts such as Adinkra clothes, Akuaba dolls,
Stools, ceremonial swords, etc. These arts identify us as a Ghanaian people.
iii. They earn foreign exchange for the nation- The various works or products of
the art industries and art associations which are sometimes exported to foreign
lands helps in earning foreign exchange for the artist and the nation as a whole.
iv. Production of useful articles for the performance of activities in the nation-
The articles that the art industries produce help persons in the nation in the
carrying out their everyday life activities such as cleaning, storing, domestic
chores, industrial activities etc.
v. They assist in the dissemination of information that keeps the nation

functioning- Artistic products such as poster, billboards, flyers, signboards,
handbills etc. help in the spreading of health, economic, political, sports,
agricultural issues to the members in the nation. Without these artistic
communication tools information dissemination would have been a difficult
problem.
vi. Generation of revenue through the paying of taxes by the art industries and
associations- The various art industries and associations in the country pay taxes
Page 246
to the government through the various district assemblies for the development of
the nation. These funds are used for the construction of hospitals, roads etc.
vii. Empowering art teachers with current technologies, skills and techniques for
teaching- The various workshops and seminars organised by the art associations
and industries for teachers in schools and colleges abreast them with current or
modern technologies and skills for artistic productions. They in turn relay or
impart the skills to the students who are the future leaders of the nation. This
would invariably preserve and sustain the artistic heritage of the nation.
viii. Promotion of vocational education – The various art associations and art
industries promote vocational education which is seen as a tool for poverty
eradication in the nation. This education offers training of the head, heart and
hands. This endows them with the requisite skills for the production of articles.
ix. Promotes the sales and patronage of art in the nation- The activities of the
various art associations and industries have heightened the relevance or
importance of art in the nation. This has increased the value of art in the nation.
Many people purchase art products because of the enlightenment they have on the
importance of art.
x. Organisation of programs, seminars and talks to enhance the study and practice
of art in the nation- The study and practice of art has raised the value of art in the
country which was formerly seen as not so relevant in comparison to areas of
study such as science, mathematics and law. Several people allow their wards to
opt for the study of art. Business men, financial and technical institutions now
invest heavily in the trading of art products and services. This awareness has been
created as a result of the numerous exhibitions, seminars, talks and workshops
organised by the various art associations and industries.
Page 247
MANAGING AN ENTERPRISE
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The process of planning, organising, directing and controlling the activities of

an enterprise is referred to as
(a) Economics (b) Marketing (c) Management (d) Entrepreneurship
2. Which of these is not a function of a manager?

(a) Planning (b) Directing (c) Paying salaries (d) Controlling
3. The setting of goals and objectives of an enterprise is undertaken in

(a) Controlling (b) Organising (c) Directing (d) Planning
4. All these are considered at the planning stage of an enterprise except

(a) Kind of product or service (b) Decision making (c) Goal setting
(d) Co-ordination of activities of the enterprise
5. Making customers feel at home is technically termed as

(a) Customer companionship (b) Customer relation (c) Customer-worker
interaction (d) Smooth co-ordination
6. The two (2) types of cost are

(a) Immediate and future costs (b) High and low costs (c) Direct and
indirect costs (d) Efficient and inefficient costs
7. Variable costs are usually referred to as

(a) High cost (b) Direct cost (c) Low cost (d) Indirect cost
8. Fixed costs are usually referred to as

(a) High cost (b) Direct cost (c) Low cost (d) Indirect cost
9. Over-pricing means
(a) Pricing above the standard price of a product
(b) Pricing below the standard price of a product
(c) Pricing above the actual price for an intended product
Page 248
(d) Pricing the same as in the stock market
10. Calculating a percentage on the total cost of production of a product or good is

known as
(a) Profit (b) Profit margin (c) Profit percentage (d) Profit calculation
11. Pricing below the actual market price is termed as

(a) The going price system (b) The cost plus system (c) Introductory price
(d) Price discrimination
12. Selling the same product but using cheaper packaging is termed as
(a) Price discrimination (b) Price differentiation (c) Cost plus system
(d) Introductory price
13. All these are considered as indirect cost except

(a) Raw materials (b) Electricity (c) Transportation (d) Rent
14. To determine effective market for a product, which of these is essential?

(a) Research (b) Market watch (c) Market survey (d) Campaign in
research marketing
15. Selling goods and products in large quantities at a reduced rate is referred to
as
(a) Wholesale (b) Large scale (c) Retail (d) Fast sale
16. Retailing is selling goods and products in

(a) Large quantities (b) Batches (c) Shops (d) Small quantities
17. Which of these is the most popular marketing strategy?

(a) Exhibition (b) Advertisement (c) Packing (d) Transportation
18. Direct marketing deals with

(a) Exposing products directly (b) Selling directly to consumer
(c) Directly broadcasting products (d) Looking for customers directly
19. For an enterprise to know if it’s making profit or loss, what analysis is done?
Page 249
(a) Market analysis (b) Breakeven analysis (c) Production analysis

(d) Cost analysis
20. In management, the break-even point is

(a) The point at which total production cost is equal to the total sales
(b) The point at which the advertisement of product ceases
(c) The point at which the cost of advertisement is equal to the profit margin
(d) The point at which a business is bent on collapsing.
21. Challenges that might cause the collapse or loss of an enterprise is referred to
as
(a) Business challenges (b) Business fraud (c) Business risk
(d) Enterprise faults
22. All these are direct risks except

(a) Wrong business location (b) Theft (c) Fire (d) Mishandling of capital
23. Which risk of an enterprise is difficult to control?

(a) Pure risk (b) Direct risk (c) Indirect risk (d) Slow risk
24. To control theft in an enterprise, which of these strategies is the most

essential?
(a) Regular checking of stocks or products (b) Employ an accountant
(c) Employ a book keeper (d) Increase security
25. Lack of sales resulting from low quantity of products is

(a) Direct risk (b) Pure risk (c) Indirect risk (d) Slow risk
26. Basic marketing strategies in art include

a. Advertising, exhibition and attractive packaging
b. Costing, pricing and selling c. Planning, organizing and directing
d. Buying, selling and making profits
ANSWERS
1. C 11. A 21. C
2. C 12. D 22. A
Page 250
3. D 13. B 23. C
4. D 14. A 24. D
5. B 15. C 25. C
6. C 16. B 26. A
7. B 17. B
8. D 18. C
9. A 19. B
10. B 20. A
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. (a) Define the term management.
(b) Explain briefly, the four (4) major duties of a manager.
2. State the importance of good customer relations.
3. (a) Discuss the two (2) main types of cost.
(b) Briefly explain the factors that determine the price of a product.
4. (a) List the five (5) price settings.
(b) Differentiate between the price discrimination system and the price
differentiation system.
5. (a) What is marketing?
(b) State the basic marketing strategies.
(c) Explain the “Break Even Analysis”.
(d) What is a business risk?
(e) Differentiate between direct and indirect business risks.
6. a. What is customer relation?
b. Explain the following considerations for maintenance of good customer
relation:
i. Customer as an asset
ii. Customer as a guest
iii. Customer is always right.
7. a. i) Define an enterprise.
ii) State two types of enterprise.
b. i) Discuss two advantages of each type of enterprise mentioned above.
ii) List one disadvantage of each type of enterprise.
Page 251
ANSWERS
1. (a) Management is the process of planning, organising, directing and

controlling the activities of an enterprise to meet its set goals and objectives.
(b) The four (4) main functions of a manager are

i) Planning
ii) Organising
iii) Directing
iv) Controlling
i) Planning:
This involves determining whether the intended product would sell or not
through market survey.
It also entails finding a suitable location to set up the enterprise. Searching for
skilled labour is considered under the planning stage. The capital required to man
the enterprise is also considered at the planning stage.
ii) Organising:
This is the putting together of resources such as capital, labour, etc to commence
the business. It involves setting up the enterprise and structuring the line of
authority in the firm.
iii) Directing:
This refers to the leadership style employed to get work done. It involves
establishing policies, co-ordinating the work of staff, training the staff, providing
motivation, etc.
iv) Controlling:
This refers to the measuring of the performance of an enterprise against the
standards of the enterprise. It involves setting standards, production targets,
checking production rates to ensure that the business is reaching its targets.
Expenses for production are monitored. All the expenses of the company are
monitored to ensure that the enterprise is healthy, giving feedback to staff to
improve work quality and standards.
Page 252
2. Good customer relations is relevant because of these:

(i) It ensures the maximum sales of products.
(ii) It helps the business to get a good name and prestige in the community
or country.
(iii) It serves as an advertising tool to prospective consumers.
(iv) It promotes peace, understanding and friendliness between the staff
and the customers.
(v) It serves as a check in knowing the pitfalls of the company including
faults in manufactured products. This is because consumers are more
willing to open up due to the friendly atmosphere they enjoy in the
firm.
3. (a) The two (2) main types of cost are

(i) Direct cost
(ii) Indirect cost
(i) Direct cost:

This is a type of cost which is directly related to the product. It includes
cost of raw materials for the production and the salaries of workers. It is
also known as variable or production cost because the cost of raw
materials and the salaries of workers may vary in time and circumstances.
(ii) Indirect cost:

This is a type of cost which is not directly linked to the manufacturing of
the product. They include costs for electricity charges, water bill, rent,
taxes, adverts, depreciation cost of tools and equipment, telephone bills,
transportation, postage, etc. Indirect costs are also known as fixed or
overhead costs.
(b) The factors that determines the price of a product are:

(i) Total production cost and
(ii) Profit margin.
(i) Total production cost:

This is the summation of all the cost spent for the production of products.
Thus, adding both the direct and indirect costs.
Page 253
(ii) Profit margin:

This is a percentage of the total cost which is calculated and added to the
total production cost. The profit margin is usually 10% of the total
production cost.
4. (a) The five (5) price settings are:

(i) Introducing price system
(ii) Going-price system
(iii) Cost plus system
(iv) Price discrimination system
(v) Price differentiation system
(b) The price discrimination system, also known as “What the market can
bear” pricing system involves pricing the same product differently at different
areas depending upon the income levels of buyers. For instance, products are
sold at higher prices in cities and at lower prices in towns and villages.
On the other hand, the price differentiation system deals with the selling of the
same product but using cheaper packaging for some and pricing lower while
pricing higher for costly or quality packaging. The price of the same product
differs due to the differences in packaging.
5. (a) Marketing is the process of offering products and services to consumers by

employing advertising and supplying skills.
(b) The basic marketing strategies are:

i) Advertisement
ii) Exhibitions, Bazaars and Fairs
iii) Effective decoration and finishing
iv) Attractive packaging
v) Transportation
(c) The “break-even” analysis is the analysis of the total cost of production
and sales to monitor whether the sales cover the total cost of production.
Page 254
(d) Business risks are the dangers or challenges a business set up faces that
might lead to the enterprise not meeting its set goals or might result in the
total collapse of the enterprise.
(e) Direct risks are the risks or dangers that directly affect the enterprise
negatively. These include theft, fire, and misuse of capital.
On the other hand, indirect risks are risks which indirectly affect the
progress of an enterprise. Examples include lack of sales due to faulty or
low quality products, wrong business location, inflation, changes in labour
laws, introduction of new taxes, etc.
6. a. Customer relation is the art of dealing with the customer in a manner that
will make him feel welcomed and appreciated.
b. i. Customer as an asset- The customer has the money to buy every time and this
helps the enterprise to grow. Therefore the customer has to be encouraged always
to do business with the enterprise.
ii. Customer as a guest- The customer must always be treated well. He must be
shown some courtesies as we would do for a guest. Little favours must be
extended to the customer.
iii. Customer is always right- The customer has to be tolerated no matter his
rudeness or attitude. Any situation that is likely to make an enterprise loose a
customer must be avoided entirely. This includes quarrelling and arguing with the
customer.
7. a. i. An enterprise is a business activity or activities aimed specifically at

growth and profit.
ii. The two types of enterprise are:
1. Sole proprietorship enterprise
2. Partnership enterprise
b. i. The two advantages of a sole proprietorship enterprise are:

1. It is easy to organize and needs only a small amount of capital.
Page 255
2. It permits a high degree of flexibility for the owner since he/she is the boss of
the business establishment.
3. Due to the owner’s unlimited liability, some creditors are more willing to
extend credit.
4. The owner receives all the profit of the business.
The two advantages of a partnership enterprise are:

1. The enterprise has unlimited resources. Banks and other financial institutions
are more willing to grant loans to partnership enterprises because of their huge
assets and low mortality rate.
2. It has a limited liability for business debts. All the partners of the enterprise are
responsible for paying all debts and damages of the business equally.
3. If the business fails, creditors would collect their resources from all partners of
the enterprise. The burden will not be imposed on only one partner.
4. At the event of death of one partner, the continuation of the business is not
difficult, because the other parties would take on the business activities with few
or without any challenges.
ii. The disadvantages of sole proprietorship are:

1. The enterprise has limited resources. Banks are reluctant to grant loans to
single proprietorship considering its small assets and high mortality rate.
2. It has an unlimited liability for business debts. The single owner is responsible
for paying all debts and damages of the business.
3. If the business fails, creditors may force the sale of the proprietor’s personal
property as well as his business property to satisfy their claim.
4. At the event of death of the owner, the continuation of the business is difficult,
because a new owner must typically accept all liabilities including the paying of
all the debts of the business.
The disadvantages of partnership are:

1. It is difficult to organize since it involves a team of members and needs a huge
amount of capital to start the enterprise.
2. It is highly stiff and is based on rigid rules. Decisions cannot be made by just
one party. The consent of the other parties has to be taken and it’s very difficult in
arriving at agreed decisions by partners.
3. Due to partners’ limited liability, some creditors are not willing to extend
credit.
4. The partners share all the profit of the business equally.
Page 256
FORM, SYMBOLISM AND FUNCTIONS IN GHANAIAN ARTS
OBJECTIVE TEST
1. The symbol of patience is

(a) Dove (b) Heart (c) Bite not one another (d) Except God
2. What denotes the office of a chief?

(a) Umbrella (b) Linguist staff (c) Stool (d) Ceremonial sword
3. The central pillar in the female stool represents

(a) Female children (b) Male children (c) Ancestors (d) God
4. The four upright poles in the female stool represent

(a) Male support (b) Female support (c) Earth (d) Motherliness
5. The stool is believed to be the

(a) Hearts of the society (b) Souls of the society (c) Minds of the society
(d) Feelings of the society
6. Which part of the stool signifies female tenderness and friendliness?

(a) Base (b) Central pillar (c) Arc (d) Upright poles
7. The seagull bird carved on canoes symbolises

(a) Beauty (b) Hope (c) Superiority (d) Severity
8. The ‘Arm and hand’ is a symbol of

(a) Strength (b) Hard work (c) Importance (d) Manliness
9. The animal that is often depicted with patience is

(a) Tortoise (b) Chameleon (c) Lizard (d) Eagle
10. The ‘Obi-nka-bi’ adinkra symbol means

(a) Bite one another (b) Bite not one another (c) Sympathy (d) Disunity
11. Which of these animals represent wisdom and insight?

(a) Ant (b) Eagle (c) Lion (d) Elephant
12. The adinkra symbol which connotes adaptability to changing situations is

known as
(a) Ohene Aniwa (b) Nyame biribi wo soro (c) Nkyinkyim (d) Krado
Page 257
13. Which of these is a plain kente weave pattern?

(a) Nkyeretie (b) Kyeretie (c) Hweepan (d) Ahwenam
14. The kente weave pattern that depicts greatness and power of a king is
(a) Kyeretie (b) Faprenu (c) Hweepan (d) Osono kokroko
15. What kente pattern has a double warp sheet?

(a) Kyeretie (b) Faprenu (c) Hweepan (d) Akyem
16. Which of these kente patterns is rich in colour?

(a) Faprenu (b) Hweepan (c) Akyem (d) Kyertire
17. The kente pattern that has its designs at the borders of the woven cloth is
(a) Kyeretwie (b) Kyeretire (c) Akyem (d) Hweepan
18. ‘Capturing a live leopard’ is a transliteration of which of these kente patterns?

(a) Akem (b) Faprenu (c) Kyeretwie (d) Kyeretie
19. The symbol of faithfulness is

(a) Moon and Star (b) Fish and Water (c) King and Queen (d) Tortoise and Snail
20. The representation of concepts and ideas BEST defines

(a) Emblem (b) Symbol (c) Logo (d) Crest
21. The square shapes in the central pillar of the stool symbolises
(a) Truthfulness (b) Justice (c) Power (d) Wisdom
22. The ‘Pineapple’ symbolises

(a) Agriculture (b) Sweetness (c) Doing things at their right times
(d) Closeness and Loyalty
23. The ‘Sankofa’ adinkra pattern is represented with a

(a) Cock (b) Bird (c) Crocodile (d) Elephant
24. Symbol of total ownership is depicted on jewellery by a/an

(a) Elephant (b) Mudfish (c) Lion (d) Crab
25. Which animal connotes ‘changing to suite diverse situations’?

(a) Chameleon (b) Mudfish (c) Crocodile (d) Akyem bird
26. Ceremonial swords are usually arranged
Page 258
(a) Before a seated king (b) Besides a king (c) Behind a seated king
(d) In front of a king’s seat
27. Three heads carved in one is a symbol which means

(a) Three heads normally go into counsel (b) One head in three is better
(c) One head cannot go into counsel (d) There is more insight in three heads
28. The Akuaba doll is a symbol of

(a) Beauty (b) Children (c) Fertility (d) Motherliness
29. Which of these shapes is a symbol of purity?

(a) Oval (b) Circle (c) Triangle (d) Square
30. The anchor is a symbol of

(a) Authority (b) Brevity (c) Stability (d) Strength
31. A traditional symbol of an arrow head on a canoe mean

a. Hardwork and happiness b. Patience and care c. Hope and peace
d. Safety and protection
32. The Ametakpakpe of the Ewe tribe is used for

a. Twin worship b. Naming ceremony c. Flankuru d. Faro
33. The Kore mask is associated with the

a. Bambara b. Baule c. Senufo d. Yoruba
ANSWERS
1. B 11. B 21. B 31. D
2. B 12. C 22. C 32. A
2. D 13. C 23. B 33. A
3. A 14. C 24. B
4. B 15. B 25. A
5. C 16. C 26. D
6. B 17. B 27. C
7. B 18. C 28. C
8. A 19. A 29. B
9. B 20. B 30. C
Page 259
ESSAY QUESTIONS
1. a. What is a stool?
b. Draw and label the female stool.
c. Mention and explain the symbolism of four parts of the female stool.
2. Write the symbolism of these animals carved at the top of linguist staffs:
i) Eagle ii) Lion iii) Tortoise iv) Chameleon v) Crab
3. Explain the significance of these designs on jewelleries and canoes:
i) Seagull bird ii) Star iii) Heart iv) Arm and Hand v) Mudfish
4. Complete the table below by filling in the spaces provided:
TOTEM SIGNIFICANCE
Slow but sure in action
Tortoise with a snail
Strength, power and might
Crab
5. Write short notes on the Akuaba doll and its symbolism.

6. a. Define symbol
b. Explain symbolism
c. Explain the symbolism and uses of the following shapes in the Ghanaian
Society:
ANSWERS
1. a. A stool is a seat with no arm, back or head rest. Symbolically, a stool is
an artefact used to denote the office of a chief or king. It is believed to
symbolize the soul of the society. It serves as a symbolic link between the
common people in the society and their leader who may be a king or chief.
Page 260
1. b.
Female embrace (female warmth and influence in society)
Male support and

Female children influence in society
in society
Presence and power Male children
of God in society in society
God’s justice
and fairness
Support of the earth
1. c. I) Top Arc- It symbolises the loving embrace of a mother. It is also a symbol

of motherly care and friendship.
ii) The four rectangular shaped pillars- It symbolises the male power, strength
and dependence on men in the society.
iii) Triangular pointed projections- It represents the male children in the society.
iv) Rounded projections- It represents the female children in the society.
v) Central pillar- It symbolises the presence and power of God in the society.
vi) Small square or rectangular holes- It signifies the justice and fairness of God
in the society.
vii) Base- It symbolises the support or stability of the earth.
2. i) Eagle- It symbolises greatness, superiority, wisdom and determination to
succeed.
ii) Lion- It signifies strength, power and might.
iii) Tortoise- It is a symbol of self-sufficiency and independence.
iv) Chameleon- It signifies one’s slowness but surety in action.
v) Crab- It symbolises simplicity and peacefulness.
Page 261
3. i) Seagull bird- This bird is a symbol of hope.
ii) Star- It is a symbol of hope.
iii) Heart- It is a symbol of patience.
iv) Arm and Hand- It is a symbol of hard work.
v) Mudfish- It is a symbol of total ownership.
4.
TOTEM SIGNIFICANCE
Chameleon Slow but sure in action
Tortoise with a snail Peace and harmony
Lion Strength, power and might
Crab Simplicity
5. The Akuaba doll-
This is a carved wooden doll that bears features of the Asante concept of beauty.
It is carved from a white hardwood known as ‘Sese’. It is blackened with a paste
prepared from a mixture of soot from the base of the cooking pot and albumen
from raw eggs. Sometimes, potash from plantain skins and rust from metals are
added to the mixture. The doll is feminine in nature.
It has a culminated or exaggerated oval head with a long ringed neck in an odd
number.
The doll also has oval buttocks and calves, long toes, thin fingers and hairy
eyebrows.
The Akuaba doll is a symbol of fertility. It is believed to help barren women to

procreate or give birth. The doll was first carved for a certain Asante barren
woman by name Akua, who was branded as a witch due to her barrenness. The
doll helped her to give birth. Also, the Akuaba doll is used in finding children
who are lost and are believed to be taken by dwarfs. In some cultures and among
people like the Dangmes and Ewes, wooden dolls in the likeness of the Akuaba
dolls are carved to represent dead twin children.
Page 262
6. a. A symbol is the representation of an abstracted idea with a sign, shape,

colour etc. because of convention, association or resemblance.
b. Symbolism is the ideas behind the symbols used for the production of the work.
They are the suggestions through imagery of something that is invisible or
intangible. This representation of the material object is not simply for its own
interest or beauty but as standing for an abstract idea.
c. i. The circle symbolizes the presence and power of God. It also symbolizes the
spirit of males in the society. It also serves as a symbol of purity and holiness.
ii. Triangle is a female symbol and is one of the most commonly used symbols
in Ghana. Triangles are used as ornaments on the chief’s headgear, elbow bands,
and sandals. It symbolizes attraction and warmth of friendship. During puberty
rites in the Akan community, the husband gives chewing sticks which are in
triangular forms to his would-be-wife to symbolize his wish for an endless and
faithful love.
iii. Square symbolizes the purity in males as well as God’s influence in the
society. It is also used to symbolize the extent of the power of a ruler. Due to its
equal or even sides, it also symbolizes the fairness, justice and impartiality of
God.
iv. Concentric Circle serves as a symbol of fertility and is sometimes tattooed on

the bodies of infertile men to warn their souls never to return to the land of the
living with impotency. The necks of Akuaba dolls and the Bundu masks believed
to invoke fertility charms in barren women are also in concentric circles to signify
fertility powers. It is used to decorate the foreheads of the terra cotta head used in
funeral ceremonies among the Nok.
Page 263
View publication stats

Questions and Answers Real

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Questions and Answers Real

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

See discussions, stats, and author profiles for this publication at: https://www.researchgate.

Questions and Answers on General Knowledge In Art

Book · October 2012

Societal Norms tailored for biodiversity conservation View project

The user has requested enhancement of the downloaded file.

RATIONALE FOR VISUAL ARTS EDUCATION

1. A means of self-expression is known as

2. The two main branches of art are

3. All these are visual art forms except

4. Which one among these is a performing art form?

5. An artist who makes illustrations in books is referred to as

8. Which of these is a reason why visual art should be studied in schools?

10. To correct growth deficiencies, art serve as a/an

13. Verbal arts include

14. The artist communicates ideas through

15. Art is an integral part of

16. The study of art helps the learner to become

17. Visual art refers to

20. The use of tools and materials help to educate the

21. An expert with a discriminating taste in an area of fine art is known as

22. An artist exercises his civic responsibility when he

23. Visual Art Education is useful for

24. Which of the following clearly identifies plastic art?

25. The art which depicts recognizable natural forms is referred to as

26. The subject matter of a work of art is its

27. Goods are packaged to increase their

28. Water and oil are used on

29. Visual art education fosters creativity by

30. Abstract art means

31. Works of art are preserved and displayed in

32. A drawing or painting done on a wall is a

33. In visual art, the regular repetitions of form is known as

34. Batik literally means to draw with

36. What type of fibre is rayon?

37. A leather packet containing charms called a

38. What tool is used in piercing sections of a book for sewing?

40. The best tool cutting through a ball of clay is a

41. The best tool used for scraper board work is a

42. Applied arts refers to the type of artwork that

43. In textiles, the term ‘bleeding’ means

44. Knowledge about cultural heritage is NOT acquired through

45. A benefit derived from the visual art program is to

46. An activity done in both sculpture and ceramics is

47. In drawing, soft pencils are used to give

48. An art patron is someone who

50. Perspective is the optical illusion suggesting

9. a. What is art therapy?

2. The five career opportunities in art are:

(a) Package Designer: He designs packages for products of firms and

3 (a) Art is defined as a means of expressing one’s ideas through painting,

VISUAL ART: PERFORMING ART:

5. The government’s attitude towards the Ghanaian art is positive. The

6. The five functions or importance of art in the community are:

deities. In some religious denominations, special books which are believed to be

b. The five concepts of art are:

ii. Reduction of rural-urban migration:

iii. Source of revenue for the nation:

iv. It offers training in the form of apprenticeship:

v. It promotes the tourism industry:

vi. It serves as avenues for cultural education:

b. The five ways by which art can be used as a therapy include:

1. Which of the following is the hardest pencil for drawing?

2. Which of these is not a drawing tool?

3. The balance of light and shade in a picture is referred to as